Home

Content Manager Explorer options

1. Send jobs to A translation system Completed all Items In E Translation Job success retrieve items retrieved Process EE Copy items to items in target n Publications SOL amp eGlobal Transtation Jobs require authorization before being sent and are therefore set to the Awaiting Authorization state Translations are handled in the following stages by the Translation Manager 168 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager 1 Definition The Translation Job has been defined and has been saved but has not been sent to the translation management system At this stage you can still edit the Translation Job and add or remove items When you send the job for translation the job status is set to Ready for Translation 2 Ready for Translation The Translation Job has been defined and has been sent and is awaiting transferral to the translation management system In the Ready for Translation stage the Translation Jobs are waiting to be picked up by the Translation Manager Service The service polls the Translation Manager at configured intervals for Translation Jobs submitted for translation When the service picks up the job the job status is set to Sending for Translation 2 a Awaiting Authorization If you are sending content for translation to SDL BeGlobal and you have Authorization Required configured on your Publication Folder Structure Group or Category you will n
2. 57 E X D Ch New Ka ins GwePrint Hierarchy Locaize ceize Classify sassy Recast Where Used Properties BkeePrintiig anhor Detais The Workflow tab displays controls to perform actions on Workflow activities and Workflow processes The controls are active for Components Pages Component Templates and Page Templates that are in Workflow Home Create Organze Workfiow Administrabon Tools 5 nid RU Fish A Zii k Force tinis 3evert Open Approval Process CE Status List Workflow Activity Wvorkfiow Process Workflow Management The E mail Management tab displays controls to manage Mailings and Mailing Campaigns and view Mailing Statistics The controls are active in the Outbound E mail node in a Publication Workflow E mail Management Audience Management Adminstration Tools New Maing e dh 4 e be gt 2 poi a Maungsz Emai Canpegrs h WmInTcs The Audience Management tab displays controls for managing Contacts The controls Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 15 Content Manager Explorer are active in the Audience Manager node in a Publication The Tools tab displays quick links to add ons Home Create Organize Workflow Administration z Template Builder Ope Development Ribbon controls The following controls appear in either the main screen Ribbon in a Ribbon of one or more dialogs or in both Note Depending on your security profile not all of these co
3. Ia US GS R Open Where Used Preview Compare History Localize Unlocalize Level 0 Manage Edit BluePrintina 00 Corporate SDL Tridion Newsle Level 1 E SDL Tridion Newsle SDL Tridion Newsle E SDL Tridion Newsle BluePrint Hierarchy for A SDL Tridion Newsletter July 2015 in o1_French Item URI Publication Key 01_French tem 29 717 BluePrinting Status Shared Modified 9 24 2013 2 30 AM Approval Status Undefined Version 1 Publish Status Not Published Procedure l In the Content Manager Explorer right click an item and in the context menu that opens choose BluePrinting gt BluePrint Hierarchy In the Home tab of the BluePrint Viewer you can perform the following actions on the selected item Open allows you to navigate to open an item displayed in the BluePrint hierarchy for editing Where Used allows you to see where an item is used for more information refer to Where used on page 45 Delete allows you to delete an item provided you have the necessary rights and permissions for that item and the item is not being used For more information see Deleting an item on page 33 Preview allows you to Preview an item Compare allows you to compare two different versions of Components Component Templates Page Templates Pages or Schemas For more information see Comparing two versions on page 137 History lists all versio
4. If you selected to update existing Contacts in the All Contacts node the Contacts will be updated if the Address Book specified in the CSV file exists and the specified Contact exists and resides in this Address Book inaselected Address Book the Contacts will be updated if they reside in this Address Book If you selected to create new Contacts in the All Contacts node the Contacts will be created in the specified Address Book ina selected Address Book Contacts will be created in this Address Book the Contact is not created if the Contact identification is not unique 220 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Creating the Keyword import file You can import Keywords contained in a delimited file format such as a CSV file and add these Keywords to Contacts note the import does not create Contacts or Categories This section describes the requirements for the import file used to import Keywords The data in the file must be delimited using the supported formatting The file must be encoded using UTF 8 if it contains unicode characters The first row of data in the file must contain the names of the various data columns At least one column must contain an identifier to uniquely identify Contacts see Contact identification below A Keyword column the values of which may or may not map to an existing Keyword depending on whether you want to crea
5. fe Francais Nederlands Nederiands English English Deutsch Belgian Site Dutch Site German Site AII the sites share the same design Therefore they share the same Page Templates and Component Templates They also share the same content structure of Folders and Structure Groups In this scenario users at the corporate level create some of the content They share this content and translators translate it into the four languages Language specific country Publications can share the translated information and can add local content When users create Pages in these Publications and publish them the resulting Web sites can include multilingual and region specific information Localizing or unlocalizing items If you are working in a Child Publication to modify the content of shared items you must create a local copy which then becomes editable If you do not want to use the local copy of an item you can also unlocalize the item If you unlocalize you will again use the shared item Before you begin To localize or unlocalize an item you must have Localize permissions for the Folder or Structure Group in which the item is stored 44 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual BluePrinting Procedure 1 To localize or unlocalize an item navigate to the location in the tree that contains the item you want to localize 2 In the list view select the item you wish to localize or unlocalize and in the Organize tab of the Rib
6. 0 cece cece ee hh t 94 Creating a Structure Group 6 iskt nAn a EER EE e nent E a 96 Editing a Structure Group 52e LeRERUR ved dee tana eee adele aerated ede 97 Publishing or unpublishing Structure Groups 98 jM A 99 About B ndl s cer rer Ree PR PORE ees eas bea ERR bene 99 Creating Bundle eecenexbe exert dr Gd eed aot X ee UP Rens UTR i COR E 101 Adding one item to a Bundle 0 eee 101 Selecting items and adding them to a Bundle 0 ccc eee 102 Selecting a Bundle and adding items to it 0 cece eee eee ee 103 Removing an item from multiple Bundles 0 cece eee eens 104 Removing one or more items from a Bundle 0 cee eee eee eee 105 Publishing or unpublishing a Bundle 0 e cece eee eens 105 Viewing the properties of a Bundle 6 eens 106 Starting Workflow on a Bundle 0 00 cece eee nee e 106 Workflow tab ofa Bundle 2 0 0 6 eee Ep pa na 108 11 WOrKIOW EET 111 Picking up a Workflow Activity assigned to your Group eee eee eee eee 111 Performing a Workflow Activity you have picked up cece eects 112 Reassigning a Workflow Activity you have picked up 1 ee eee eee eee eee 112 Finishing a Workflow Activity you have performed 0 e cece ee ee eee 113 Publishing items that are in Workflow 0 c eects 114 Creating a Task iios erroe
7. Refresh the list of ratings To see the most up to date list of ratings for this Component or Page click Refresh Examine individual ratings Below the header you see the individual ratings as submitted by users showing the User name Rating and Date Rated Click any column header to sort or reverse sort by that property You can also click the filter icon in the User name column header to narrow down your selection to ratings submitted by a specific user or range of users Viewing and filtering comments for a Contact You can see comments submitted by a specific Contact using the filters available in an Address Book Comments tab Procedure 1 In the Publications area select a Publication and navigate to Audience Manager gt Address Books 2 Select an Address Book that contains the Contact you are looking for or All Contacts if you do not know which Address Book the Contact belongs to 3 From the list of results double click the Contact to open it and in the dialog that opens select the Comments tab Result A number of filter options appears in the top of the Comments tab and the bottom of the content area shows all comments submitted by this Contact 4 Apply any or all filters to change the comments displayed in the bottom half The filters available to you are Moderation status Clear any of the status values to not see items with that moderation status in the results check a status value to see items with t
8. Remove button remove the current link Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 57 Component field types Multimedia link fields and Component link fields Multimedia links allow you to create one or more links to Multimedia Components Component links allow you to create one or more links to Components which may include Multimedia Components if the field is configured to allow them About this task Component link fields and multimedia link fields may each have the following characteris tics The field may accept more than one value The field may be mandatory this is indicated with a You can add a link to a Multimedia Component if the target Component is in the same Publication as the Component that you are creating Note The Component you want to link to must exist before you can create a link to it Procedure 1 Inthe Component you are creating or editing click the Insert button next to the link field 2 Inthe window that appears you can select a Component to link to in one of the following ways In your Building Blocks Folder structure navigate to the location of the Component or Multimedia Component for which you want to create a link The List View displays Components filtered based on the allowed Schema or Schemas configured for this field In your Categories and Keywords select a Keyword The List View displays Components that have been classified with this Keyword or a c
9. Rollback BluePrinting when an item is checked out in a Parent Publication the Child Publication shares the last checked in version of the item Version number while the item is checked out the minor version number increases by 0 1 each time the item is edited and saved Workflow if an item has an associated Workflow the item will enter the Workflow Process the first time it is edited and saved Publishing if an item is checked out through an edit action or through an explicit check out the current version not the checked out version of the item is published If an item is checked out through a Workflow process it can only be published if it meets minimum approval status otherwise the current version is published Checking in an item You can check in an item that you have checked out Before you begin To check in an item you must have rights for the item and write permissions for the containing Folder or Structure Group About this task The check in action does not apply to items that are checked out through a Workflow Process Items in Workflow are checked in after the last activity in the associated Workflow Process is completed 144 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Versioning Procedure 1 To check in an item access the Folder or Structure Group in which the item is stored 2 Select the item you want to check in and in the Home tab of the Ribbon click Check in Results The item is c
10. 6 neice eee Re RR dd cabs dade E ERE E ease 264 Clearing the e mail queue for a Mailing 0 c cece eee eee eens 267 Viewing Mailing statistics wios roeren i eritici e ii a E a E Ee 267 Mailing statistics crane iend bese sete ERE Gn EXER E E REI Eh 268 Viewing Mailing statistics 2 0 0 0 ieee I 269 Viewing Distribution List statistics serans ianen inni e 271 Viewing Contact details and Mailing details 0 0 cece eee eee eee 274 Refreshing statistics 15e nieces tates pean EAR sade RS re p p bees 275 20 User Generated Content aaseiidessespest pepes pun devubebyi ned dub ed QR TUNE 217 Where to find comments and ratings 6 rrera 277 Viewing and filtering all comments and ratings in Content Manager 279 Viewing and filtering all comments and ratings in a specific Publication 279 Viewing and filtering comments in the comments screen 0000 eee eee 280 Viewing and filtering ratings in the ratings screen 0 00 e eee eee eee 283 Comments tab for a Component or Page 0 0 cece eee eee teenies 285 Ratings tab for a Component or Page 0c cece een eee eens 285 Viewing and filtering comments for a Contact 0 cece eee eee eens 286 Ratings tab fora Contact 2 0 0 0 ccc e e 288 Moderating a comment 4 s005440d04 00b4 du bedded dGiebide pees AER ETE ER 289 Deleting a COMMENt os scene eet need anaes daa HERR OUR LR E ER es
11. Important Contact Extended Details are configurable and therefore vary depending on your implementation of Outbound E mail Creating Target Groups for Outbound E mail A Target Group defines a category of user In Outbound E mail you can personalize the content of a Mailing using Target Groups Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 255 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Before you begin To create a Target Group you must have Customer Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Folder You must have created a taxonomy for Outbound E mail Contacts the definition of a Target Group in Outbound E mail is based on Keywords About this task Target Groups define a set of user characteristics of mail recipients in the case of Outbound E mail You use Target Groups to display different content of what is essentially the same Mailing to different Contacts depending on what Target Group s the Contact is a member of For example if you have a Mailing that you want to send to Customers and Prospects because it is essentially the same except with one small difference which is applicable for Customers only you can create a Target Group called Customer and associate the content the Component Presentation on a Page with this Target Group The result is that the e mail sent to a Contact marked as a Customer will be slightly different to the e mail sent to a Contact marked as a Prospect Keywords are pro
12. In the tree or in list view right click the item and from the context menu that opens select Add to a Bundle Result A dialog opens showing a Folder tree on the left Navigate to the location of your Bundle in the Folder tree and open it then select the Bundle in the list view and select Add The button is disabled if you cannot add the item to this Bundle for example if the item is the Bundle itself Result SDL Tridion adds the item to the Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is currently in workflow the item is assigned to the User Group associated with the current Activity Repeat these steps as needed to add the item to more Bundles Close the item dialog Selecting items and adding them to a Bundle Add items to an existing Bundle from the Home tab of the Ribbon toolbar To add items to a new Bundle create the empty Bundle first Before you begin If a Bundle is subject to a Workflow Process and currently in workflow you can only add items to it if all of the following are true The Bundle is currently in a Workflow state that allows the adding of items to it The items you intend to add are all Components Pages Component Templates Page Templates Template Building Blocks and or other Bundles The items you intend to add are not currently in workflow 102 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Bundles Procedure 1 3 In the tree on the left navigate to a location that
13. Size the size of the font a Color the color of the text Background the color of the background Style italic bold and underline Effects strikethrough superscript and subscript Note The superscript and subscript effects are mutually exclusive You may only select one of the two 68 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Component field types Formatting tables in a Format Area You can create and format tables in format areas Inserting a table in a format area When editing or creating a Component you can insert tables in format areas You can identify a format area by the Design Source and Preview tabs that appear above the field Procedure 1 To insert a table in a format area in the format area of the Component place your cursor at the location in which you wish to insert the table 2 Inthe Format tab of the Component Ribbon click Table The Insert Table window appears 3 Enter the number of columns and rows and press OK The Table Editor window appears 4 You can edit the following table characteristics Table properties and formatting Row formatting Column formatting Cell properties and formatting Note See Zable properties and formatting on page 70 for information about each of these options 5 Click OK to insert the table with the selected formatting Results The Content Manager inserts the table in the format area with the selected formatting o
14. 11 In the tree structure on the left navigate to a Publication and Folder that contains a Bundle to which you want to add the item and add it to that Bundle by selecting the Bundle and clicking Add This adds the item to the selected Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is already in workflow the item will be too You can also select Close which has the same effect as clicking Not Now in the previous dialog Results The Content Manager stores a modified version of the Page Note You cannot delete any items used on the Page Components Component Templates Page Templates Metadata Schema Previewing a Page You can preview a Page from an open Page in edit mode the open Page in view mode and directly from the list view Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 87 Pages Before you begin To preview a Page you must have Page Management rights and read permissions for the containing Structure Group Procedure 1 To preview a Page open in Edit or View mode click the Preview icon in the Home tab of the Ribbon toolbar 2 To preview a Page from the list view a Navigate to the Publication and Structure Group in which the Page you want to preview is located b In the list view select the Page you want to preview c Click the Preview icon in the Home tab of the Ribbon Results A Preview window appears which displays the Page Publishing a Page You can publish Pages by publishing the Publicatio
15. Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual SDL Tridion 2013 SP1 November 2013 About this user manual This User Manual describes how to manage Web site content using the Content Manager Explorer Audience It provides instructions for Editors and Reviewers and Site Managers of content Editors write content and can create pages including images pictures or attachments Editors can only publish to the Staging Presentation Server used for preview and inline editing purposes not accessible for visitors of intranet extranet Web sites Reviewers edit content put content and binary content together and can create Pages Reviewers can publish Pages to the Live Presentation Server interacts with visitors as well as to the Staging Presentation Server Site Managers are primarily responsible for the overall management of their lo cal publication and the coordination of the different editors and reviewers Site managers are the first point of contact for all local editors amp reviewers As a user you are assumed to be familiar with your operating system and with using an internet browser ll Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Contents 1 Getting started austssdeesdteikiubarihetraspdeedaaca dated apr inita Up d ds 1 Basic Content Manager concepts 0 00 eee 1 Publications TEST 4 Website building blocks 4 eee mE eu ndew E aged bela Rer ree Publication rights and permissions 00 c
16. Result The User s to which you assigned the task see a notification that this Task was assigned to them The Task also appears alongside their other Workflow Activities in the Assigned list of the Things to do dialog 114 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Workflow Workflow Activity Details The details displayed for an Activity In your Assigned or Started screen select any Activity to see its details You see the following Activity Details Name The name of this Activity Task Name If this Activity is applied to a type of item the name of that item if this Activity is a Task the name of the Task Assigned to The Group or User to which this Activity was assigned Due date If the Activity has a Started state the moment at which the Activity is or was expected to be finished If the due date has already passed a custom Expiration Script if implemented will have been triggered and the date and time are displayed in red If you select Show more you also see the following details Description A description of what this Activity entails Approval Status The Approval Status determines whether or not the item s associated with this item can be published to a specific Target Type Assigned on A timestamp representing the moment at which the Activity was assigned immediately after the previous Activity finished Performer If the Activity has a Started or Finished state the name of the User who is cur
17. When you have sent a Mailing you can view the response of your Contacts to the Mailing and use this information to get an impression of who is interested in your e mail and what kind of content interests them You can use this information to create Distribution Lists allowing you to send a more targeted Mailing Note Address Books are created by Tridion System Administrators who then make them available to users in Outbound E mail Publications Outbound E mail user interface The Outbound E mail node in a Publication contains Content Manager items specific to Outbound E mail The node is accessible to users who have Outbound E mail rights as defined by a Tridion system administrator E mail Management ribbon toolbar In the Content Manager Explorer select E mail Management The tab shows tasks you can perform tasks in the Outbound E mail node in a Publication Tasks are enabled or disabled depending on your current context E Horne Organize Workflow E mail Managernent Audience Management Adminstration Tools be bu jd gt New Maing Maunzs cant Cnnosgors n iat Outbound E mail node The Content Management navigation pane on the left hand side displays Publications and Shortcuts Open a Publication to view the Outbound E mail node in which you create Mailings and Distribution Lists and organize them into Outbound E mail Folders Open E mail Campaigns to view E mail Campaigns 196 Content Manager Explorer B
18. a searches for Contacts whose fields matches the value specified exactly 212 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Operators for numeric or date fields You can use the following operators to search for extended detail fields whose values are numeric or dates searches for Contacts whose fields matches the value specified exactly is empty searches for Contacts who have no entry for this field is not searches for Contacts who do not have this value excludes Contacts with this value m lt searches for Contacts whose value for this field is less than the value specified lt searches for Contacts whose value for this field is less than or equal to the value specified gt searches for Contacts whose value for this field is more than the value specified gt searches for Contacts whose value for this field is more than or equal to the value specified When you chose lt lt gt or gt a second drop down list appears that allows you to define a range of values Note Extended details are configurable and implementation specific Viewing Contact e mails For each Contact Outbound E mail tracks which e mail messages the Contact receives whether the Contact opens such e mail and which links within the message the Contact clicks Outbound E mail enables you to view these statistics for a specific Contact Before you begin To view Contact s
19. using HTML you can format the text of your e mail and include images and clickable links However not all of your Contacts may be able to see the HTML format e mail This is the default value Text using plain text you can be sure that the recipient of the e mail can read the message but you lose the ability to format your e mail message Multi part HTML and plain text combined in a multi part e mail message The e mail client ofthe recipient determines which format the recipient will see Subscription status indicates the status of a Contact s subscription Opted in the Contact registered as a subscriber and confirmed the registration Subscribed the Contact registered as a subscriber but did not yet confirm the registration Unsubscribed the Contact would not like to receive e mail Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 207 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail E mail error status indicates whether problems have been encountered sending e mails to the Contact No problems e mails sent to this Contact should arrive without incident Temporary problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered temporary problems for example the Contact s e mail Inbox was full Persistent problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered permanent problems for example the e mail address of the Contact does not exist Active clear this check box to prevent this Contact from receiving e ma
20. Component field types Icon Name Description B Bold Applies bold italic or underline formatting to selected text To apply bold italic or underline formatting either select the text to which you want to apply formatting or place your cursor in the paragraph in which you would like to apply formatting and click the bold italic or underline button Use these buttons to apply alignment formatting to text To align text Place your cursor in the paragraph to which you want to apply alignment and click Left align Center or Right align Use these buttons to create lists To create a list place your cursor in the paragraph to which you want to apply list formatting and click the Bullets button to create a bulleted list or the Numbers button to create a numbered list Decrease Indent Changes the indent of a paragraph To change the indent of a paragraph place your cursor in the paragraph that you want to indent and click the Increase Indent button or Decrease Indent button til tl Increase Indent Insert Character K Inserts special characters into text Special characters include copyright trademark Euro signs and other unique characters You may also use this feature to insert standard text for example names of products and so on Available characters depend upon your system configuration To insert a special character Place your cursor where you would like the special text to appear Cl
21. Folders for Mailings Distribution Lists and Segments on page 244 Creating or updating Segments You create Segments by defining filters You can use Outbound E mail fields Contact details and Keywords as filters You create Segments in Folders in the Audience Manager node Before you begin To create or update a Segment you need Segmentation Management rights and Write permissions for the parent Folder Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 Select a Folder and click the New Segment icon in the toolbar or to modify a Segment select the Segment and choose Open from the context menu 4 Inthe General tab Enter a Name and Description Inthe Based on drop down list you can select a Segment to base your Segment on in which case filters defined in the parent Segment are included with the filters defined in the child Segment Note Segments based on other Segments allow you create generic Segments and progressively more specific Segments For information on how you create a chain of filters to narrow down an audience you are targeting refer to Contact filtering on page 201 5 In the Outbound E mail tab enter E mail address fill in all or part the first characters of an e mail address E mail type specify the Contact s preferred e mail format Select either HTML Text or Multi part Subscription status indicates the sta
22. Press Shift and click on another cell Bae and All cells between the first and last cell are selected To select multiple non adjoining cells Click on a cell Press Ctrl and click on the other cells you want to select To deselect a single cell Press Ctrl Click on a cell you wish to deselect Procedure 1 To format cells in a table in the Format Area select the table for which you would like to format table cells Click the Table button on the toolbar 2 In the Table Editor select the tab for the type of table properties you want to edit Table Row Column Cell 3 Select one or more cells that you want to format as described above Note If you have selected the Row or Column tab the properties you select will be applied to the entire row or column If you selected the Cell tab the properties you select will be applied only to the individual cells that you have selected 4 Select or define the properties of the selected cells rows or columns using the options provided in the left hand pane For more information about the properties and formatting options available for cells rows and columns see Table properties and formatting on page 70 5 Click OK to apply the changes to your table Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 75 Component field types Inserting and removing rows and columns from a table The following table describes how to insert and remove ro
23. Result The Activity is finished and possibly gets assigned to another Group You see your Started Activities list again now without the Activity you just finished The number in your Workflow area goes down by 1 Publishing items that are in Workflow If an item achieves a Workflow status known as minimum approval status for a destination you can publish it to that destination If the item is in Workflow and does not meet the minimum approval status the Content Manager publishes the last checked in version of the item if it exists and if it does have a minimum approval status that allows it to be published Creating a Task You can create a Workflow Process that does not involve any content items and assign it to a User or Group Such a Process is called a Task Procedure 1 Access the Content Manager Explorer Web site 2 Click the Workflow area in the top right part of the screen and in the Things to do dialog that opens click the Add button labeled Result A New Task dialog opens Under Title briefly describe the Task 4 Select if you want to assign the Task to a Group or a User Result The dropdown shows Groups or Users 5 Select the Group or User from the dropdown 6 If you want select a Publication from the Publication dropdown This is only necessary if your implementation of SDL Tridion has different types of Tasks and you know which Publication is associated with which type of Task 7 Click Assign Task
24. Select an Address Book and do one of the following Click the Import Contacts icon in the toolbar Choose Import Contacts from the context menu The Import Contacts screen opens in a new window 4 In Step 1 Set import options a Select Create new Contacts if your import file contains Contacts that do not yet exist in Audience Manager in which case records in the import file containing existing IDs are ignored 218 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail b Select Update existing Contacts if the import file contains Contacts already in Audience Manager in which case records in the import file containing new IDs are ignored c Select Update and insert Contacts to create new Contacts and update existing ones the default CSV is a delimited data format As data can be formatted in several different ways you need to specify the formatting used in your source import file Field separator specifies how fields columns are separated b String delimiter specifies how fields that contain commas double quotes or line breaks are delimited c Decimal separator specifies the symbol used to mark the boundary between the integral and the fractional parts of a decimal numeral d Group separator specifies the symbol used to ease the reading of large numbers normally the thousand separator e Date format specifies the date format Note For more information on CSV file
25. and if the value reaches the configured minimum value the comment is automatically removed from the published Web page and submitted for moderation Last Modified by Moderator shows the last Content Manager user who modified this comment if any 3 To see the full details of a comment do one of the following Double click the comment s row Select the comment s row and click Open in the Home tab of the Ribbon toolbar Right click the comment s row and select Open from the context menu that opens 282 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual User Generated Content Result The Component or Page that contains this comment opens in a new dialog with the Comments tab selected Refer to Comments tab for a Component or Page on page 285 for more details Viewing and filtering ratings in the ratings screen This topic explains what the ratings screen looks like and what you can do to filter its contents Procedure 1 To see a ratings screen do one of the following In the Shortcuts area navigate to User Generated Content gt Top Rated Content In the Shortcuts area navigate to User Generated Content gt Recently Rated Content In the Publications area select a Publication and navigate to User Generated Content gt Rated Content Result The content area shows the first page of rated items ordered by rating highest to lowest or reverse chronology of rating last rated items at the top Click the Re
26. and send the E mail Campaign Sending all Mailings in an E mail Campaign When you group E mails in an E mail Campaign you can choose send all Mailings in one go Before you begin To send a Mailing you need Mailing Execution rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder You must have tested the Mailing Outbound E mail always sends the last tested e mail therefore if you make a change and send the mail without testing the change will not be reflected in the sent e mail Procedure 1 Open an E mail Campaign in the Shortcuts view select the E mail Campaigns node select the E mail Campaign in the list view and choose Open in the context menu Click Send All in the toolbar to send all Mailings in the E mail campaign Specify Date and time of sending settings Select Send now Select Prepare the e mails now but send them later and click the Calendar icon to select the date and time at which you want Outbound E mail to start sending e mails When you select this option Outbound E mail fixes the list of Contacts in the Mailings though Contact details and personalized fields are resolved at the moment of sending therefore any changes will be reflected in the sent e mail Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 261 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail 4 Specify Advanced settings Maximum number of e mails to send per Mailing enter the number of Contacts you want to send the Mailing to 0
27. and to pick Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 21 Content Manager Explorer 22 up or reassign this Activity by clicking Start Activity or Reassign Activity respectively Started Activities Click Started Activities to see Activities you picked up but did not yet finish Click any item in the list to see details about the Activity such as the Content Manager items associated with this Activity and to finish or reassign this Activity by clicking Finish Activity or Reassign Activity respectively Finished Activities Click Finished Activities to see Activities you performed and finished Click any item to see details about the Activity such as the Content Manager items associated with this Activity The Related Items area shows the list of items associated with the current Activity Click the Open button at the right of an item to open the item in a dialog Slide out navigation Help screen Select Help in the slide out navigation to see the Help amp Community screen which has controls for accessing help and documentation as well as a variety of options to connect with other users of the product Help and Documentation The following documentation deliverables help you use the product Topics for Authors and Editors Content Manager opens help topics specific to the Content Manager Explorer user interface These topics are intended for users who use this GUI to create and edit content Topics for Autho
28. choose Delete Results The Translation Job is deleted Monitoring translation progress You can view the progress of items in translation in the Translation Progress tab of a Translation Job You can see the progress for each of the target languages and a breakdown of what Content Manager items are in what workflow stage of the translation process and the percentage completion Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select the Translation Jobs node in the Shortcuts area Result A list of Translation Jobs is displayed in the list view 3 Select a Translation Job from the list and choose Open from the context menu Result The Translation Job dialog appears 4 Open the Translation Progress tab Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 189 Translation Manager 8 The Translation Progress tab displays rows for each stage in the process of translating an item in a Translation Job columns for each language you chose to translate to from a target language The percentage completion displayed for each stage and language is based on the number of Content Manager items in that stage When using aggregation where content from several XML files is merged into a single XML document the percentages do not match what you see in the translation management system The icon displayed next to the stage indicates whether it is an automated or manual process Icon Description Automated process Manual process
29. each row of data defines a Keyword and specifies a Contact to assign the Keyword to Optionally the import file may contain values for the Publication and Category in which you want to import the Keyword In this case you can map these columns otherwise you can select available the Publication and Category a fixed value Note The import does not create Contacts or Categories Procedure 1 2 Open the Content Manager Explorer Do one of the following Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager gt Address Books node Inthe System Administration view navigate to the Audience Management node Select an Address Book note that you cannot import Keywords into the All Contacts node and do one of the following Click the Import Keywords icon in the toolbar Choose Import Keywords from the context menu The Import Keywords screen opens in a new window In Step 1 Set import options a Select Create new Keywords if your import file contains Keywords that do not yet exist in the Content Manager b Select Overwrite Keywords on Contacts if you want the import to remove existing Contact s Keywords before adding Keywords c Specify the Field separator used in the import file how fields columns are separated d Specify the String delimiter used in the import file how fields that contain commas double quotes or line breaks are delimited Note As data can be delimited in several different ways
30. specifying how these Components should be displayed specifying which Target Group or Target Groups each Component is associated with previewing and saving the E mail Page Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication and Structure Group in which you want to create the Page 3 Select a Structure Group and click the New Page icon in the toolbar Result A New Page window appears 4 Onthe General tab fill in the following fields Name the name of the Page must be unique within the Structure Group in which you create it Content Manager Explorer displays this name in the list view File name you must make the file name unique within the Structure Group in which you create it This is the name of the Page as it will appear on the Web site Page Template the Page Template that the Content Manager will use to render the Page If you click the Inherit From Parent option the Page uses the default Page Template specified for the parent Structure Group or Publication Note For information on templating see the Outbound E mail Implementation Manual Metadata schema Optional you can select a metadata schema to create metadata values for the Page You must fill in any mandatory metadata fields before you can save the Page 5 Onthe Component Presentation tab click the Add button 246 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mai
31. the Activity has finished if not it has not finished yet Name The name of the Activity preceded by a number of indicate which step in the Process this is The number is useful to distinguish say a first review Activity from a second review Activity Owner The User currently performing the Activity If this is empty the item has been assigned but not picked up yet Assigned To The Group or User to whom this Activity is or was assigned Approval Status The Approval Status of the item after this Activity has finished Activity lt number gt lt name of Activity gt This area shows the properties of the currently selected Activity The area label is the word Activity followed by a number to indicate which step in the Process this is followed by the Activity name The number is useful to distinguish say a first review Activity from a second review Activity You see the following Activity Details Description A description of what this Activity entails Assigned to The Group or User to which this Activity was assigned Performer If the Activity has a Started or Finished state the name of the User who is currently performing if Started or has most recently performed if Finished the Activity Assigned on A timestamp representing the moment at which the Activity was assigned immediately after the previous Activity finished Started on If the Activity has a Started or Finished state a timestamp repres
32. with none of the links clicked yet Failed and returned shows how many of the e mails could not be delivered Action taken shows how many recipients of the e mails clicked a link in the e mail message Action view a list of clickable links in the e mail message and how many people clicked on these links Clicked on at least one link shows how many recipients clicked a trackable link in the e mail lt name of link gt shows each individual trackable link in the e mail and how many recipients clicked the link Unsubscribed shows how many recipients clicked the unsubscribe link in the e mail Profile changed shows how many recipients clicked the link in the e mail to change his or her profile Contact status for each Distribution List the bottom section displays a list of Distribution Lists in order of priority the order in which they were sent and statistics on the Contacts in the lists When you select a response type in Status overview or Actions taken the Contact status for each Distribution List displays all Distribution Lists for this Mailing and provides statistics on the number of Contacts for whom the selected response type applies and the overall percentage of Contacts in a Distribution List who responded as such For more information refer to Viewing Distribution List statistics on page 271 Note Note that the percentages in this table do not add up to 100 as they are unrelated
33. you need to specify the formatting used in your source import file For more information on file formatting see Creating the Keyword import file on page 221 In Step 2 Select a file to import a Click the Load from disk button Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 223 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail b Inthe File Upload dialog navigate to the drive and folder that contains the file you want to import then select the file and click Open c Click OK to confirm the selection Important The import loads the first row of the import file defining the column names using the default formatting options If you change the data formatting options click the Redo mapping button to reload the file 6 When you change the data formatting options click the Redo mapping button to reload the file using these options 7 InStep 3 Define column mapping a Fields marked in bold indicate the field or fields used to uniquely identify Contacts Ifone field is marked in bold the value assigned in the import file for each Contact must be unique If more than one field is marked as bold the combined value of the fields must be unique For example Contacts comes with a default set of extended detail fields The fields IDENTIFICATION_KEY and IMPORT_SOURCE are used to uniquely identify Contacts In this default situation you could therefore map the IDENTIFICATION_KEY to a column in the file and set IMPORT_SOUR
34. 26 Setting your user preferences 26 Viewing the User Manual online 0 0 cece eee e 27 E mailing a link to a Content Manager item 00 c cece eee eee 27 Adding a Content Manager item to your favorites 0 0 c cee eee eee 27 Setting start location sessionens tekene nE EEEE TREES RE REA te ES eRe bee 28 Navigation pane asi e nice 6 ead Gel ee edad RE ea bein Said eet 28 TASC VIEW cose ta EAA EEE E A E E A wack hahaa eaten hater gaan tind dare e PRA UU aie ee 29 Opening an item from the list view 00 cece eee eee eens 29 Filtering the list view using list columns 0 e cece ees 29 Using context menus cece enn ENEE EAE 30 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Ml Working with multiple items displayed in the list view 2 eee ee ee 31 MOVine an HEM sc cteciedenvedenbte eR RR Phe eV nep aed beers we 32 Copying and pasting an item secrete rosin adin innie nEn AEE EA EE ERE 32 Deleting am itemi 2225625 UI REC eH RE meer eite ER e che 33 Refreshing the list view 0 ccc cece eee eI nnneees 34 Edit WitdOw oiii eu b ehbU HEP See ERE EM ERSTE ere Dd 35 Slortc t Keys usse rcr e EORR RE Rd ERR PAM RESAMUPUUAN CER Qe 36 Remembered settings iu eee eL ede e ey gae oe res ree desee e etus 39 S BIUS OMA suniietsbtosceemtuedpECbetaua c EboxeM om dbtea EAER 41 Shared items local copies and local items 0 cece eee eee eee eens 42 Items aff
35. 5 Click Paste on the Home tab of the Ribbon Results The Content Manager moves the item to a different location in the Publication Copying and pasting an item You can create a copy of an item within the same Publication Before you begin You require the rights that allow you to modify that object as well as the following permissions Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Read permission for the containing Folder Structure Group or Category Write permissions for the Folder Structure Group or Category to which you want to paste the item About this task If you create a copy of a Folder Structure Group or Keyword you create a copy of all items that are contained within it as well If an item is in Workflow or if a different user has it checked out you can only create a copy of the last checked in version of the item Procedure 1 Navigate to the Publication and Folder Structure Group or Keyword that contains the item s you want to copy 2 From the list view select the item s you want to copy Click the Copy icon on the Home tab of your Ribbon 4 Select the Folder Structure Group Category or Keyword to which you want to copy the item s and click the Paste on the Home tab of your Ribbon Results The Content Manager creates a copy of the item If you paste the item in an Organizational Item Folder or Structure Group or Category that already has an item of the same n
36. Contact would not like to receive e mail E mail error status indicates whether problems have been encountered sending e mails to the Contact No problems e mails sent to this Contact should arrive without incident Temporary problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered temporary problems for example the Contact s e mail Inbox was full Persistent problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered permanent problems for example the e mail address of the Contact does not exist Active Yes or No indicating Contacts who can or cannot receive e mails In the Details tab you can specify Contact extended details to filter on Note Extended details are configurable and implementation specific In the Categories and Keywords tab you can specify Keyword criteria to filter Contacts on their assigned Keywords a Click Add b Browse to and select a Keyword c Click Insert d Repeat the procedure to add more Keywords e Click Close when you have finished adding Keywords f Toremove a Keyword select it click the Remove button Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 241 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note The list of Keywords displayed does not reflect Keyword hierarchy the Keywords are displayed in a flat list You can use multiple Keywords from several Categories and in different Publications A Contact can also have multiple Keywords from the same Category for e
37. E mail Publication Toggle Vie Shoncuts s Thame Tyee l BB Building Blocks Foider ft Favorites BBRoctStructureGroup Structure Group e a WE Custom Pages a Bicategones and Keywords Outbound Email tk Checked cut Items Bausence Manager Li re med Camnamne zi Publications 5 2 LJ Content Managemert B Building Blocks BB AcotStructureGrous ey Categones and Keywords e Outbound E mail e Audience Manager 198 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail The following table describes the top level nodes in a Publication and explains how to use them in Outbound E mail Icon Item Type Description e Publication A Publication intended for the Mailing channel contains Outbound E mail items as well as other Content Manager items ES Building Blocks Folders are organizational items that contain amongst others Folders Components which define the content for Mailings and Target Groups which are used to personalize Mailing content E gt Structure Organizational items that contain Pages to define the Content Groups Components and layout and functionality Templates used in a Mailing amp Categories amp Keywords which are used to classify content Components and Keywords Contacts e Outbound A Container node for all Outbound E mail specific items See E mail Outbound E mail user interface on page 196 EE E Mail A Container node for E mail Cam
38. For more information about Schemas see the implementer s documentation portal About this task Component metadata can include for example Author name Author email Publish date Offline date Multimedia Component metadata for a photographic image for example can include details such as the date the photograph was taken and details of the camera settings such as lens focal length aperture shutter timing 120 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Metadata and Keywords Procedure 1 Open a Component or Multimedia Component and define Metadata in the item s Metadata tab 2 Open a Publication Folder Virtual Folder Structure Group or Page In the General tab select a Metadata Schema from the drop down list When you have selected a Metadata Schema the metadata fields defined by the schema appear The following image shows a Metadata Schema applied to a Page General Component Presentations Bundles Workfiow Comments Ratings Info Name test File Name test html Page Template 6 Default p Tempiat IV Inherit from Parent Page Type C Use this Page as a Page Type Author Topic 3 Open a Category In the General tab select a Default Metadata Schema from the drop down list and save the Category General Security Info Name New Category XML Name bb Description Publishable v Use for identification Open a Keyword in the Category The default Metadata Schema is appli
39. List to whom the type of Mailing result applies d Click Filter Contacts to filter the displayed list see Searching Contacts on page 209 Note Outbound E mail opens a new window for each selected Distribution List showing those members of the Distribution List to whom the type of Mailing result applies For example if you select Read confirmed and a Distribution List called Male Adolescents the Details button shows you which male adolescents read the Mailing Results You have examined who responded to your Mailing and in what way What to do next You can turn this set of Contacts into a Distribution List or export this set of Contacts to a CSV file Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 271 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Creating Distribution Lists from statistics You can create Static or Dynamic Distribution Lists from statistics Before you begin To create a Distribution List from statistics you need Distribution List Management rights and Write permissions for the destination Outbound E mail Folder To view Mailing statistics you need Mailing Execution or Mailing Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder About this task Distribution Lists created from statistics differ from other Distribution Lists in that they are based on Contact response criteria rather than Contact details criteria For example you will frequently want to create Distribution Lists
40. Manual 235 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail A Dynamic Distribution List has the advantage that the development effort needed to create the list is relatively low and the maintenance effort needed to keep it up to date is minimal as changes to the Distribution List are automatic although you may want to change the filtering criteria However the level of detail is low because the selection method is coarse contains general Contacts For example you can create a Dynamic Distribution List based on the Keyword filter Potential Customers in which case all Contacts tagged with this Keyword are added to the list If a Contact s Keyword changes from Potential Customers to Customer they are automatically removed from the list Creating or modifying a Distribution List from search A Contacts search allows you to define search criteria to filter Contacts in an Address Book or Distribution List The result of a search is a filtered list of Contacts who meet specified criteria You can add the Contacts in the filtered list to an existing Static Distribution List or create a new a Dynamic Distribution List or Static Distribution List Before you begin To create a Distribution List you need Distribution List Management rights and Write permissions for the destination Outbound E mail Folder Category Management rights and Read permissions needed to define filters based on Categories and Keywords About this t
41. Page Templates and Metadata Schema Editing a Page You can edit an existing Page to change general information Component Presentations and Metadata Before you begin To edit a Page you must have Page Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Structure Group You cannot edit the Page if the Content Manager assigned the Page to a different user in a Workflow Process Only the assignee can edit the Page You can edit a Page if it is a local item or a local copy You cannot edit a shared Page For information about localizing a Page see BluePrinting on page 41 Procedure 1 To edit a Page navigate to the Publication and Structure Group in which the Page you want to edit is located 2 Inthe list view select the Page you want to edit 3 Click the Open icon in the Home tab of the Ribbon 4 Ifrequired edit general Page information in the fields on the General tab 5 To edit Component Presentations select the Component Presentation tab Double click the Component to open it for editing 6 To remove a Component Presentation select a listed Component Presentation and click Remove 7 To add a Component Presentation to the Page first find the Component you want to add You can do this in two ways n your Building Blocks Folder structure navigate to the location of the Component you want to add In your Categories and Keywords select a Keyword The List View displays Components that
42. Procedure 1 To create a hyperlink select the text that you want to display as a hyperlink 2 Click Insert Hyperlink on the toolbar A Hyperlink window opens 3 Inthe Type field select one the following options Select Component to create a Component hyperlink Select HTTP to create a hyperlink to an HTTP resource Select mailto to create a link to an e mail address Select Anchor to create a link to an anchor within the same format area Select Other to create a link to another type of internet resource 4 Inthe URL field do one of the following To create a link to a Component click the Browse To button and select the Component that you want to link to Insert Hyperlink Type Component i B URL Title Target Default Cancel To create a link to an HTTP accessible resource type the URL of the resource you want to link to Note Do not use this option if you want to link to a different kind of resource such as an FTP mail or other resource The URL must begin with HTTP To create a link to an e mail address type the e mail address that you want the visitor to send mail to To create a link to an anchor select the name of the anchor that you want to link to To create a link to another type of internet resource type the address of the internet resource that you want to link to Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 5 Component field types Optional In the Tit
43. Select content you want to copy Click Copy Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 61 Component field types 62 Icon Name Description Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Paste Places content from your clipboard to the location of your cursor in the Component To paste content Place your cursor where you would like the cut or copied content to appear Click Paste Note that your browser may not grant you the authorization to perform this action Click on the lower half of the button to see the following suboptions Pastes content including formatting Paste Special Reveals a number of paste options Remove non HTML markup removes only non HTML markup Remove Unknown Class Names removes class attributes that are not defined in the configuration file Remove All Styles removes style and class attributes that are not known Paste as Text removes all markup and non textual content and pastes plain text Select Use as default option to continue to use this setting it is remembered as a user preference You can then use the Paste button to reapply the setting you have selected Undoes the last change made You can undo the following types of changes cut copy paste typed or deleted characters formatting changes XHTML conversion To undo changes click Undo Reapplies the action from the last undo You can redo the same changes as listed for Undo To redo changes click Redo
44. Static Distribution List from any Address Book Static or Dynamic Distribution List Before you begin To update a Distribution List you need Distribution List Management rights and Read and Write permissions for the destination Outbound E mail Folder To add Contacts to a Distribution List from an Address Book you need Read permissions for the Address book Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E mail node and do one of the following Inthe Audience Manager node select an Address Book In the Outbound E mail node in a Folder select a Static or Dynamic Distribution List 3 Inthe list view select one or more Contacts and choose Add Contacts to Distribution List from the context menu Note To select several Contacts from the list use the Shift key to select sequential Contacts and the Ctrl key to select non sequential Contacts 4 Inthe Add Contacts window Select New Distribution List and enter a Name and Description Type is set automatically to Static Select a Folder where you want to save the Distri bution List and click OK to save the Distribution List Select Existing Static Distribution List Select a Static Distribution List in a Folder and click OK to save the Distribution List Results Outbound E mail adds the selected Contact or Contacts to the Static Distribution List Removing Contacts from a Static Distribution List You can remove Conta
45. You can specify a default Page Template for a Structure Group The default Page Template specifies the Template that an end user can use in any Pages created in the Structure Group If a series of Pages use the default template you can change the default template in the Structure Group As a result all Pages that used the default automatically update to the newly selected Default Page Template The Inherit from Parent setting determines if this Structure Group inherits the default Page Template from the Structure Group in which this Structure Group is nested If you select this setting end users cannot specify a default Page Template Workflow If you have Workflow Management rights and Workflow Process Definitions have been created for the Publication you can create a Process Association in a Structure Group When you associate a Workflow Process Definition with a Structure Group all new or edited Pages that end users store in the Structure Group enter a Workflow Process Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 95 Structure Groups Creating a Structure Group 96 You create a Structure Group to organize Pages in a Publication and create a URL structure used in a Web site You can add metadata to a Structure Group and create Workflow associations so that Pages created in the Structure Group follow the specified Workflow Process Before you begin To create a Structure Group you must have Structure Group Management rights
46. a column header When you click this icon the filtering options that appear depend on the type of column you are filtering Open set of values If the number of values in the column is open ended clicking the filter icon displays up to seven value ranges to pick from for example A F G M N S and T Z You can clear or select each range to hide or show those values Closed set of values If the number of values in the column is closed that is if it has only a fixed set of possible values clicking the filter icon displays each value as a separate option You can clear or select each range to hide or show those items Date and time values If the values are moments in time clicking the filter icon displays a custom set of options to select typical time ranges including the option to set a custom date time range If you select this option use the Select date buttons to pick a date and time for the beginning and end of your date time range After you select a filter the filter icon turns blue indicating that your current list view is filtered we Sc M Folder Component Component Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 29 Content Manager Explorer 30 Using context menus You can access a context menu for items in the navigation pane or list view by right clicking on the item The menu will display commands that are commonly associated with the item that you have selected The
47. action Right align Right align text r Save the current item without closing the dialog none Section type Insert a header paragraph marker or HTML lt div gt element I Send item link by Open an e mail using your default e mail client containing a link to the currently selected item in the list or the item currently open in this dialog Set language Mark selected text as being in a specific language Start Activity Place an exclusive lock on the current item which has been assigned to your user Group through workflow o Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 19 Content Manager Explorer Icon Label Description 0 Start Activity and Start Activity on the current item see above and open it in a dialog for editing ER Table Open a dialog to insert a new table at the current cursor position or to format the currently selected table For more information refer to Formatting tab les in a Format Area on page 69 Translate Submit the current item to be translated Unclassify Remove a Keyword association from one or more Content Manager item s Underline Underline text Undo the last edit action Undo check out Undo a previous check out of the current item ial P Di Ic 53 c ie amp E o 3 Unindent Unindent text FX Unlocalize Permanently delete a previously created local copy of a shared BluePrint item e Unpublish Remove a previously published item f
48. based on whether respondents have read an e mail or whether they have clicked a specific link in the e mail You can create a Static or Dynamic Distribution List consisting of Contacts to whom a selected Mailing status applies which includes all recipients in all Distribution Lists in a Mailing includes all recipients in a single Distribution List in a Mailing includes a manual selection static or filtered selection dynamic of the recipients in a single Distribution List in a Mailing Procedure 1 In the Publication gt Outbound E mail node navigate to the Folder where your Mailings are stored select a Mailing and click the Explore Mailing Status icon in the toolbar Result The Mailing opens on the Statistics tab 2 Select a Mailing response status for example Select Read confirmed to add recipients who have opened the e mail but not yet clicked the links to a Distribution List Select Action taken to add recipients who have opened the e mail and clicked one or more of the links to a Distribution List Select a specific link clicked In the Details tab to add recipients who have opened the e mail and clicked this link to a Distribution List 3 When you have selected a Mailing response status do one of the following Click Add Contacts to Distribution List to add all the recipients to whom the selected Mailing status applies in all Distribution Lists to a Distribution List Select one Distribution List
49. because the Content Manager already selected the Schema for you Result A series of fields appears Fill in all mandatory fields and optional fields as necessary Mandatory fields have a red asterisk beside them Note For more information on Component field types see Component field types on page 53 A Component may also use Metadata fields If so a Metadata tab appears Select the Metadata tab if applicable and fill in the mandatory fields and if applicable the optional fields On the Home tab of the Ribbon click Save and Close Depending on the Schema you selected you may now be prompted to add this Component to a Bundle You can choose to skip this step but if you do the Component remains checked out to you Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 8 Components If this item must be added to a Bundle a dialog opens asking you if you would like to do so now You can choose Not Now to close the dialog but you see a warning informing you that your item is not in a Bundle and the same dialog will appear every time you save changes to the item Alternatively if you select Add a Bundle selection dialog appears In the tree structure on the left navigate to a Publication and Folder that contains a Bundle to which you want to add the item and add it to that Bundle by selecting the Bundle and clicking Add This adds the item to the selected Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is already in wor
50. been successfully published and those that have failed You can cancel a scheduled publish transaction if the transaction is not in progress When you cancel a transaction the Content Manager removes it from the publish queue Before you begin To cancel a publish transaction you must be either the system administrator or the initiator of the transaction To cancel a publish transaction that is In Progress you must have system administrator privileges About this task Note The Publish Queue is purged on a regular basis based on the configuration of the Content Manager Procedure 1 From the Publish Queue right click the transaction you want to cancel and in the context menu that opens choose Remove from the Publish Queue Results The Content Manager removes the transaction from the Publish Queue and cancels the transaction 134 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 14 Versioning When you modify and save an item of a certain type Content Manager creates a new version of the item The current version of an item is the most recently checked in version You can also explicitly check out the current version of an item for your exclusive use When you have an item checked out other users can view the item but they cannot edit the item Content Manager items that have versions Only some types of Content Manager items are versioned Content Manager keeps track of earlier versions of the followin
51. can also become full in which case you may also want to clear the e mail queue Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E mail node 3 Select the Outbound E mail Folder in which your Mailings are stored In the list view select the Mailing and click the Clear Queue icon in the toolbar 4 Click Yes to confirm removal Results Outbound E mail clears the queue for this Mailing Viewing Mailing statistics Once you have sent out a Mailing you may want to monitor the response of your Contacts to the Mailing Outbound E mail makes it possible for you to zoom in from a general overview of Mailing response down to seeing what a Mailing looked like to one individual Contact You can use Mailing statistics to form a clearer impression of who is interested in your e mail and what kind of content interests them You can use this information to create Distribution Lists allowing you to send a more targeted Mailing Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 267 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail View Mailing Statistics Refresh General Detailed Distribution Contact Counts Statistics Statistics Lists Statistics e Statistics laa Action Clicked Ta taken links BR ara i ny Ed Outbound E mail makes the following detail levels available Statistics shows you how the various Mailing results such as whether the e mail was opened and whether it arrived or not are distrib
52. components check box or Translate Keywords if you selected a Category to add all nested content to the Translation Job The following image shows an example of the Added Items tab Name B SDL Language Tech 7 Translate folder Translate components Remove Open Select an item and click the Open button to open the Content Manager item you want to send to translation Select an item and click the Remove button to remove the Content Manager item from the Translation Job Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 177 Translation Manager 9 Inthe Info tab you can view information about the Translation Job 10 When you are finished with the Translation Job proceed by clicking one of the following in the Ribbon toolbar Save saves the Translation Job which remains open for editing Save and Close saves and closes the Translation Job the remains in an editable state until it is sent Send to Translation sends the Translation Job to your translation system What to do next If you saved the Translation Job it is in the Definition state and you can view modify and add items to the Translation Job send it for translation or delete it Any user who is authorized to initiate translations and who has access permissions to the Publication which is a target or potential target of translated content can modify the Translation Job so long as it is in the Definition state It is therefore important to realize t
53. contains one or more items you want to add to a Bundle Note that you can add the same item to multiple Bundles and that you can also add Bundles themselves to a Bundle Select the item s you want to add and in the Home tab of the Ribbon toolbar select Add to Bundle Result A dialog opens showing a Folder tree on the left Navigate to the location of your Bundle in the Folder tree and open it then select the Bundle in the list view and select Add The button is disabled if you cannot add all the selected items to this Bundle for example if one of the selected items is the Bundle itself Result SDL Tridion adds the selected item s to the Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is currently in workflow the selected item s are assigned to the User Group associated with the current Activity Selecting a Bundle and adding items to it Use the context sensitive Bundle tab which appears when you select a Bundle to add items to that Bundle Before you begin If a Bundle is subject to a Workflow Process and currently in workflow you can only add items to it if all of the following are true The Bundle is currently in a Workflow state that allows the adding of items to it The items you intend to add are all Components Pages Component Templates Page Templates Template Building Blocks and or other Bundles The items you intend to add are not currently in workflow Procedure 1 From the tree on the left naviga
54. content on this Component or Allow users to rate content on this Page Note that by default this also removes the display of other rating information such as the average rating or number of ratings submitted on the corresponding published Web page 4 Click Save and Close to commit your change Republish the Component or Page to apply the change you made Results Users can now no longer rate the Component or Page The published Web page will continue to display the average rating based on ratings submitted until now 292 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual User Generated Content Adding a comment to a Component or Page You can add a comment to a Component or Page in the Comments tab Procedure 1 Access Content Manager and navigate to the Component or Page to which you want to add a comment Open the Component or Page and select the Comments tab Click Add a comment at the top Result An empty comment box appears below the controls with a blue border indicating that you can edit it Fill in the text select a value for Status for this comment and click Apply Result You are prompted to confirm this submission Click Yes to add this comment Results The comment is added to this Component or Page and if you gave it the right status value appears on the published Web page Changing the appearance of comments on the published Web page Change the appearance of comments on the published Web page to offe
55. descriptive name that is unique across all Mailings this field is used internally only b E mail subject enter the text displayed in the e mail subject field c Page select the E mail Page you want to send Click the Browse button to display the Page Picker in a separate window then browse through the available Pages to select an E mail Page and click OK d Publication Target select a Publication Target that is used to render the Mailing when you test it when you send the Mailing it uses the rendered content the last time the Mailing was tested e From enter the name of the sender you want to appear in your e mail f E mail reply address enter the e mail address where replies to this e mail are sent if different from the E mail sender address g E mail sender address enter the e mail address from which the e mail is sent Note You can use Merge Fields in the following fields E mail Subject From E mail Sender Address E mail Reply Address For more information see Adding Merge Fields on page 254 5 By default e mails are sent to all Contacts who have confirmed their subscription opted in In the Subscription Status field you can also choose to send e mails to Contacts with a different subscription status m Select the Have shown interest check box to send to Contacts who have indicated interest opted in or subscribed but have not confirmed Select the Do not wish to receive e mail check
56. in the Mailing Status dialog and also on the Mailing edit dialog Contacts that are a part of several Distribution Lists in the Mailing are counted in the statistics for the Distribution List with the highest priority Mailing statistics are updated when 268 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail An associated Distribution List or Contact is deleted you can see the Contacts in the lists but you cannot view the details The Mailing is sent again and the priority of the Distribution Lists that are still related to the Mailing have changed the statistics are updated to reflect the new order The associated Mailing is deleted the snapshots are also deleted Mailing statistics are not updated when A Contact is moved from one Address Book to another the statistics gathered for that Contact remain unaffected Distribution List membership changes if for example a Dynamic Distribution List is modified after the statistics have been gathered these changes are not reflected in the statistics The Mailing is sent again and Distribution Lists have been removed from the Mailing the Distribution Lists remain in the snapshot therefore you can view all Distribution Lists that have ever been part of the Mailing while it was being sent with the priority they had when they were part of the Mailing Viewing Mailing statistics Mailing statistics provide information about Mailing response for e
57. in this Workflow Process typically intended as instructions to the current Owner Time Spent If the Activity has a Finished state the amount of time that has passed from the moment the Activity was first assigned to the moment a User finished the Activity Publication The Publication that contains the item s involved in this Activity State The state that the Activity is in Assigned Started Failed or Suspended The Related Items area shows the list of items associated with the current Activity If you select an item you can do the following Preview Preview the item in a new dialog Open Open the item for editing in a new dialog Compare If you also select two Activities from the History of Activities list Compare shows you how the selected item changed between those two Activities This button is disabled if Content Manager is not configured to save snapshots of the item you selected 118 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 12 Metadata and Keywords You use Keywords and metadata to classify content Content retrieval and management of data depends on the effective classification and tagging of your information Metadata Metadata is data about data You can add metadata to the following item types in the Content Manager Components a Multimedia Components a Keywords Publications Folders and Virtual Folders Structure Groups Pages Note Implementers can also apply m
58. indicates unlimited Only send e mail to Contacts with all required Merge Field data select this check box if you want the e mail to be sent only if all Merge Fields can be resolved For example if you specify a Merge Field First Name and the Contact has not provided a first name the e mail will not be sent to this Contact when you select this check box Send in batches fill in the Batch size that is the number of e mails to send in one go If you are not sure about this number consult your system administrator to see how many e mails your mail server can process at any one time Select the Time between each batch You can specify an interval in minutes hours or days For example if you fill in 2 day s Outbound E mail sends a batch of e mails every other day starting from the date and time specified in the Prepare the e mails now but send them later field Note Use the Send in batches settings to minimize the system load when you are sending large volumes of e mails and you do not need to send them immediately For example sending a thousand e mails at 4 AM every Sunday morning 5 Click Send all to send the Mailings in the E mail Campaign then click Yes to confirm 6 When you click Send all the Mailings are sent out sequentially Outbound E mail indicates the Status of each Mailing Sending lt number gt e mails indicates the number of e mails currently being sent Skipped Triggered Mailing for Triggered M
59. information see Refreshing statistics on page 275 The Priority column shows the order in which Distribution Lists are processed when the Mailing is sent the higher the number the sooner the e mails are sent 11 In the Address Books tab select Address Books from the Available Address Books and click Add to add them to the Selected Address Books To receive an e mail a Contact must fulfill the following criteria Must be a member of a selected Distribution List Must also be a member of a selected Address Book 12 Click Save 13 Click Preview in the General tab to verify that the e mail message looks the way you want it to look 14 Click Save and Close Results You have created and previewed a Mailing Personalizing a Mailing Personalizing a Mailing involves adding personal details to a Mailing and sending different versions of a Mailing tailored to specific characteristics and interests of an individual Contact This section describes how you can personalize a Mailing in Outbound E mail using Merge Fields to personalize fields and Target Groups to personalize content Adding Merge Fields In Outbound E mail you can personalize an e mail message to an individual Contact by adding to it the Contact s surname or telephone number in the text of the e mail Outbound E mail allows you to personalize individual fields through the use of Merge Fields A Merge Field is a piece of text that represents a specific C
60. item in a dialog 2 Access the Home tab of your Ribbon and select the button Send by e mail located on the right Result Your standard e mail client opens a new e mail containing the link to the current item 3 Fill in an e mail address and if you like a subject and additional body text Then send the e mail Adding a Content Manager item to your favorites If you access an item for example a Component or location for example a Folder in the Content Manager frequently you can add the item to your browser favorites or bookmarks About this task Note If you use the standard Add to favorites or Add to bookmarks option your browser will add only the Content Manager Explorer window to your favorites or bookmarks not the individual item Procedure I 2 In the main screen select an item for which you want to create a bookmark or favorite or open the item in a dialog Access the Home tab of your Ribbon and select the button Send to my favorites located on the right The link appears in the Shortcuts gt Favorites pane and in the Home screen of your slide out navigation Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 27 Content Manager Explorer Setting a start location By default after logging on to SDL Tridion the content area shows a standard landing page You can configure SDL Tridion to start at a location of your choice Procedure 1 Ifyou want to know what your current start location is r
61. list of Keywords displayed does not reflect Keyword hierarchy the Keywords are displayed in a flat list You can use multiple Keywords from several Categories and in different Publications A Contact can also have multiple Keywords from the same Category for example 1f a Contact is both a Business Contact and a Consumer Contact both Keywords apply Note If a Category and Keyword in the list are both marked DELETED xxx the Keyword has been deleted 8 Click Save and Close Results You have created a Segment based on the specified filter criteria Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 231 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Creating a Segment from search A Contacts search allows you to define search criteria to filter a list of Contacts When you perform a search on the All Contacts node you can save the filter used to filter these Contacts as a Segment Before you begin To create or update a Segment you need Segmentation Management rights and Write permissions for the parent Folder You can only create a Segment from search from the All Contacts node in a Publication not within System Administration About this task Note The All Contacts node contains all Contacts in a Publication Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager gt Address Books node 3 Select the All Contacts node 4 Inthe Search
62. nisi Curabitur tempor odo id nulia rhoncus id mols tortor scelerisque Akquam congue diam sed vieerra sagit nteger elementum in massa que varus Vivamus tecxunt tincdunt diam sed eusmod Cras auctor M Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 55 Component field types Simple text fields Simple text fields accept any characters To fill in these fields you simply type text into the field Text fields may have the following characteristics The field may accept more than one value This may be used to distinguish between different paragraphs The field may be mandatory This is indicated with a Format areas also allow you to format text This field type is described in Format area fields on page 59 Number fields Number fields accept one decimal point and a positive or negative sign Type a number in the field for example 100000 00 and 1 23 A number field may have the following characteristics The field may accept more than one value This may be used to create a list or sequence of numbers The field may be mandatory This is indicated with a Date fields A date field allows you to select a date and time using a date select button Date fields may have the following characteristics The field may accept more than one value This may be used to create a list of dates The field may be mandatory This is indicated with a 56 Content Manager Explorer Basic Use
63. not checked in including the changes made by Alice To alert the user to this Boris sees a prompt when he opens or explicitly checks out the item alerting him that he is taking ownership of other users changes to the item in addition to the changes he will be making If Boris explicitly checks out the item and takes ownership he is not prompted again When a Bundle that contains another Bundle enters a Workflow Process the inner Bundle itself as well as all items contained in it are added to the outer Bundle When a Bundle has entered a Workflow Process you can perform certain tasks only if the current Workflow Activity is configured to allow them adding or removing items in the Bundle editing the items in the Bundle or editing the metadata of the Bundle Depending on configuration Content Manager may dissolve the Bundle after the Workflow Process is completed This means that the Bundle is destroyed but its items remain If the Bundle contains any Bundles finishing the outer Bundle s Workflow Process may also cause any or all of those inner Bundles to be dissolved even if the outer Bundle is not 100 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Bundles Creating a Bundle You can create an empty Bundle from the Create tab Before you begin To create a Bundle you need Bundle Management rights Procedure 1 Access the Content Manager Explorer Web site 2 Navigate to the Folder in which you want to create
64. opens asking you if you would like to do so now You can choose Not Now to close the dialog but you see a warning informing you that your item is not in a Bundle and the same dialog will appear every time you save changes to the item Alternatively if you select Add a Bundle selection dialog appears 7 In the tree structure on the left navigate to a Publication and Folder that contains a Bundle to which you want to add the item and add it to that Bundle by selecting the Bundle and clicking Add This adds the item to the selected Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is already in workflow the item will be too You can also select Close which has the same effect as clicking Not Now in the previous dialog Results The Content Manager saves a modified version of the Component Any of the following items that use the Component will now use the modified version of the Component Pages Component Links in other Components Child Publications that share from this Publication 52 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 5 Component field types Components are based on Schemas that define what fields you can define for that Component The types of fields you need to fill in differ depending on the definition of the Schema The following table describes the field types that you may encounter when filling in a Component Field type Accepted values Text Alpha numeric characters Number Numbers negative
65. or add and update Keywords to Contacts by importing data from a file This file is usually an export of your own database of Contacts and must be in Comma Separated Value CSV file format or any other delimited file format that delimits the data using the supported formats Creating the Contact import file You can import Contacts contained in a delimited file format such as CSV file into an Address Book This section describes the requirements for the import file used to import Contacts The data in the file must be delimited using the supported formatting see below The file must be encoded using UTF 8 if it contains unicode characters The first row of data in the file must contain the names of the various data columns At least one column must contain an identifier to uniquely identify Contacts see Contact identification below Other columns whose values you want to import must map to the extended detail fields being used To import Contacts into the All Contacts node at System Administration level the file must contain a column that you can map to the GROUP KEYVALUE field the row value must specify the Key value of an existing Address Book Configure logging for import in the OutboundEmail xml configuration file see the SDL Tridion Installation Manual Contact identification Contacts have a default set of extended detail fields in which the combination DENTIFICATION KEY and IMPORT SOURCE are used to uniqu
66. phrase in the input box that reads Enter a Keyword or URI and click the magnifying glass to execute the search To search in a specific location and in its subcontainers you can select a search location from the dropdown to the left of the input box Tridion Content Management Administ LZ M M Septem ber 30 2013 2 57 AM i Search ES Building Blocks y Modified Note Note the following ui Server Instead of a simple phrase you can add wildcards and operators to your search input or enter a Content Manager URI that is a unique identifier of an item By default search searches in the node that is currently displayed in the content area below and in all of its subnodes You can pick a number of different locations from the dropdown location to the left of the input box or select any location in the Advanced search area Note however that if you search across all Publications the value All Publications in the dropdown shared items are not included in the search results Result The search runs and shows results in the area below Results If the list view reads Loading the Content Manager is performing the search During this time search is disabled If it finds no results the message There are no items in this view appears 150 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Search Important If the search returns more than 10 000 items the Content Manager raises an error To
67. s oisi dren EPA eens Ga eee ideas 143 Checking m arn ttem d idee e E a a datas S ARR PER esi Yes 144 Undoing checkout vececveere xe eu e ERE a PER UE EE ERENER sak 145 Non checked in items 2 2 2 0 cece eect teen eet eenas 146 15 SOGIICNGCKE ET 147 Spell checking tenis s n eee eners denas cn Vaca Ted dpe wanda ew d oed 147 NG QC ANI NN EEUU 149 Basic Search vec T 150 Searching in Bundles and Search Folders isses 151 SEcVIDImiME LR 151 Search based on a URI cssc bre Ree ee RR RP be rd d 151 Search operators isse sedet pi ERE o E UP RA UPS ERE LE EN ERREUR EE pu 152 Search wildcards esee re terei derrin ai A E A AR RA ge EE 153 Special characters and reserved words 0 cee eeeee nent eee e eee ai ias 153 Multimedia Components 0 e 154 Adyanced searcli ccc ae bumes t eo tab E Re V ERAN CR ua s UE ox S 154 17 Search FOIderS greece pares EET E 159 Creating a Search Folder 2 1 2 2 cient eee A EEE 159 Editing Search Folder gitc 000 dhwiadadeds outages dGielede ees aebieeeaeags 161 Deleting a Search Folder 1 0 0 0 ccc eee ene e eens 161 Localizing or unlocalizing a Search Folder 0 00 c cece eee eee eee eens 162 Using items in a Search Folder 0 e cece eee 162 Search Folders and Content Manager functionality 0 00 e eee eee eee 163 18 Translation Manager ciscciiasciiuceasGonGetceninineridebaducnindescuba
68. sapis nleger elementum i m ssa quis varius Vivamus Tiecidut incidunt dam sed eusmod Cras auctor at You can reorder the values in multiple value fields as follows Place your cursor over the icons to the right of the field The arrow will turn into a Move icon Drag and drop the field to another location for the same field Nunc gravi e a tellus a mterdum Vivamus et esi Gignissm sium nunc id nterdum tectus Mauris consectetur velt Maecenas egestas eM A ibero vestibulum venenats Cras fac sis posuere lorem ut mods Praesent at utrices meagre Sed rhoncus orci leo eu auctor brem consectetur at Sed eu dolor non dam euismod malesuada j Etiam maasa rias accumsan Quis turpis eget rmoncus condimentum m Nutam lacus orci solictu n nec nunc eget Gapibus accumsan justo Sed non quam accumsan malesuada leo eget feugiat arcu Nam sodales lectus mi nec eleifend m caogue st amet Curabitur loboris vel nisi eu adpiscng Phaselus ac M Pn rM emm o mmn tcm hmm Curebtur uf ume nec umma hencrert hendrer vel eget eros Dus nunc lectus suscpt sagis interdum eu volutpat nec eit Cras non faucibus fei Nam dignissim fouls que pulvinar facies eros lectus eementum velt is dapbus risus telus nec eros Donec qus maurs i telus molis ullamcorper m a sapien Nula tacks Nam pretium figis luctus Cras ut loboris m eget vanus nl Alguam erat voutpat integer at vanus exec d matte
69. ser Treaa veeROGCRERE egw epe des ax On pu or Rs E pagi 234 Managing Distribution Lists 0 0 eee eee a a S 234 Distribution List MI Tem 235 Creating or modifying a Distribution List from search 2000 236 Adding Contacts to a Static Distribution List 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 238 Removing Contacts from a Static Distribution List 2004 238 Creating and modifying a Dynamic Distribution List 2000 239 Creating a snapshot of a Dynamic Distribution List 22000 242 Managing e mail content 0 cece mh e 243 Creating Folders for Mailings Distribution Lists and Segments 244 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual VII Creating Components ive ehe wicks RAI RESI pi C shade pq vae 244 Creating and previewing an e mail Page lssssseeelseeeeeeeeeee 245 Personalizing an e mail Page 0 ee e 248 Classifying Content and Contacts 0 cece eee teenies 249 Managing Mailings acs iaacanssnverdatansnaatedand ET EC e CEPR Redi Rat 250 Creating a Mailing esos pe URBC RAE EPLe E RATE RERR oon 251 Personalizing a Mailing ssseseessssse n 254 Testing a Mailing osse ey exerce rer he c e e werd c utn 257 Creating an E mail Campaign lsssssseessssse e 259 Sending all Mailings in an E mail Campaign 0 000 cee eee eee 261 Sending a Mailing cece cent e 263 Triggering a Mailing
70. symbol and one decimal point Date Date and time External link External link to any URL address Multimedia link Link to a multimedia Component Component link Link to a Component Format area Alpha numeric characters and formatting The following image displays different field types in a Component Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 53 Component field types 54 General Source Workflow Comments Ratings i Info Name New Component Scheme ous Component Content SingleLineText This is just a single line of text MultiLineText This is a field where you can enter several lines of text This is a field with lots of text Formatting options Number 5 Date 9 25 2015 3140 PM x 3 Componentiink l SDL Tridion Newsletter July 2015 LJ ListField DropDown uber o rs Jupiter Saturn venus Neptune Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Component field types Field characteristics In addition to the general classification of field types text number and so on a field type can have a number of other characteristics The field can be mandatory or optional Mandatory fields are indicated with a next to the label of the field E You can select values from predefined lists See also List fields on page 59 Fields may accept one value only or multiple values Multiple value fields are displayed with two buttons to the left
71. the Keywords you selected Exclude 6 Repeat this step to add multiple Keywords to include or exclude from the same Category or from other Categories 7 Click Save and Close to save your new Target Group Results You have created a Target Group What to do next When you have created your Target Groups you can associate a Component Presentation in an E mail Page with one or more of these Target Groups to personalize the content of an e mail Testing a Mailing Before you can actually send out or schedule the Mailing you must first test it Before you begin To test a Mailing you need Mailing Execution rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder You need to have created a Mailing and have a valid test e mail address to send e mail messages to About this task You can send the test Mailing to a specific e mail address for example your own e mail address or to a list of Contacts in a static Distribution List It is recommended to create a static Distribution List for testing purposes in which you add Contacts representing all possible variations of e mails For example add a Contact for each Target Group used add Contacts who prefer HTML or plain text send to Contacts with different mail providers and so on It is important to realize that Outbound E mail always sends the last tested Mailing if you make a change to a Mailing and send it out without testing it the changes will not be reflected in
72. the Nordic Subscribed Address Book and uses the Keyword Skiers to filter these Contacts The complete filter therefore filters Contacts on Nordic gt Subscribed gt Skier Additionally the Nordic Skiers Downhill Dynamic Distribution List filters the Nordic Skiers Dynamic Distribution List on the Keyword Downhill The complete filter therefore filters Contacts on Nordic gt Subscribed gt Skier gt Downhill It is important to understand that when you select All Contacts and make a filter using the Keyword Skiers you will only see Danish Skiers subscribed and unsubscribed because you do not have read access to Nordic subscribed However if your create a Dynamic Address Book based on this search the Distribution List will contain m Swedish subscribed Skiers Norwegian subscribed Skiers Danish subscribed and unsubscribed Skiers In other words when you select a Distribution List you can see all Contacts that can potentially receive the Mailing regardless of whether you have permissions to read the Contacts or not Publications a Content Management 4 4 Denmark B3 Building Blocks E23 RootStructureGroup p Categories and Keywords 4 amp outbound E mail 4 P3 Mailings and Distribution Lists Be Nordic Skiers Be Nordic Skiers Downhill gt Audience Manager 204 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Mailings Audience Manager and Outbound E mail When you create a Mailing you need to specify the Distribu
73. the Publication Target is determined by the Target Type to which the user published the item Publication path the Publication path is a property of a Publication Structure Group directory settings fora Page this 1s the concatenation of the directory properties of all nesting Structure Groups starting with the root Structure Group Each directory is separated by a forward slash fora multimedia file this is determined by the Page Template or the Component Template If the Templates fail to specify a Structure Group the location defaults to the location specified in the Images URL property of a Publication For example the Target Type Live is associated with the Publication Target called Live which publishes to a specific location in this example this is http www docs com 94 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Structure Groups The Publication URL is France The Structure Group directory is news press_ release A Page published in this Structure Group is published to the following URL http www docs com France News press release Metadata Structure Groups can also contain Metadata These are based on Metadata Schemas and appear below the Metadata Schema field These fields could for example store additional information about the colors of the Pages in the Structure Group These fields interact with the Page Templates and Component Templates used on the Pages Default Page Template
74. the associated program using its file extension If the binary file was uploaded you can also click Save to disk Note This task is useful for viewing the binary file only not for modifying If you open the binary file in this way any changes made to the file will be lost If you do want to change the binary file save your changes locally then upload the resulting new file using Load from disk Alternatively you can use WebDAV to edit the file 82 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 7 Pages Pages combine Components that define content with templates that define how the content is displayed in the Web page The following diagram shows how Pages combine different Content Manager building blocks to create a Page that you can publish to a Web site Schemas define the structure of content stored in Components Components contain content and are based on Schemas that define what fields you can define Component Templates define how Components are displayed in a Web page A Page combines a Component and a Component Template to create a Component Presentation A Page Template defines the site navigation and the look and feel of a Page Page Templates usually define the header footer and content frames as well Creating a Page A Page defines the layout and content of a publishable Page You create Pages within the Structure Groups of Publications Before you begin To create a Page you m
75. the detected error or type in your own spelling and click the Change button to change the detected error a Change all use the default suggestion in the Change To field select the suggestion that applies to the detected error or type in your own spelling and click the Change button to change the detected error every time SpellChecker finds the word The word that appears in the Change To field is used to replace the spelling error 5 Click the Close button Results You have spell checked a Component 148 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 16 Search Search for Content Manager items by entering search input Your search input can contain words that occur in the items operators or a Content Manager URI a unique identifier for a Content Manager item You can also specify where to search in which time period to search how many results to return and so on You can search the Content Manager for the following types of items Folders Structure Groups Schemas Keywords Components Multimedia Components Component Templates Pages Page Templates Categories Template Building Blocks Virtual Folders Bundles Target Groups Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 149 Search Basic search You can use the basic search interface to quickly search Content Manager for a word of phrase Procedure 1 Access Content Manager Explorer 2 In the top right area of the screen fill in a word or
76. the item s you publish or unpublish select Override publish unpublish priorities and set the publish priority Also publish unpublish in Child Publications to publish or unpublish items in the Child Publications of the current Publication select Also publish unpublish in Child Publications For more information about Child Publications and BluePrinting in general refer to BluePrinting on page 41 130 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Publishing Abort publishing unpublishing on all servers in case of errors the Target Types you select on the left of the Publish dialog represent one or more Publication Targets In its turn each Publication Target represents one or more destinations that is physical publish locations such as an FTP site a URL or a network folder Very often the destinations in a Publication Target represent a cluster of machines meaning that if one of the machines is unavailable or slow the Web site automatically switches to one of the other machines For this purpose it is vital that all machines destinations within such a Publication Target contain the exact same content This means in turn that if publishing to one machine in the cluster fails you want the Content Manager to stop or undo all publish actions to the other machines in the cluster Select Abort Publishing on all severs in case of errors to accomplish this When in doubt ask your Publication Manager if you should switch this option o
77. the published Web page If comments are subject to moderation only Comments with the status Published to Web site are shown on the published Web page Click Refresh at any time to get the most up to date list of comments Ratings tab for a Component or Page A Component or Page has a Comments tab showing comments submitted for the item and a Ratings tab showing ratings submitted for the item This topic explains the Ratings tab The Ratings tab shows the following The rating average as a number and as a number of stars 0 5 The minimum and maximum values as a number depend on your implementation consult your SDL Tridion administrator to find out what they are The star value is the number value mapped to a number between 0 and 5 For example if the range of values a visitor can submit is a value between 0 and 25 the stars represent the following value ranges Number of stars Rating value range 0 0 2 49 1 2 5 7 49 2 7 5 12 49 3 12 5 17 49 4 17 5 22 49 5 22 5 25 Controls for this item Refer to Disallowing rating of a Component or Page on page 292 for more information Individual ratings as submitted by users On this tab you can do the following Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 285 User Generated Content See rating averages The average rating for this Component or Page is displayed at the top as a number rounded off to 1 decimal and as a number of stars rounded off to a whole number
78. the sent e mail Note If you have created a Triggered Mailing you can no longer test it To test a Triggered Mailing you must first deactivate the trigger test it and then set the trigger again For more information see 7riggering a Mailing on page 264 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 257 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Procedure 1 2 3 Open the Content Manager Explorer Navigate to the Publication Outbound E mail node Select the Outbound E mail Folder in which your Mailings are stored and in the list view select the Mailing you want to test and click the Test Mailing icon in the toolbar Result The Test Mailing window appears In Mailing details you can click Preview to verify that the e mail message looks the way you want it to look In Send test Mailing to Select A specific e mail address and follow the steps below Select All members of a Distribution List and follow the steps described in step 6 If you chose to send the test Mailing to a A specific e mail address a Enter an E mail Address specifying to whom you want to send the test e mail separate multiple e mail addresses with a comma b Specify the E mail Formats you want to send the e mails in Mailing Outbound E mail sends a test e mail for each format chosen Select HTML to send an HTML version of the E mail Page in your message Select Text to send a plain text version of the E mail Page Sel
79. this you very probably also want to disallow commenting explained in Disallowing commenting on a Component or Page on page 292 Click Save and Close to commit your change Republish the Component or Page to apply the change you made Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 291 User Generated Content Disallowing commenting on a Component or Page Prevent a Component or Page from ever being commented on even if rendered with a Template that enables commenting Procedure 1 Access Content Manager and navigate to the Component or Page for which you want to disallow commenting 2 Open the Component or Page and select the Comments tab 3 Clear the option Allow users to leave comments on this component or Allow users to comment on this Page at the top Note Disabling this functionality does not mean that existing comments that were submitted before now will disappear To make that happen refer to Hiding all comments for a Component or Page on the published Web page on page 291 4 Click Save and Close to commit your change Republish the Component or Page to apply the change you made Disallowing rating of a Component or Page Stop new ratings from being submitted for a Component or Page Procedure 1 Access Content Manager and navigate to the Component or Page for which you want to disallow rating 2 Open the Component or Page and select the Ratings tab 3 Clear the option Allow users to rate
80. this user interface cannot be guaranteed to work with a newer version of Google Chrome disabling auto updating is recommended To disable auto updating in Google Chrome refer to this Web page http www chromium org administrators turning off auto updates 15 If you want to have additional information available about the current state of its window enable the browser Status Bar visible at the bottom of the screen n Mozilla Firefox select View gt Status Bar In Microsoft Internet Explorer select View gt Toolbars gt Status Bar In Google Chrome this feature is not available 16 For all browsers you intend to use disable popup blocking functionality Recommended system display properties To optimize how your browser displays the Content Manager Explorer set your screen resolution to at least 1024x768 and your font size to small or 96 dpi Procedure 1 Ona PC on your desktop right click and select Properties The Display Properties window appears 2 Onthe Settings tab set your screen resolution to 1024x768 or higher 3 Click the Advanced button A window appears in which you can change the font size 4 Onthe General tab set your font size to small or 96 dpi 5 Click OK to return to the Display Properties window 6 Click OK to save changes 7 Alternatively on a Mac select System Preferences and in the dialog that opens select Displays in the hardware area 8 Under Resolutions select a resolution o
81. to see comments submitted since Monday of the current week m Select This month to see comments submitted since the 1st of the current month Select Select a date or date range to specify a start date and an end date and see comments submitted between those two dates inclusive When you have configured all your filters click Filter to see all comments that match your filter Result The bottom half of the content area shows the filtered results If you want click Hide filter options to stop displaying all the filter controls The columns of the filtered results have the following meanings Date Created shows when the comment was submitted Comment shows the first few words of the comment that was submitted Hover over this field to see more of the comment in a floating text box Created by User shows the name of the visitor that submitted this comment Associated Item Title shows the name of the Content Manager item a Component or a Page that this comment was made for Associated Item Type shows the item type of the Content Manager item Component or Page that this comment was made for Moderation Status shows the status of the comment as explained above Comment Score shows how many visitors have voted in favor or against of this comment A vote in favor raises this value by 1 a vote against it lowers its value by 1 If you have comment moderation switched on for the Component or Page that this comment belongs to
82. tr gt Table Cell lt td gt Bold strong Sty Italic lt em gt The Current Elements drop down contains the currently selected element and previous elements You can use this to select any element and view its properties If an element has an associated style or class attributes these elements are displayed with an asterisk character The formatting options on the toolbar display the options available for the currently selected element Section type You can apply a header level to text within a format area To apply a header level to text place your cursor in the line that you want to add a header level to and select an option from the Header selection list Paragraph lt p gt Generic container lt div gt Body text no surround tag Headings lt h1 gt lt h6 gt Style If defined you can apply a Style to a current selection The Styles define predefined formatting These styles are predefined for the entire system To apply a style to text Select the element to which you want to apply a style Select the style from the Style drop down For more information about configuring styles for text refer to the implementer s documentation portal Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 65 Component field types 66 Inserting hyperlinks in a format area In a format area you can create the hyperlinks to the items Components HTTP E mail address Anchor and Other About this task
83. window a Define search criteria for more information see Searching Contacts on page 209 b Click the Search button The list view shows Contacts filtered according to the search criteria c Click the Save button Note The search window shows Standard Details and Keyword filter options and the list view the Contacts within the Address Book or Distribution List Result A dialog appears in which you can add the Contacts in the filtered list to an existing Static Distribution List or create a new a Dynamic Distribution List or Static Distribution List 5 Create a Segment as follows a In Step 1 Choose the type of item to save by selecting New Segment from the drop down menu b In Step 2 Enter title and description c In Step 3 Select a Folder where you want to save the Segment then click OK to save the Segment 232 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Results The Segment is created in the specified Folder Copying or moving Segments You can only make copies or move Segments within Folders of the Audience Manager node You can paste multiple items at once and copying a Folder copies all of the Segments within it and any of its subfolders Before you begin To cut and paste a Segment you need Segmentation Management rights and Delete permissions for the parent Folder and Write permissions on the destination Folder the paste location To co
84. you want to edit 2 In the tree or in list view right click the Structure Group you want to edit and select Properties from the context menu that opens Result An edit window opens displaying the Structure Group you selected 3 Edit the General information Security settings and Workflow as necessary 4 Click the Save and close button on the Home tab of the Ribbon Results You have modified the Structure Group settings Ifyou changed the Directory location you must republish any nested Pages for this new location to take effect on your published site Ifthe Publishable setting is on and all other publishing settings are configured users can publish Pages created in the Structure Group If the Publishable setting is off users cannot publish Pages and nested Structure Groups Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 97 Structure Groups Publishing or unpublishing Structure Groups You can publish or unpublish any publishable Structure Group When you Publish or Unpublish a Structure Group you publish or unpublish all publishable nested Structure Groups and Pages 98 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 10 Bundles A Bundle is a container for grouping related content items that reside in different locations in Content Manager so that you can apply Workflow to these items or export or import them as a set About Bundles Bundles have a number of specific properties and behaviors described i
85. your advanced search Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 157 Search 158 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 17 Search Folders Search Folders display the results of a search When you open a Search Folder the folder lists all of the items that match your search You can create a Search Folder in any Folder in a Publication You can create delete edit localize and unlocalize Search Folders Creating a Search Folder Create a Search Folder to access a list of items that match search criteria The Content Manager does not store items in the Search Folder rather the Search Folder references them from other Folders and Structure Groups within a Publication You create a Search Folder by performing a Search and saving the query Before you begin To create a Search Folder you must have Virtual Folder Management rights and write permissions for the containing Folder About this task Depending on the search criteria a Search Folder can display the following items Folders Structure Groups Schemas Components Component Templates Template Building Blocks Bundles and other Search Folders A Search Folder cannot reference itself To create a Search Folder from a search Procedure 1 Enter your search term s in the search input box above the List View and click the search button next to it Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 159 Search Folders Tridion Content Management Administ A
86. Address Book A Local Address Book contains a collection of Contacts imported from an external data source and typically consists of a list of e mail addresses used for a one time marketing action Local Address Books are temporary and are not designed to be used to manage Contacts Before you begin To create a Local Address Book you need Contact Management rights Note Only Tridion System Administrators can edit or delete a Local Address Book Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 Select the Address Books node and click the Create New Local Address Book icon in the toolbar Result A New Address Book window appears 214 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail 4 On the General tab enter The Name of the group enter a logical name The Key ofthe group uniquely defines the Address Book at a database level 5 Click Save and Close Results A Local Address Book is created and added to the Address Books node All users with Contact Management rights have Read Write Delete permissions on Contacts in the Address Book What to do next When you have added a Local Address Book you need to import Contacts into it To delete the Local Address Book again contact your Tridion System Administrator Importing Contacts and Keywords To keep your list of Contacts up to date you can add or update Contacts
87. Bundle is a dynamic container that can contain any number of content items including other Bundles The idea behind a Bundle is to collect items that are related in some way for example all items related to a specific marketing campaign in a single container so they can be used collectively Specifically Bundles can be put in workflow by a user which causes all of its items to go through workflow too Workflow You use Workflow to define a flow of activities that bring a task to completion Activities are assigned to users and when a user completes an activity the Content Manager automatically assigns the next activity until the task is complete Workflow processes may be associated with Components Pages Templates and Bundles In the Content Manager Explorer you can view activities that are assigned to you in the Assigned view in the Things to do panel Configuring your browser The browser settings described in this section ensure that the Content Manager Explorer the interface to the Content Manager displays correctly on your screen The Content Manager Explorer runs in a browser so you can access the interface by typing the address of the Content Manager in the address bar of your browser To access Content Manager Explorer easily you can simply add the address of the Content Manager to your browser favorites If you do not know the address of the Content Manager please consult your system administrator You can acces
88. C or d C Ctrl V or Bh V Delete Result Move up one node Move down one node Close an expanded node or go to Parent node Expand a closed node or go to first Child in the node Go to the root of the navigation pane Go to the last node in the tree If you selected another node go to the selected node Go to the first node on the Page Go to the last node on the Page Go to the Parent Cuts the selected node Copies the selected node Pastes a copied or cut node Deletes the selected node Content Manager list view shortcut key The following table describes the shortcut keys that you can use to navigate between items in the list view Key Home End Up Down Page Up Page Down Enter Escape Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Action Select the first item in the list Select the last item in the list Select the previous item in the list Select the next item in the list Scroll up one page select the first item Scroll down one page select the last item Execute default action Clear selection Content Manager Explorer Key Action Shift Select a range of items Ctrl Add or remove an item from the selection Space Left mouse click Ctrl X or H X Cut Ctrl C or dt G Copy Ctrl V or db V Paste Delete Delete currently selected item s The default action for the list view is one of the following Open the item Ifthe user checked out the item edit the item Ifthe item is
89. CATEGORY 228 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Managing Segments A Segment defines Contact preferences interests and characteristics that represent a target audience of known Contacts accessing content on your Web sites You can base a Segment on another Segment so that you can create generic Segments and progressively more specific Segments to create a chain of filters whereby each filter in the chain further refines the selection You can use Segments as follows Jn Outbound E mail you can create a Dynamic Distribution List based on a Segment Jn Audience Manager on the presentation server implementers can get the list of available Segments through the Outbound E mail Content Delivery APIs Managing Content Segments Web site A Web page 6 hi 2 on G based on based on Outbound E mail Distribution Lists aX You define a Segment using filters These filters are the same as those used to define Dynamic Address Books and Dynamic Distribution Lists Whereas Address Books and Distribution Lists are used to manage groups of known Contacts and therefore contain a list of Contacts that match the filter Segments define content audiences and therefore do not contain Contacts Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 229 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note You organize Segments into Folders For more information refer to Creating
90. CE to a fixed value such as TRIDION to identify where the Contacts come from b Publication title do one of the following to map all rows in the file to one Publication set Mapping to set to a fixed value and choose a Publication from the drop down list to map each row in the file to different Publications in the Mapping drop down list select the column in the file which maps to existing Publication titles in the Content Manager c Category title do one of the following to map all rows in the file to one Category set Mapping to set to a fixed value and choose a Category from the drop down list to map each row in the file to different Categories in the Mapping drop down list select the column in the file which maps to existing Category titles in the Content Manager d Keyword title do one of the following inthe Mapping drop down list map the column in the file which contains values for Keywords 224 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note Fields marked in bold indicate the field or fields used to uniquely identify Contacts and mandatory fields are indicated by an asterisk 8 Click the Preview button A preview of the data that will be imported is displayed for the first ten affected Contacts existing data is not displayed 9 Click the Import button 10 When the import is compl
91. CIS 4 7 EN a WN eurn Socks Boo treo Mencken noun stoners Sn Etan 2 cine n lect LJ Enix n Child Publications can contain a combination of Shared items from Parent Publications read only items Local copies of shared items editable copies of shared items created by localizing them Local items items created in the Child Publication Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 3 Getting started Publications Web site building blocks The main building blocks used to create Web sites are Schemas Components Component Templates Pages and Page Templates 4 In the Content Manager all building blocks are saved in Publications A Publication is a collection of content and layout items which are often combined to create a Web site or content for other channels A Publication organizes content using Folders and Structure Groups Folders store content and design items while Structure Groups store Pages The following image shows a Publication You use a Publication to The following diagram shows the relationship between the main Web site building blocks Create organize and manage content layout and Pages Manage user access using permissions and rights Create and initiate Workflow processes so that users create and edit items following a predefined set of activities Share and reuse content Create a site URL structure through Structure Groups User Interface EA Schema Lemponen
92. Click Compact View to view just the manual stages and stages which contain items Click Expanded View to view all stages involved in the translation process An item in a Translation Job can be in one of the following stages Sent for Translation The item remains in this stage until the first time Translation Manager pulls the actual status from the translation management system Translation Workflow stages The item can be in any Workflow stage defined in the translation management system up to and including the Translated Content Retrieval stage The Workflow stages are configurable on your translation management system Translation Manager displays all Workflow stages merged into one list therefore some stages may be included in the list but are not used by all items Note also that a Workflow stage may also be placed out of sequence in the list Complete The item is in a stage after the Translated Content Retrieval stage including the Completed stage Translation Manager sets the SDL Tridion Translation Job to Complete once all items have passed the Translated Content Retrieval stage even if there are additional Workflow stages in the translation management system before they reach the Complete stage Exceptions The item is in the Exception or Recovery stage in the translation management system The item can be retrieved when the error is corrected Terminated The item has been canceled and will not be returned In the C
93. Ctrl Z or dt Z Ctrl Y or db Y Ctrl A or gh A Ctrl B or Bh B Ctrl T or db I Ctrl U or dB U Ctrl L or dB L Ctrl R or gh R Ctrl E or db E Ctrl K or db TK Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Action Field types Plain text Format Area Plain text Format Area Plain text Format Area Plain text Format Area Format Area Format Area Format Area Format Area Format Area Format Area Format Area Chrome Plain text Format Area Plain text Format Area x x T x T m umber umber umber umber umber umber Content Manager Explorer Key Action Field types Ctrl or dB Create bulleted list Format Area Format Area only CtrH CtrH Left Move one word to Plain text Format Area Number the left Right or Move one word to Plain text Format Area Number the right Ctrl Home Move to start of Plain text Format Area Number input field Windows only not in Firefox db Left Plain text Format Area Number dB Right Go to end of line Plain text Format Area Number Ctrl End Move to end of Plain text Format Area Number input field Windows only Ctrl Delete Remove current Plain text Format Area Number word from current cursor position Windows only Content Manager Ribbon shortcut keys You can use a number of shortcut keys to navigate through the items in the Ribbon To start navigating through the Ribbon controls f
94. Denmark Address Book but do not have any permissions for the Nordic subscribed Address Book and therefore cannot view Contacts within this Address Book The All Contacts node contains all Contacts within the Publication but only displays the Contacts in the Publication for which a user has read access so therefore in this case not Contacts in the Nordic subscribed Address Book Dynamic Distribution Lists Users with Distribution List Management rights and Read and Write permissions can create Distribution Lists Distribution Lists filter Contacts in a single Address Book or Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 203 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail All Address Books available within a Publication You can create a Dynamic Distribution List based on a Segment Address Book or Dynamic Address Book Ifyou select a Segment the filters defined in the selected Segment are used in addition to other filters you may define and act on all Contacts within the Publication Ifyou select a Dynamic Address Book the filters defined in the selected Dynamic Address Book are used in addition to other filters you may define and act on Contacts within this Address Book Ifyou select a regular Address Book the filters you define act on Contacts within this Address Book Ifyou make no selection none the filters act on all Contacts within the Publication For example the Nordic Skiers Dynamic Distribution List is based on
95. M Server Time Monday September 30 2013 2 57 AM 53 Search B Building Blocks M Modified Note For more information see Search on page 149 2 After results are returned click the Advanced Search button arrowhead next to the search input box or click Show Advanced Search erver Time Monday September 30 2013 4 06 AM Search B Building Blocks BB Building Blocks Blocks tcm 22 1027 Modified 9 23 2013 9 05 AM 9 23 2013 9 06 AM 9 23 2013 9 05 AM mimi 3 40 AR ui u In the expanded view click Save search 4 Inthe location popup navigate to the Building Blocks Folder in which you want to create the Search Folder and click Select 5 Inthe Virtual Folder window that appears fill in the following fields Name the name of the Search Folder This name must be unique Description optional use this field if you want to describe the search operation you are saving to the Search Folder Metadata Schema optional you can select a metadata Schema for the Search Folder in order to specify metadata 6 Click Save and Close on the toolbar Results You have created a Search Folder 160 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Search Folders Editing a Search Folder Edit a Search Folder to modify its name configuration and metadata You cannot change the Virtual Folder type Before you begin To edit a Search Folder you must have
96. Note The Publish Queue is purged on a regular basis based on the configuration of the Content Manager 132 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Publishing Procedure 1 To access the Publishing Queue click the Publishing Queue button in the Home tab of the Ribbon in the main screen or in any item dialog A Publishing Queue dialog opens Do one of the following Results To view all scheduled publish transactions click Show Tasks To filter the results set one or more parameters and then click the Show Tasks button You can filter publish queue items on the following criteria Target The Target Type to which the item has been submitted for publishing or unpublishing Publication The Publication from which the Content Manager published the item User The User that performed the publish action State The publish state of the transaction Priority The priority of the transaction Schedule If selected a date range within which the publish or unpublish action is supposed to take place The Content Manager Explorer displays a list of publish transactions You can also filter the displayed list using the arrow button that appears next to the columns in the list Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 133 Publishing Cancelling a publish transaction The Publish Queue lists all publish transactions that users have scheduled for publishing actions publish or unpublish and publish transactions that have
97. PE BOUNCE STATUS ID a ENABLED GROUP_KEYVALUE Each row in the export file stores data for a Contact Exporting Keywords You can export Keywords contained in Contacts from the Content Management system into a Comma Separated Value CSV file Before you begin To export Keywords from Contacts in an Address Book in a Publication you need Contact Management rights and Read permissions for the selected Address Book To export Keywords from the All Contacts node or in any Address Book in System Administration you need System Administrator rights To export Keywords from Contacts in a Distribution List you need Distribution List Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder About this task The data in the exported Keywords file is formatted as follows a comma is used as field delimiter double quote is used as text qualifier carriage return line feed CrLf is used as a row separator the file is encoded in UTF 8 You can export Keywords contained in Contacts from any Address Book or Distribution List in the system The export can contain all Keywords in all Contacts in an Address Book or Distribution List or you can filter the Contact list first before exporting A Tridion System Administrator can perform an export of all Keywords used in Contacts in the system from the All Contacts node in System Administration Content Manager Explorer Basi
98. SP1 Leaflet Schema Y Component Content ox foo Just a little pote Edit windows also have their own Ribbons giving you access to the actions you can perform on the item See Ribbon controls on page 16 for a description of the controls available on the Ribbon Saving an item When you have completed work on an item you can save the item using one of three options in the Home tab of the Ribbon Save saves the current changes you made to the item the window remains open Save and close saves the changes you made to the item and closes the item Save and new saves the changes you made to the item closes the item and opens a window in which you can create a new item of the same type Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 35 Content Manager Explorer Home Organize aes E Save Save and Close Workflow Save and Format E a BluePrint Hierarchy Where L New D Manage 02 France Building Bl General Source Bundles Workflow Comments Ratings Name Shortcut keys You can use the following keyboard shortcuts to navigate and use items in Content 36 Manager Explorer Refresh SDL Tridion 2013 SP1 Leaflet As a general rule pressing F5 will refresh any list displayed in the currently active window Input field shortcut keys The following table describes the shortcut keys that can be used in input fields Key Ctrl X or db X Ctrl C or dt 4C Ctrl V ord v
99. Schedule the publish phases separately This opens a new set of options Select Generate publishable content later to start the publishing process at a later date For example you may want to postpone this phase because the Content Manager will not be so busy at that time Select Place content online later to schedule the time at which content is placed online For example if you are publishing your company s quarterly results you may not want them to go online until a specific date If a Publication Structure Group Component Template and or Page Template is among the items you are publishing you also see an option called Republish Only Do Not Publish New Content which is selected by default When selected new items in the Publication or Structure Group and new Templates are not published To see which items the Content Manager will publish click the expand button next to Show items to publish The dialog expands to show the items you selected as well as any items that depend on it Click Hide items to publish to hide this information again To configure when this content should be unpublished click Unpublish settings and do one of the following To unpublish at a later date select Do not unpublish To schedule unpublishing select Schedule unpublish and click the calendar to pick a date and time To configure Advanced Publishing options select the Advanced tab Click Publish to start the publishing process R
100. Shortcuts Publications Fq a Content Management Oo aEGEEENEKRKREEEEKKEEEN S3 putcH m e me A 44 ceRman x d X FRENCH austrian d Level 1 o E o Levei 2 e AUSTRIAN Translation BluePrint configuration The configuration of the BluePrint determines which translations are possible in other words from which source to target languages you can translate to and from A Publication containing content in a source language is referred to as a Source Publication and a Publication which can receive translated content a Target Publication For example in the following BluePrint configured for translation based on the example shown above you can translate from English to German Dutch and French and from German to Austrian German English Publication Source EN DE EN NL EN FR Publication Publication Publication Target German X rgen di ar 1 ee Target Dutch Target French J German Dutch French Austrian Publication Target Austrian an 166 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager Note You can view the configuration of a Publication by going to Translation tab in the Publication properties Authorization When you log on to the Content Manager Explorer the only Publications in the BluePrint visible to you are the ones for which you have access permissions as set by the system administrator To be able to initiate translations you must h
101. Virtual Folder Management rights and Write permission for the containing Folder Procedure 1 Navigate to the Search Folder that you wish to edit and click the Open button on the toolbar or context menu 2 Modify the following fields as necessary Name Metadata Schema 3 Click Save and Close on the toolbar Results You have modified the Search Folder The Search Folder will display the results of the configuration information BluePrint If the Folder is edited in a BluePrint Parent Publication Child Publications that use the shared item now use the modified Folder In a BluePrint you can only edit a local Folder or a local copy of a shared Folder You cannot edit a shared Search Folder If the Search Folder is a local copy you cannot edit the configuration data Deleting a Search Folder You can delete a Search Folder to remove the Folder from the Content Manager Items in a Search Folder are not deleted when you delete a Search Folder and still exist in their original Folder Before you begin To delete a Search Folder you must have Virtual Folder Management rights and Delete permissions for the containing Folder Procedure 1 Navigate to the Folder that contains the Search Folder you want to delete 2 Select the Search Folder from the list view 3 Click the Delete button on the toolbar or context menu 4 You are prompted to confirm deletion Click Yes Results You have deleted the Folder from the Content Man
102. Windows or Finder Mac opens showing the Firefox profile folder Close Firefox In the folder check for the presence of a file called user js If it exists open it in a plain text editor if it does not exist create it in a plain text editor Add the following lines anywhere in the user js file user pref capability policy policynames allowclipb esc E user pref capability policy allowclipboard sites http cmsname2 user pref capability policy allowclipboard Clipboard cutcopy allAccess user pref capability policy allowclipboard Clipboard paste allAccess user pref browser link open newwindow 2 in which lt cmsname gt is the domain name of the Content Manager server machine Note You can also add comments on separate lines Start these lines with a double forward slash Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 9 Getting started f Save and close the user js file g Ifyou are using Firefox on Mac OS X also do the following Inthe Apple menu select System Preferences then Keyboard and Mouse then Keyboard Shortcuts Under Full Keyboard Access select All controls Result Mozilla Firefox is now properly configured 14 If you intend to use Google Chrome as your browser SDL Tridion recommends to disable the auto update functionality of Chrome Result By default Google Chrome is configured to auto update to its latest version Because
103. a 290 Enforcing comment moderation for a Component or Page 000 ee eee 291 Hiding all comments for a Component or Page on the published Web page 291 Disallowing commenting on a Component or Page eee eee eee eee 292 Disallowing rating of a Component or Page cece esee 292 Adding a comment to a Component or Page 0000 eese 293 Changing the appearance of comments on the published Web page 293 Deleting or unpublishing items with comments or ratings 000 eee ee 294 21 WebDAV COMNGCION ose seuns cenae ener hcieectene hae inieeradesarreeeodt 295 Viewing binary files in Multimedia Components using WebDAV 295 Accessing items from an external application using WebDAV 05 296 File extensions for Content Manager items 000 cee eee eee eee 296 Allowed operations 42 4 re re ERIS R RAIDER ERR RE ade 297 Opening existing Items ccc ceeec ced HAAR OA Nd S CR E GR OCURRE Re 298 Creating new items icieskefe ere Civico nes ERU RAP PINO EN Ped ncs 300 IEdititig WMS iiie ececeetet IER Tl eie Pado ita Rt i ole RO Oa 301 VICWINE TEMS ange ie m 302 VIII Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Renaming Helms 22v ver hte Ve ber tik ayer p e pedi eus 302 Deleting 1tenis 264500205 once beadd dung EI R PRU PRATC dient E hr E e ds 302 Cutting copying and pasting items 0 eee eee eee ee
104. a Bundle and in the Create tab of the Ribbon toolbar click the New Bundle button 3 In the dialog that opens fill in the following information Name The name for the Bundle Description A description for the Bundle Bundle Type The type of Bundle determines whether your Bundle is subject to a Workflow Process and if so which Workflow Process Metadata Based on the Bundle type you may also see one or more metadata fields 4 Click Save and Close in the Ribbon toolbar of the dialog to create the Bundle Result The Bundle is created You can now add items to it Adding one item to a Bundle Add an item to an existing Bundle from the item s context menu To add an item to a new Bundle create the empty Bundle first Note that you can add the same item to multiple Bundles and that you can also add a Bundle itself to a Bundle Before you begin If a Bundle is subject to a Workflow Process and currently in workflow you can only add an item to it if all of the following are true The Bundle is currently in a Workflow state that allows the adding of items to it The item you intend to add is a Component Page Component Template Page Template Template Building Block or another Bundle The item you intend to add is not currently in workflow Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 101 Bundles Procedure l In the tree on the left navigate to a location that contains the item you want to add to a Bundle
105. a Folder Structure Group or Publication show the list of items contained within it Remembered settings When you close your browser the Content Manager Explorer remembers a number of settings implicitly Content Manager Explorer remebers the following settings across sessions the last visited location in the Publication tree whether the toolbar Ribbon was collapsed or expanded your Paste Special settings your page size for search results the Target Types selected when you last published content your Publish Settings but not your Unpublish Settings or Advanced publish settings Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 39 Content Manager Explorer 40 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 3 BluePrinting A BluePrint is a hierarchy of Publications in which Parent Publications share content with Child Publications BluePrinting enables you to reuse structure content and design between Publications The key terms used in BluePrinting are BluePrint A BluePrint establishes the relationships between Publications and enables your organization to share and manage items within multiple Publications Root Parent A Root Parent Publication is the first Publication in a BluePrint It contains only items created within that Publication A Content Manager system can contain multiple BluePrints When you create a BluePrint all Publications in the BluePrint share the Root Structure Group fro
106. a Publication that is a target for the translated content The Translation Jobs displayed in the Translation Jobs queue is filtered depending on the access permissions of the user Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select the Translation Jobs node in the Shortcuts area A list of Translation Jobs is displayed in the list view 3 Select a Translation Job from the list and choose Open from the context menu Result The Translation Job dialog appears 4 Inthe General tab Translation Targets section review the Price and Quality Level and select one of the following Authorize select if you are happy with the price and quality a Reject select if you do not want to go ahead with the translation Leave Open the default select if you do not want to make a decision just yet 5 After authorizing one or more jobs Scroll down to the bottom of the Translation Targets section Review the Total Amount Selected for Authorization 3 the number of authorized languages appears between brackets and the total price in US dollars c Click Submit Results The Translation Job is sent for translation to SDL BeGlobal Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 183 Translation Manager Adding items to a Translation Job You can add items to an existing Translation Job that has not yet been sent for translation whose status is Definition Before you begin To add items to a Translation Job you must have Trans
107. a search with special characters the terms within the special characters are used Along with numbers the following characters have special meanings To search for a string that contains one of these characters precede the character with a backslash If the character is part of a phrase or term enclose the search text in double quotes In addition you need to place a backslash in front of the following reserved words regardless of their capitalization CONTAINS NEAR a SENTENCE PARAGRAPH Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 153 Search PHRASE IN MATCHES STARTS SUBSTRING ENDS AND OR NOT Multimedia Components You can also search for content in certain binary resources The following document formats are supported HTML XML and derived formats Microsoft Office documents OpenDocument documents PDF documents EPUB Electronic Publication Format documents RTF Rich Text Format documents Important You cannot search for a Multimedia Component with its extension Advanced search Advanced search allows you to define more specific search criteria to narrow or expand your search To perform an advanced search click the expand button arrowhead next to the search input box 154 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Search Server Time Monday September 30 2013 4 06 AM ES Search B Building Blocks tcm 22 1027 7 M
108. able Component fields You can send the following fields for translation in a Component Component Text fields but not if the values are selected from a list Component External Link fields for example if you want to translate a URL such as google co uk to google nl Component Format Area fields including attribute values for example alt System Architecture You need to select the Translatable check box in Schemas if you want to allow these fields to be sent for translation Translatable Metadata fields If the following Content Manager items have metadata fields of type Text field or External Link field you can send these fields for translation Components a Multimedia Components Folders m Structure Groups Pages Keywords Bundles Virtual Folders 172 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager You need to select the Translatable check box in Schemas if you want to allow these fields to be sent for translation Translatable properties When you include Content Manager items in a Translation Job the following item properties are sent for translation Component Name Multimedia Component Name Folder Name Structure Group Name Structure Group Directory Page Name Page File name Keyword Name Keyword Description Category Name Category Description Bundle Name Bundle Description Virtual Folder Name Virtual Folder Description You n
109. ades performance significantly For example if you send 1000 e mails and you send them with a batch size of 10 you are actually queuing 100 batches each containing 10 e mails and it is the queuing process rather than the sending which affects performance queuing 10 e mails or a 1000 e mails takes roughly the same amount of time Therefore sending a Mailing in batches of 100 batches takes 100 times longer than sending 1 batch Time between each batch specify an interval in minutes hours or days For example if you fill in 2 day s Outbound E mail sends a batch of e mails every other day starting from the date and time specified in the Prepare the e mails now but send them later field 6 Click Send to activate the Mailing process Results For each Contact in the Distribution List s associated with this Mailing Outbound E mail resolves the Merge Fields in the e mail message Outbound E mail also excludes Components from the e mail message if the Contact is not in the Target Group s specified for that Component It then sends the resulting e mail message to the e mail address of that Contact Contacts are filtered out from the Mailing depending on the E mail error status Subscription Status and Use maximum E mails limit settings Triggering a Mailing A triggered Mailing allows you to set up a mailing to send e mails in response to a specific event When you send a regular Mailing the e mail is sent to a list of Contacts c
110. ager Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 161 Search Folders Localizing or unlocalizing a Search Folder If a Search Folder is shared to a BluePrint Child Publication you can localize the Search Folder to create a local copy When you localize a Search Folder you can edit the name and metadata You cannot edit the type or search criteria You can also unlocalize a Search Folder to use the shared Search Folder from a Parent Publication Note The search results in a Search Folder are within one publication only Therefore the unlocalized Search Folder contains only those items in the Parent Publication Using items in a Search Folder When you access the list view of a Search Folder you see items to which you have read write localize or delete permissions for the storage Folder or Structure Group and items that meet the search criteria for the Search Folder The items in a Search Folder represent the items to which you have read right localize and or delete permissions and rights As a result the Search Folder content may vary from one user to the next You can perform the following actions on items in a Search Folder m Check in out and undo check out View an item s History List Rollback Localize Unlocalize Publish Unpublish View Copy Edit if you rename an item in a Search Folder and refresh the list view the changes do not appear immediately To verify that the Content Manager has made
111. ailings as these cannot be sent explicitly Skipped No e mails to send there were no e mails to send as part of the Mailing Sent the Mailing was sent successfully Aborted the sending of the Mailing was cancelled Failed the sending of the Mailing was unsuccessful 7 Click Close 262 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Sending a Mailing When you have created and tested your Mailing you can send the Mailing You can send your Mailing in batches to prevent your mail server from overloading or to make sure that Outbound E mail sends e mails only at a certain time of day Before you begin To send a Mailing you need Mailing Execution rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder You must have tested the Mailing Outbound E mail renders the content of a Mailing when you test it and not when you send it therefore when you send the Mailing it uses the rendered content the last time the Mailing was tested Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E mail node 3 Select the Outbound E mail Folder in which your Mailings are stored and in the list view select the Mailing you want to send and click the Send Mailing icon in the toolbar 4 Specify Date and time of sending settings Select Send now Select Prepare the e mails now but send them later and click the Calendar icon to select the date and
112. al Text Component Translatable content You can send Folders Components Multimedia Components Structure Groups Categories and Keywords for translation You can also send Bundles and Virtual Folders that contain these items for translation The following list describes the actual content Component fields Metadata fields and properties of these items that are sent for translation Translatable items You send the following Content Manager items in a Translation Job Icon Content Manager Item Description Organize content building blocks such as Components Contain content Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 171 Translation Manager Icon Content Manager Item Description A Multimedia Contain multimedia content Components Fa Structure Groups Organize manage and provide a URL structure for Pages Pages Contain Component Presentations which combine content Components and layout Component Templates Category A Category is the root classification of a taxonomic hierarchy defined using Keywords Keywords A list of values which can be used in Components and metadata A Category contains Keywords which in turn can contain nested Keywords Bundles A container that can hold multiple Content Manager items from different folders Ep Virtual Folders A Virtual Folder is an item that can contain different types of content items located in different locations in Content Manager Translat
113. al item in a Parent or in a Child You can edit local items or local copies Any changes made to these items are shared to Child Publications unless the Child Publication contains local copies of these items You can cut and paste any local item within a Publication You cannot cut and paste between Publications You must have write and delete permissions to cut and paste an item You can copy and paste any local item within a Publication You can only delete unused local items You can create a local copy localize any shared item in a Publication This permits you to edit the item You can unlocalize a local copy to use the original shared item You can publish a Component Page Structure Group or Publication Only items within active Structure Groups are published You can unpublish a Component Page Structure Group or Publication to remove the item from the Published site Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 43 BluePrinting BluePrint example A corporate Web site may have local sites in multiple countries all of which have specific language and local content requirements The following BluePrint shows a corporation which has Web sites for the following countries A site for Belgium that requires French and Dutch content A site for the Netherlands that requires Dutch and English content A site for Germany that requires English and German content Corporate Francais Nederlands English Deutsch
114. ame the item is renamed with the prefix Copy x of where x is a number For example Copy 2 of Article The Cont ent Manager gives the copy a version number 1 0 The copy has no version history Deleting an item You can delete an item to remove it from the Content Manager If you delete a Folder Structure Group or Category you delete all items contained within it as well Before you begin To delete an item you must have delete permissions for the Folder Structure Group or Category in which the item is stored as well as rights for that item You cannot delete an item 1f The item is used The Component is embedded on a Page The Component is used as a Component link or a Multimedia Component link in another Component or metadata field The Keyword is used in a Component field or Metadata field The item is localized in a Child Publication The item is published The item is in Workflow Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 33 Content Manager Explorer 34 The item is checked out The item is not a local item that is the item is a local copy or a shared item About this task Note To see if the item is used open the item and click the Show Where Used icon in the toolbar For information about the Where Used functionality see Where used on page 45 Procedure 1 To delete an item in the Content Management view navigate to the Publication and Folder Structure Gro
115. and Write Permissions for the containing Structure Group To add a Workflow association to the Structure Group you must also have Workflow Management rights About this task A Structure Group may use the following items A metadata Schema to add metadata values to the Structure Group m A Workflow Process Definition to create a Workflow Association to add to the Structure Group Note You can create only one root Structure Group in a Publication Procedure 1 To create a Structure Group navigate to the Structure Group in which you want to create a new Structure Group 2 Inthe Create tab of the Ribbon click the New Structure Group button Result A New Structure Group window appears 3 On the General tab fill in the following fields Name type the Name of the Structure Group as it will appear in Content Manager Explorer Directory type the name of the Web site URL to which Pages created in this Structure Group will be published If this is a root Structure Group this field is optional Publishable uncheck this option if you do not want the Content Manager to publish this Structure Group or nested Structure Groups Default Page Template select a default Page Template or select Inherit from Parent 4 Optional To add metadata to this Structure Group select a Metadata schema and fill in metadata fields are required 5 Ifyou want to specify that a Page in this Structure Group must e
116. and click View Contacts to further refine the list of recipients who you want to add to a Distribution List and to whom the selected Mailing status applies see step 4 272 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note For detailed information on creating Distribution Lists see Managing Distribution Lists on page 234 4 When you select a Distribution List and click View Contacts the Distribution List details shows the Contacts in this Distribution List to whom the selected Mailing status applies Click the Add Contacts to Distribution List in the toolbar to create a Distribution List containing all the Contacts in the selected Distribution List to whom a Mailing status applies Define search criteria and click Search then click the Add Contacts to Distribution List to create a Distribution List containing all the Contacts that meet the search criteria to whom a Mailing status applies Note For more information see Searching Contacts on page 209 Results Outbound E mail creates a Static or Dynamic Distribution List containing Contacts to whom a selected Mailing status applies depending on your choices When you open the Distribution List the General tab indicates that the Distribution List was created from statistics and on what Mailing and Mailing status it was based What to do next You can edit the Distribution List to set Priority For Dynamic D
117. as a drop down list select box radio buttons check boxes or tree list You can use Keywords to define Component fields or metadata fields for the following Component fields in the General tab Component or Multimedia Component metadata fields in the Metadata tab 122 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Metadata and Keywords Category and Keyword metadata fields in the General tab Publication Folder Virtual Folder Structure Group and Page metadata fields in the General tab Procedure 1 Open a Component In the General tab you can define its fields Inthe Metadata tab you can define its metadata fields The following image shows a Component with fields displaying Keyword list fields the check boxes and drop down list Name Deluxe Packagel Accommodation Type F copper dF F diamond F gold F platinum F tin Airport La Guardia gt dF 2 Select a value or values for the field from a list of Keywords depending on the type of list displayed a Drop down list select a Keyword from the list ListFieldDropDown b Select box select a Keyword from the list or if multiple values are allowed press Ctrl and select each Keyword you want to add ListFieldSelect one for the money two for the show three to get ready go cat go Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 123 Metadata and Keywords c Radio buttons select a radio button
118. asic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail CONTENT MANAGEMENT Shortcuts o gt W Favorites 4 Custom Pages Ea Checked out Items 03 E mail Campaigns Publications a Content Management 4 Q child Publication gt BB Building Blocks b B RootStructureGroup b E Categories and Keywords gt outbound E mail b Audience Manager gi Content Management Search and List View Select a Distribution List in the navigation pane to view its Contacts Define search criteria and click Search to filter the list in which case the list view displays the Contacts is the list who meet the criteria You can save a filtered list as a Distribution List or export the Contacts Al Contacts Togale View B fi titer Cortese Shen Sionin titer uns mes Advances Gears Mmm Ditari Seige owe carter ma ampasami j tepat zawa Rmt j Sch Cortese dnpiseus 1076 schiusa Ceres net shewe rudy amgrz criera to decrees renis fett name Last name Erol address Compare Bunscrip on status Emei error satas s M zthergil Breatna sthargllQJNETSONAURATIONA GRID TRAMSCO Subcacrbas We protherte Mhenathan accu Jonathan Heroput 35AP COM Far Gubacntee fun preteens Eog taba Logan neeihaed1WESTUE COMESTLE Subscibe feo craters tec Ingietry Mason Ingleby E SAS ARO CU ANRO Subacnbet feo erot erne BP Oesvy mares Destry PeyvendS SOM rie Fie AERE Subacriten ho z
119. ask Note For information on how you create a chain of filters to narrow down an audience you are targeting refer to Contact filtering on page 201 Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to a Publication and do one of the following Inthe Audience Manager node select an Address Book In the Outbound E mail node select a Static or Dynamic Distribution List in a Folder 3 In the Search window a Define search criteria for more information see Searching Contacts on page 209 b Click the Search button The list view shows Contacts filtered according to the search criteria c Click the Save button 236 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note The search window shows Standard Details and Keyword filter options and the list view the Contacts within the Address Book or Distribution List Result A dialog appears in which you can add the Contacts in the filtered list to an existing Static Distribution List or create a new a Dynamic Distribution List or Static Distribution List 4 Update a Static Distribution List as follows a In Step 1 Choose the type of item to save by selecting Existing Static Distribution List from the drop down menu b In Step 2 Select a Static Distribution List then click OK to update the Distribution List 5 Create a Distribution List as follows a In Step 1 Choose the type of item to save by selec
120. ate Building Block Dreamweaver dwt Template Building Block C fragment tbbcs Template Building Block XSLT xslt Allowed operations If you access Content Manager items through WebDAV you cannot perform any action on any type of content item even if your rights and permissions allow it The following table shows the actions you can perform on Content Manager items via WebDAV Item type View Create Edit Multimedia yes no yes Schema Embeddable yes no yes Schema Multimedia yes yes yes Component Component yes yes yes Template Template Building yes yes yes Block Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Delete yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no no 297 WebDAV Connector Item type View Create Edit Delete Category Keyword Target Group The following table shows exactly what actions you can and cannot do on Content Manager items via WebDAV Item type Rename Cut paste Copy paste Check in and check out Multimedia Schema a ERAN yes Metadata Schema yes yes yes yes Parameter Schema yes yes yes yes Embeddable Schema yes yes Multimedia Component i pe pe E Component Template a a a Template Building Block ps pe pe Virtual Folder no Structure Group no Opening existing items You can open existing Content Manager items from a WebDAV compliant interface simply by accessing the Open functionality in your Windows application typically accessible f
121. ation is intended for used to personalize a Mailing Classify Content you use Categories and Keywords to classify content Compo nents and specify Contact preferences and interests which you can then use as a basis for creating Distribution Lists Create Folders Folders are used to organize your Mailings and Distribution Lists in the Outbound E mail node and Segments in the Audience Manager node Managing Content Create Create Preview Classify Components E mail Page E mail Content gt gt gt Categories amp Component Keywords Presentations a Chie ze Personalize Classify Content Components amp Contacts i Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 243 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Creating Folders for Mailings Distribution Lists and Segments You use Folders to organize content Mailings and Distribution Lists in the Outbound E mail node and Segments in the Audience Manager node Before you begin To create a Folder for Audience Manager or Outbound E mail you must have Outbound E mail Folder Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Folder About this task Note To modify security settings for a Folder you must first save the Folder You can then edit the Folder in order to modify security settings Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to one of the following Publication gt Outbound E mail gt Mailings and Distribution L
122. aut Templates Oso Tridion records Component BS news I Prees Qolonapen B Products SS categories and Keywords a Countries trglare rance 4 German y 9 The Nethertanda Generasi cornmponert Presertabons Workflow Info Comosrent Com worent Template A Chnstmes grt to hoso al OREST t Component Tempiste SOL Tridon recorda E Default Componant Template Bsc ES acces E ue Bn ess Releases BD Froducts When you add a recursive item to a Translation Job in the Added Items tab you can indicate whether you want to send item properties for translation and whether to add nested items When the item is sent for translation it and each of its nested items to an indefinite nesting level is evaluated and resolved individually to determine its inclusion or exclusion from the Translation Job The following image shows the Added Items tab for a Page added to a Translation Job General Added Items Info Name _ e TestPage Translate page V Translate components Number of Items 1 174 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager The following image shows the Added Items tab for a Category added to a Translation Job General Added Items Info Name countries Transiate category IVi Translate keywords Number of Items 1 Translation Jobs You bundle content that you want to send for translation into a Translation Job which yo
123. ave access permissions to at least one or more configured Target Publications these are Publications which can receive translated content If you have access permissions to configured Source Publications as well as Target Publications you can initiate translations from one language to several targets The scope of a translation initiated from a Source Publication is therefore potentially larger than one initiated from a Target Publication which will always have just one target itself For example in the BluePrint above Ifyou have access to the English Publication you can initiate translations from English to German Dutch and French provided you have to these Publications as well Ifyou have access to the German Publication you can initiate translations from English to German You can also translate from German to Austrian German provided you also have to this Publication Ifyou have access to the Austrian German Publication you can initiate translations from German to Austrian German Note To be able to initiate translations you must have Translation Management rights and have access permissions to one or more configured Target Publications these are Publications which can received translated content To change your access permissions contact your System Administrator Localization The localization process the process of translating content into different languages is handled automatically by Translation Manager whe
124. ay also be able edit the raw HTML The HTML edit setting is configurable therefore you may not be able to edit HTML source in all format areas Format areas may consist of three tabs Tab name Description Design Edit formatted text using the formatting controls in the Ribbon toolbar Source Edit formatted text by editing raw HTML Content Manager Explorer performs a validation of your HTML when you switch to another tab or save the Component Your operation fails if the validation raises an error It succeeds otherwise even if the validation raises warnings You can check for warnings explicitly by selecting Validate in the Format Ribbon tab Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 59 Component field types Preview View a preview of your formatted text By default any styles are disabled You can enable them by clearing the Disable styles checkbox The following image shows the Design tab Formatdrea Design Source Chardonnay is a green skinned grape variety used to make white wine It is believed to have originated in the Burgundy wine region of eastern France but is now grown wherever wine is produced from England to New Zealand The following image shows the Source tab FormatAresa Xetrotgocspanm Class Apple styie span style fost family sans serif font size iJpxr font weight h fmal line height i19px 3ttontg Chard nnayc str ng i green skinned lt a hrzef http
125. ay now be prompted to add this Multimedia Component to a Bundle so that it can enter workflow You can choose to skip this step but until you add it to a Bundle your changes will not be checked in 7 lfthis item must be added to a Bundle a dialog opens asking you if you would like to do so now You can choose Not Now to close the dialog but you see a warning informing you that your item is not in a Bundle and the same dialog will appear every time you save changes to the item Alternatively if you select Add a Bundle selection dialog appears 8 Inthe tree structure on the left navigate to a Publication and Folder that contains a Bundle to which you want to add the item and add it to that Bundle by selecting the Bundle and clicking Add This adds the item to the selected Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is already in workflow the item will be too You can also select Close which has the same effect as clicking Not Now in the previous dialog Results The Content Manager saves a modified version of the Multimedia Component If the Content Manager Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 81 Multimedia Components checks in the Multimedia Component any Pages or Components that use the Multimedia Component will now use the new version Viewing the contents of a Multimedia Component You can view the contents of Multimedia Components by double clicking the image in the Multimedia Component dialog The item will open in
126. ayed above the table a Table Yes Row No a Column No a Cell No Summary A longer description of the table Table Yes Row No Column No Cell No 70 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Width Component field types The width of the table column or cell Height For a table this is a percentage e g 60 of the width of the page For a column or cell this is a percentage of the width of the table A specific number of pixels e g 250 To specify a number of pixels select the Other setting Leave blank for auto sizing Table Yes Row No Column Yes Cell Yes The height of the table row or cell For a table this is a percentage of the format area e g 60 For a row or cell this is a percentage of the table A specific number of pixels e g 250 To specify a number of pixels select the Other setting Leave blank for auto sizing If you leave this field blank your browser will adjust the height to the contents of the cell table Table Yes Row No Column Yes Cell Yes Cell spacing The spacing around the table cells Table Yes Row No Column No Cell No Cell padding The padding between cell contents and cell borders Table Yes Row No Column No Cell No Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 71 Component field types Horizontal alignment This is the alignment of the contents of cells in the table left right center Table Y
127. bers of the Group you selected b To reassign the Activity to a User select Assign to a User select a User typically from your Group from the dropdown list and click Reassign Result The Activity disappears from your list and appears in the Started list of the User you selected Finishing a Workflow Activity you have performed When you have finished performing a Workflow Activity indicate this by explicitly finishing the Activity If you find that you cannot finish the Activity you must reassign it to another User or Group Procedure 1 Access the Content Manager Explorer Web site 2 Click the Workflow area in the top right part of the screen and in the Things to do dialog that opens select Started Result You see Activities that you started 3 Select the Activity you want to finish Result A detail screen for this Activity appears 4 Click Finish Activity Result You see a Finish ITEM dialog where rrTemis the Activity you have finished working on 5 Under Finish Activity Message you can enter any comment you like about the Activity you performed 6 If finishing this Activity involves a decision for example to approve or reject reviewed content select the next Activity to be performed from the Next Activity dropdown you see Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 113 Workflow Ti 8 If you want you can change the name of the next Activity in the Title field Click Done to finish this Activity
128. bon do one of the following Click Localize to create a local copy Click Unlocalize to go back to the original shared item Important If you unlocalize the local copy is irretrievable All changes are lost Results You have localized or unlocalized an item Where used Where used functionality allows you to view the relationship between Content Manager items About this task Content Manager items are used together to create Web site content or content for other channels For example a Page uses a combination of Components and Component Templates a Page Template and Keywords In the Content Manager you can use the Where Used feature on an item to view Which other items use the item m Which other items the item uses To which Publication Targets the item has been published Note Similar functionality is also provided by the Related Items List View available when you select a Keyword The view displays the Components Pages and other Content Manager items that have been tagged with the selected Keyword or Keyword branch allowing you to see related content For more information see Viewing related content on page 125 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 45 BluePrinting Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Do one of the following Select an item and choose Where Used in the context menu Select an item and choose BluePrinting gt BluePrint Hierarchy in the con
129. bound E mail Procedure 1 In the Publication gt Outbound E mail node navigate to the Folder where your Mailings are stored select a Mailing and click the Explore Mailing Status icon in the toolbar Result The Mailing opens on the Statistics tab 2 Select a response type for example Action taken or Read confirmed Select a Distribution List 4 Click Show Contacts to view the members of the Distribution List to whom the type of Mailing result applies 5 Select a Contact and choose Open in the context menu to see which Mailings are associated with a specific Contact Contact details open Select a Mailing and click E mail details to view the Mailing as it appeared to this Contact mailing history 6 Select a Contact and click E mail details in the context menu to view the Mailing details Mailing details open The left hand side of the window shows the Mailing and Contact details and the actions taken on the Mailing by the Contact and when date and time The right hand side of the window displays the e mail that was sent to this Contact including Contact Details of this specific Contact where Merge Fields are used in the e mail Results You examined what a Mailing looked like to a specific Contact and viewed what action was taken by that Contact Refreshing statistics For performance reasons the number counts for Distribution Lists Address Books and Mailing statistics are not calculated automatically T
130. box to also send to Contacts who do not wish to receive e mails opted out or unsubscribed 252 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 10 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note Selecting the Do not wish to receive e mail check box is not recommended and may have legal consequences By default e mails are sent to all addresses where there is no record of having problems delivering the message In the E mail error status field you can also choose whether to send e mails to addresses that have experienced problems Select the Temporary problems check box to send the e mail to addresses that encountered a temporary problem with delivery for example because the recipient s mailbox was full Select the Persistent problems check box to also send the e mail to addresses that have encountered persistent problems for example the e mail address does not exist In the Advanced settings select Archive personalized e mail check box to have Outbound E mail save each e mail message it sends out which you can then view by examining the Mailing statistics for a Contact For more information see Viewing Contact e mails on page 213 Note The Archive personalized e mail option is configurable and may not be available If you do select this check box make sure that there is sufficient database storage for all the e mails that you will send out In the Advanced settings select or deselect the Use maximum E mails lim
131. by creating Distribution Lists Before you begin To search Contacts in an Address Book you need Contact Management rights and Read Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 209 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail permissions for the Address book To search Contacts in a Distribution List you need Distribution List Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder About this task You can search for Contacts using the following search filters which you can choose to show or hide in the user interface Standard filters General Contact Mailing information Contact details filters Specific information about a person or organization Keyword filters Specific Contact preferences characteristics or interests The result of a search is a list of Contacts that meet the criteria defined in the search criteria Search functionality allows you to perform the following tasks Check and modify a customer s contact details m Check a Contact s Mailing history and their response to a Mailing Target mailings by creating Distribution Lists Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Select an Address Book or Distribution List to view the search filters Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node and select an Address Book Select the All Contacts node if you want to perform a search on all Contacts in all Address Books in the Publication Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E ma
132. c User Manual 227 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 To export Keywords used in Contacts to a CSV file do one of the following To export Keywords in all Contacts of a specific Distribution List or Address Book select the Distribution List or Address Book and either select Export Keywords from the context menu or click the Export Keywords icon in the toolbar To export Keywords in a filtered selection of members of a specific Distribution List or Address Book perform a Contacts search and click the Export Keywords icon For more information see Searching Contacts on page 209 4 Inthe File Download dialog click Save 5 Inthe standard Windows Save File dialog that appears select a location on your file system enter a name for the file and click Save Results The export file is saved to the location on your file system specified Columns and rows of data are created in the export file The following columns are created KEYWORD CATEGORY PUBLICATION Contact Identification fields Each Keyword for a selected Contact is stored in a separate row Note If the Contact identification field names already contains PUBLICATION CATEGORY and or KEYWORD the field containing the publication category keyword name is made unique by adding a number For example field name
133. cece eee eee eens 193 Outbound Email Lu adecuar qaid oe c aH PCR Rad o Rei a KR AE a ceeds 194 Creating and sending e mails 0000 eee 195 Outbound E mail user merece 6d pened pru dee Ra os Rua e ean CO d OR keds 196 Content Manager Explorer interface 0 0 cece eee eens 198 Outbound E mail rights and permissions 0 00 cece eee e eee eens 199 Legal NOUCE 242 portas ve py Et t esau UC P E pa Rud ate 200 Managing Contacts 2 cedros UOCE T ia dba RP RRLAmCE Sed Ru pes 200 Address BOOKS unsieauuieuuus pereda quud Resear pads d pda aleae as eaten 200 onc UU 201 Contact filtering ive aee opes n ub ck Gia d ga ec erdt aes 201 Creating Contact o2 0644tipiedengntded de Ure EP e n E REPRE 205 Updating a Contact ssssssseslesesse n 207 Deactivating and deleting a Contact 0 cece eee eee 209 Searching Contacts s ssec e od PUDE US pb e p ER Pale Rus 209 Viewing Contact e mails 2 0 0 0 0c cece een 213 Creating a Local Address Book 214 Importing Contacts and Keywords 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee eens 215 Exporting Contacts and Keywords 0 00 cece cence eee eee eens 225 Managing Sesinents Liens eeepc EORR Rp P Ep Re E ERE ees 229 Creating or updating Segments 20 cece eee eee ees 230 Creating a Segment from search es 232 Copying or moving Segments 0 cece eee eee eee eee eee ees 233 Editing Segments in Child Publications 233 Deleting Segments
134. cessary while it is in the Definition state then send the new job for translation Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select the Translation Jobs node in the Shortcuts navigation pane 3 Selecta Translation Job that is in Error sending state Choose Open from the context menu b Click the Error tab Result Details are displayed in the Error Details section c Fix the errors For example Content Manager items does not exist Folder is empty m Network connection error Item is not valid according to its Schema 4 When you have fixed errors go to the Translation Jobs Queue select a Translation Job and choose Retry sending from the context menu Results You have resent the Translation Job The Translation Job is now in the Ready for Translation state in which the items that Translation Manager had previously failed to send are awaiting transferral to the translation management system What to do next You can track the progress of the Translation Job in the Translation Progress tab of the Translation Job Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 187 Translation Manager Retrieving a Translation Job on retrieve error Errors can occur during the sending and retrieving of a Translation Job to or from the translation management system The state of a Translation Job is set to Error retrieving when an error is encountered returning Translation Jobs to the Content Manager Before you begin To retry r
135. ch Web site visitors can see a Component Presentation select the Component Presentation and click the Target Group subtab then select the Target Group s to which you want to show this Component Presentation Click the Save and Close button on the toolbar Depending on the Structure Group in which you created this Page you may now be prompted to add this Page to a Bundle so that it can enter workflow You can choose to skip this step but until you add it to a Bundle your changes will not be checked in If this item must be added to a Bundle a dialog opens asking you if you would like to do so now You can choose Not Now to close the dialog but you see a warning informing you that your item is not in a Bundle and the same dialog will appear every time you save changes to the item Alternatively if you select Add a Bundle selection dialog appears In the tree structure on the left navigate to a Publication and Folder that contains a Bundle to which you want to add the item and add it to that Bundle by selecting the Bundle and clicking Add This adds the item to the selected Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is already in workflow the item will be too You can also select Close which has the same effect as clicking Not Now in the previous dialog Results You have created a Page Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 85 Pages Note You cannot delete any items used on the Page Components Component Templates
136. ck box marked Group independent b Select one or more Target Group check boxes in the list c Click the Refresh Preview button to see the E Mail Page as it will appear to members of this Target Group Merge Fields remain unresolved If you selected multiple Target Groups the preview shows you the e mail as it will appear to a Contact who belongs to any of these groups If you select the Group independent check box the preview contains all content 9 Click Save and Close Results You now have an E mail Page that you can send out as a Mailing Note that when this E mail Page is sent out Outbound E mail Excludes or includes Component Presentations based on the Contact s Keywords Replaces all Merge Fields with the appropriate values for each specific Contact see the Adding Merge Fields on page 254 What to do next To test and send a Mailing see Managing Mailings on page 250 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 247 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Personalizing an e mail Page You can personalize the content of a Mailing using Target Groups Before you begin To associate Target Groups with Component Presentations on a Page you must have Page Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Structure Group Target Groups available for more information see Creating Target Groups for Outbound E mail on page 255 About this task A Target Group defines a category of user and
137. copy of a shared BluePrint item New Category Create a new Category For more information refer to the implementer s documentation portal New Component Create a new Component New Component Create a new Component Template For more Template information refer to the implementer s documentation portal Eg New Custom Page Create a new Custom Page For more information refer to the implementer s documentation portal B New Folder Create a new Folder SG New Group Create a new Group of users For more information refer to the implementer s documentation portal New Keyword Create a new Keyword For more information refer to the implementer s documentation portal Pe New Multimedia Create a new Multimedia Component Component EPA New Multimedia Add a new Multimedia Type For more information Type refer to the implementer s documentation portal a New Page Create a new Page a New Page Create a new Page Template 1 Template e New Publication Create a new Publication 1 4 New Publication Create a new Publication Target 1 N N Sp 1 m5 Ns aE Target ew Schema Create a new Schema 1 ew Structure Create a new Structure Groups Group ew Target Group Create a new Target Group New Target Type Create a new Target Type New Template Create a new Template Building Block 1 Building Block New User Create a new User 1 ew Virtual Folder Create a new Virtual Folder Fo
138. cts from a Static Distribution List manually Before you begin To remove Contacts from a Distribution List you need Distribution List Management rights and Write permissions for the destination Outbound E mail Folder 238 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail About this task Note Removal removes the Contact from the Distribution List only the Contact still exists in an Address Book To remove a Contact permanently deactivate or delete the Contact Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E mail node 3 Browse to a Folder and select a Static Distribution List 4 Select one or more Contacts in the Static Distribution List or use the Contact search functionality described in see Searching Contacts on page 209 to locate specific Contacts Note To select several Contacts from the list use the Shift key to select sequential Contacts and the Ctrl key to select non sequential Contacts 5 Click the Remove Contacts from Distribution List icon in the toolbar or choose Remove Contacts from Distribution List from the context menu Results Outbound E mail removes the selected Contact or Contacts from the Static Distribution List Creating and modifying a Dynamic Distribution List You can create a Dynamic Distribution List directly in a Folder in the Outbound E mail node You create a Dynamic Distribution List by defini
139. d Read Action taken and Sent statistics are recalculated 276 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 20 User Generated Content User Generated Content UGC allows visitors to your Web site to rate content and read and leave comments Content Manager users can examine ratings and comments and authorized users can disallow rating and commenting for specific Components or Pages and edit remove and moderate comments Note On the published Web page a Component or Page only shows ratings and comments if you published the item using a template that adds UGC functionality during publishing Where to find comments and ratings Content Manager Explorer can show you comments and ratings in the entire Content Manager for a Publication for a Component for a Page or for a Contact You can see the comments and ratings that visitors have submitted in the following ways Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 277 User Generated Content All comments and ratings The Shortcuts area of Content Manager Explorer contains a User Generated Content node that lets you view and filter all comments and ratings submitted for any Publications that you have access to For more information refer to Viewing and filtering all comments and ratings in Content Manager on page 279 Comments and ratings for a specific Publication Each Publication has a root level User Generated Content node that lets you view and filter all com
140. d Pages that contain Components and Keywords that contain nested Keyword you can specify the following options Select Translate Item check box to add this Content Manager item to the Translation Job Select Translate components check box or Translate Keywords if you selected a Category to add all nested content to the Translation Job The following image shows an example of the Added Items tab Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 179 Translation Manager Added Items EJ Name B3 SDL Language Tech 7 Translate folder Translate components M Open 9 Select an item and click the Open button to open the Content Manager item you want to send to translation 10 Select an item and click the Remove button to remove the Content Manager item from the Translation Job 11 In the Info tab you can view information about the Translation Job 12 When you are finished with the Translation Job proceed by clicking one of the following in the Ribbon toolbar Save saves the Translation Job which remains open for editing Save and Close saves and closes the Translation Job the remains in an editable state until it is sent Send to Translation sends the Translation Job to your translation system What to do next If you saved the Translation Job it is in the Definition state and you can view modify and add items to the Translation Job send it for translation or delete it Any user who is authoriz
141. d indefinitely for example for a welcome e mail leave the End Date empty click the Clear End Date button top empty the field 6 Click Save and Close to save your changes Results From the time indicated by Start Date Outbound E mail sends an e mail message to any Contact who sets off the trigger The trigger becomes inactive again at the time indicated by End Date if any Important After you have turned a Mailing into a Triggered Mailing you can no longer test it To retest your mailing you must first deactivate the trigger by clearing the Triggered Mailing check box test it and then activate the trigger again What to do next To trigger a Mailing being sent in response to a specific event taking place requires you to implement an event on your Web site 266 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Clearing the e mail queue for a Mailing After you have scheduled a Mailing Outbound E mail puts e mail messages in the e mail queue and waits for the scheduled time to arrive If you find that you want to undo the scheduled Mailing before any e mails have been sent you can do so easily by clearing the queue Before you begin To clear the e mail queue for a Mailing you need Mailing Execution rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder About this task Note Even if you are not scheduling but have specified a large volume of e mails to send the mail queue
142. data fields Create a Workflow Process Association so that any Pages created or edited in the Structure Group will follow a Workflow Process Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 93 Structure Groups Note To create Pages in a Publication you must create a root Structure Group You can create other Pages and Structure Groups in the root Structure Group Structure Group settings You can define general settings Metadata default Page Template and Workflow settings for Structure Groups General settings The following table lists the Structure Group general settings Setting Description Name You must provide a name for the Structure Group that is unique within the Structure Group in which you create it In a BluePrint this naming constraint extends to any Parent or Child Publications in the BluePrint Directory location The Content Manager determines this read only field at a Publication settings level You cannot edit it in a Structure Group Directory The URL of the directory in which the Content Manager will publish Pages created in this Structure Group If this is a root Structure Group this field is optional Publishable A yes no setting that determines if the Content Manager can publish Pages created in the Structure Group and Pages in nested Structure Groups This setting defaults to Yes The URL to which the Content Manager publishes Pages is a combination of the following Publication Target
143. details these details are stored in the Audience Manager database If your organization has its own separate database of Contacts you can update that database by exporting Contacts to a Comma Separated Value CSV file Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 225 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Exporting Contacts You can export Contacts from the Content Management system into a Comma Separated Value CSV file Before you begin To export Contacts from an Address Book in a Publication you need Contact Management rights and Read permissions for the selected Address Book To export Contacts from the All Contacts node or in any Address Book in System Administration you need System Administrator rights To export Contacts from a Distribution List you need Distribution List Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder About this task The data in the exported Contacts file is formatted as follows a comma is used as field delimiter double quote is used as text qualifier carriage return line feed CrLf is used as a row separator the file is encoded in UTF 8 You can export Contacts from any Address Book or Distribution List in the system The export can contain all Contacts in the Address Book or Distribution List or you can filter the list first before exporting A Tridion System Administrator can perform an export of all Contacts in the system from the All Contacts node in Sy
144. details need to be specified when you import Importing Contacts You can import Contacts from a Comma Separated Value CSV file into an Address Book The import file contains rows of data each row of data defines a Contact and contains values for their Contact details and Contact extended details Before you begin To import Contacts into an Address Book in a Publication you need Contact Management rights and Write permissions for the destination Address Book To import Contacts into the All Contacts node in System Administration or any other Address Book in System Administration you need System Administrator rights You need to know the formatting used in the CSV import file For information see Creating the Contact import file on page 215 About this task When you import Contacts you can specify how values are assigned or mapped as follows if you want to apply the same value to the Contacts Detail field for all imported Contacts select set to a fixed value and enter a value in the Value field if the field contains values you do not want to import select skip this fie 1d if the values in the field correspond to those of the Contact Detail map the import field to an existing Contact Detail Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Do one of the following Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node In System Administration navigate to the Audience Management node 3
145. dialog appears Camponert Tempiste gt Cove 84 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 6 10 11 12 13 Pages To add a Component Presentation to the Page first find the Component you want to add You can do this in two ways In your Building Blocks Folder structure navigate to the location of the Component you want to add In your Categories and Keywords select a Keyword The List View displays Components that have been classified with this Keyword or a child Keyword When you have located the Component s you want to add do the following In the list view select one or more Components b Select a Component Template If you select more than one Component the Component Template is applied to all of the selected Components c Click Insert A message appears at the bottom of the pane which confirms that you have added one or more Component Presentations to the Page d Repeat this step to add additional Components e After you finish adding Component Presentations click Close to close the Component Presentations dialog f Inthe Component Presentations tab use the Move up and Move down buttons to adjust the ordering of the Component Presentations on the Page To edit a Component Presentation double click the Component to open it for editing To preview the Component using the selected Component Template select the Component in the list and click Preview on the right To restrict whi
146. dress of your Content Manager Explorer start with https selecting a Custom Page may not show the contents of that Custom Page Instead one of the following may happen Jn Chrome a shield icon appears on the right hand side of the browser address bar To show the Custom Page click the shield and select Load anyway n Firefox a shield icon appears on the left hand side of the browser address bar To show the Custom Page click the shield and select Disable Protection on This Page Jn Internet Explorer a message appears on the bottom of the Web page Only secure content is displayed To show the Custom Page select Show all content Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer List view The list view displays the items within a Folder or Structure Group or the results of a search This section describes how to filter open move copy and paste and delete items in the list view Opening an item from the list view You can open an item from the list view by double clicking the item using the Open icon in the main toolbar or using a context menu A window displays the item you selected If another user has opened the item in edit mode you will view the item as read only Filtering the list view using list columns When viewing items in the list view you can filter the items that are displayed by filtering the columns To filter a column click the filter icon on the right hand corner of
147. e Content Manager item from the Translation Job 10 In the Info tab you can view information about the Translation Job 11 When you are finished with the Translation Job proceed by clicking one of the following in the Ribbon toolbar Save saves the Translation Job which remains open for editing Save and Close saves and closes the Translation Job the remains in an editable state until it is sent Send to Translation sends the Translation Job to your translation system What to do next If you saved the Translation Job it is in the Definition state and you can view modify and add items to the Translation Job send it for translation or delete it Any user who is authorized to initiate translations and who has access permissions to the Publication which is a target or potential target of translated content can modify the Translation Job so long as it is in the Definition state It is therefore important to realize that the initiator of a Translation Job does not have sole ownership 182 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager Authorizing SDL BeGlobal Translation Jobs If authorization is required for a Translation Job before it is sent for translation after you have you clicked Send to Translation you need to open the Translation Job and authorize it Before you begin To view and modify a Translation Job you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to
148. e comments to approve them for appearance of the published Web page or to reject them Procedure 1 Access Content Manager Explorer and do one of the following to see the comment you want to moderate on the Comments tab of a Component or Page filtering comments in the comments screen Double click the comment in a comments screen Refer to Viewing and on page 280 for more information This opens a Component or Page preselecting the Comments tab that contains the comment you want to moderate If you know which Component or Page the comment was submitted to and where that Component or Page is located navigate to the Component or Page and open it then select the Comments tab If you know which Contact submitted the comment and in which Publication and Address Book to locate that Contact navigate to that Contact and open it then select the Comments tab You now see the Comments tab that contains the comment you want to moderate 2 Ifthe Comments tab shows many comments use the search function of your browser to locate the one you want to moderate Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 289 User Generated Content 3 Above the comment you want to moderate click Edit comment and do one of the following To approve the comment as is open the Status dropdown and select Published to Web site To modify the comment and then approve it edit the contents of the comment open the Status dropdown and select Publ
149. e e mails Define Contact details filter options using Filter operators on page 212 Note Extended details are configurable and implementation specific Define Categories and Keywords filters to filter Contacts on their assigned Keywords a Click Add b Browse to and select a Keyword c Click Insert d Repeat the procedure to add more Keywords e Click Close when you have finished adding Keywords f Toremove a Keyword select it click the Remove button Note The list of Keywords displayed does not reflect Keyword hierarchy the Keywords are displayed in a flat list You can use multiple Keywords from several Categories and in different Publications A Contact can also have multiple Keywords from the same Category for example 1f a Contact is both a Business Contact and a Consumer Contact both Keywords apply Note If a Category and Keyword in the list are both marked DELETED the Keyword has been deleted When you finished defining search criteria click the Search button Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 211 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail The list view shows a filtered list of Contacts whose details match the specified search criteria Sort the results by a specific Contact field by clicking on the corresponding column header Select a Contact and choose Open from the context menu to open the Contact for editing Select one or more Contacts
150. e examples require implementation on the Presentation Server Web site or in the templates used in your Mailings using the available Content Delivery APIs for Outbound E mail Creating a Triggered Mailing A triggered Mailing allows you to set up a mailing to send e mails in response to a specific event The event results in a Contact being added to the Distribution List specified in the triggered Mailing and this acts as the trigger to send a Mailing Before you begin To set up a Triggered Mailing you need Mailing Execution and Mailing Management rights and Write permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder You must have created and tested a Mailing Contacts are typically added to a Dynamic Distribution List when the Contact s Keywords are updated the mechanism that performs this update outside of the Content Management System requires implementation programming About this task The following example describes how to set up a Triggered Mailing for sending Welcome e mails when someone registers on your Web site Identify a Contact detail or create a new Keyword whose value you want to use as a filter for a Dynamic Distribution List for example create a new Keyword Classic Car Fair Create an empty dynamic Distribution List that uses this Contact Detail or Keyword for example create a new Dynamic Distribution List Classic Car Fair which filters Contacts on the Keyword Classic Car Fair Create a Mailing and specify
151. e left navigate to the Folder that contains the Bundle 2 Select the Bundle in the list view and in the Home tab of the Ribbon toolbar click Properties Result A dialog opens showing the properties of this Bundle 3 Examine the Bundle properties Name The name for the Bundle Description A description for the Bundle Bundle Type The type of Bundle determines whether your Bundle is subject to a Workflow Process and if so which Workflow Process Metadata Based on the Bundle type you may also see one or more metadata fields 4 Ifthe Bundle is associated with a Workflow Process Definition and is currently not in workflow you can start workflow on the Bundle by selecting Start Workflow Process in the Home tab Starting Workflow on a Bundle 106 Unlike other items Bundles do not enter a Workflow Process automatically in response to a trigger instead you must start workflow manually This topic explains how Starting workflow on a Bundle places all items in that Bundle in workflow Before you begin To be able to enter workflow a Bundle must meet the following requirements The Bundle must be based on a Bundle Schema that has an Associated Bundle Process configured in its Workflow tab The Bundle must either be empty or only contain items that can enter workflow that is Components Pages Component Templates Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Bundles Page Templates Template Build
152. e or more item types such as Component Keyword Schema and so on by selecting them in the list that appears Search will then only return items of the type s you select Select this option and select a Schema from the dropdown to limit your search to only items that are based on the Schema you select Select this option searches and pick a Workflow Process then optionally an Activity from the second dropdown to limit your search to only items that are currently in the selected Workflow Process and if selected Workflow Activity you selected Note that you can only find a new item that is in Workflow item after the Workflow Process is complete The completion of the Workflow Process checks in the item and makes it available for searching Select this item and select an item from the dropdown to limit your search to only items that are checked in or only items that are checked out By default search returns all matching results Select one of the predefined values 50 or 100 250 or 500 to see at most that many search results Content Manager Explorer remembers this setting as a user preference After you have completed a search select this option to create a Search Folder Refer to Search Folders on page 159 for detai Is 156 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Search Select this option to return all advanced search parameters to their default settings Search Select this option to execute
153. e outcome of which may cause it to be removed from the published Web page Associated Item Type Select Component to see comments that this Contact submitted for Components only and Page to see comments that this Contact submitted for Pages only Date Created Select a value to specify a time frame or no time frame within which this Contact submitted comments Select All to see comments submitted at any time Select Today to see comments submitted since midnight today Select This week to see comments submitted since Monday of the current week Select This month to see comments submitted since the 1st of the current month Select Select a date or date range to specify a start date and an end date and see comments submitted between those two dates inclusive When you have configured all your filters click Filter to see all comments that satisfy your filter Result The bottom half of the content area shows the filtered results If you want click Hide filter options to stop displaying all the filter controls You can perform the following tasks on individual comments Examining the properties of a comment Moderating a comment on page 289 Deleting a comment on page 290 Changing the appearance of comments on the published Web page on page 293 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 287 User Generated Content Ratings tab for a Contact Explains what the Ratings tab for a Contact s
154. e user or group can delete items for which they have rights Localize the user or group can create a local copy of a shared BluePrint items for which they have rights Exceptions exceptions override other permission settings and deny specified user or group read write localize and or delete permissions 5 Click the Save and Close button on the toolbar The Content Manager modifies the Folder settings 92 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 9 Structure Groups In a Publication you use Structure Groups to organize manage and provide a URL structure for Pages Each Structure Group represents a separate sub section of the resulting Web site You can add Pages to each level of a Structure Group and then publish either the entire Structure Group or parts of the Structure Group For example the following image depicts the Structure Group of a newspaper In this example the News Structure Group contains Careers Company Information News and Products Structure Groups Shortcuts Y Publications E9News Products a Content Management 4 5 JustAPub gt B9 News gt BB Products gt B9 Corporate gt B Contact Categories and Keywords b P User Generated Content b mychild You can also use Structure Groups to Manage user and group read write localize and delete permissions for nested items Pages and other Structure Groups Capture metadata using meta
155. e workflow properties of items that are subject to workflow Picking up a Workflow Activity assigned to your Group If a Workflow Activity is assigned to your Group a notification appears in the top right hand side of your screen You can also see all Workflow Activities assigned to your Group in the Things to do popup also accessible from the top right hand side of your screen You can look at the Activity s details and decide to pick it up Procedure 1 You can pick up a Workflow Activity assigned to your Group in one of the following ways Respond to a notification immediately when a notification appears with the message ITEM was assigned to your Group where 7 TEM is the name of an Activity click Show Activity A dialog opens with details about this Activity Respond to a notification later when a notification appears and then disappears with the message ITEM was assigned to you or ITEM was assigned to your Group where ITEM is the name of an Activity click the notifications area to see it again then click Show Activity A dialog opens with details about this Activity Check Assigned Activities click the Workflow area at top right and in the dialog that opens click Assigned to see a list of all Activities assigned to you or your Group that are not yet picked up Select an Activity to see its details You can now click Start Activity to take ownership and start working on the Activity Result The Activity is added
156. earch Folder Security Search Folders do not have security settings Read Write Localize Delete instead the Folder that contains the actual items determines the security on the items in a Search Folder This means that different Content Manager users may view different content in a Search Folder based on their own user rights and permissions At a Publication level a user must have Virtual Folder Management permissions to create edit or delete a Search Folder Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 163 Search Folders 164 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 18 Translation Manager Translation Manager allows you to send content stored in the Content Manager of SDL Tridion for translation to a translation management system so that you can effectively and efficiently create and maintain multilingual content Translation Manager is the integration between Content Manager of SDL Tridion manages Web content controls user access to content and re purposes content via BluePrinting SDL Translation Management System SDL TMS SDL WorldServer or SDL BeGlobal manages the translation process enforces terminology and performs translations based on a knowledge base of previous translations called a translation memory The following diagram provides an overview of the functionality provided by the integration Translations and BluePrinting To manage translations in the Content Manager you need
157. ecbiems Mesie rorgie Lesin Prngieg 350 COM is Subechibed tre zecbiwema Maden S nfeland Adem Sucdertan de TUTO LA F OL1A EN TXONAEMTNT Sanscn tes fus prcbiera aas vesey Vector Vesey IGIEMENS COM SIEMENS Subecnted feo soven Beery Grans eha Java Grori SGALLAMER GALLANER Sasecntes feo srsti UO one Baber Lasia ReberSTIMPERIAL TORAIMP RAIA TORATCO Subscntes ho gestieme ED ernatte Aste Darrella Ante d SALA Bane Pn BANE Subecrbed two grottene Widen Lamui e Deum Ravcatie rp TJACCOR COFACCOR Suez ritas fes protien Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 197 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Outbound E mail icons The Outbound E mail node Wa contains the following items Outbound E mail Folders are used to organize Mailings and Distribution Lists A Distribution List defines the recipients of a Mailing A Mailing combines Content an E mail Page and Contacts Distribution Lists At Publication level the E mail Campaigns node can contain the following items E Mail An E mail Campaign allows you to group Mailings to Campaign coordinate the sending and testing of Mailings across Publications and or to group a series of related Mailings that comprise a campaign together Content Manager Explorer interface Your interface to Outbound E mail is the Content Manager Explorer The following image shows the top level nodes in a Publication Opinas Vanaye 2 Pu m nail 3 CONTENT MANAGEMENT
158. ece eee nett III 6 Additional features and functionality 6 Configuring your browser 2 eee cent een nent eee nn nne ees 7 Configuring your Web browser for Content Manager Explorer 000000 8 Recommended system display properties 10 Content Manager Explorer troubleshooting reference 0 000 e eee eee 11 2 Content Manager Explorer dascscesictescetaiiitecsuwansedeneusdsiviexdevent 13 Content Manager Explorer Ribbon 0 cece eee eee nett eees 14 RibDOM TADS CP 14 Ribbon Controls 2a asecadaretaevansbaciaigedeeditsedeiseanisterduauanes 16 Breadcrumb trail 4 34 4 23 6224cbnrccieoereieenigerbietesddrads bbe CERE PII 20 Info Bar hscesevorg reti E Pecans Ula reas ie wea ded niet iq is 21 Slide olltmavigation 222 nadie Hote ea da dba 4d T RRRECERE CDM eR Edd seii 21 Slide out navigation Home screen 6600s 21 Slide out navigation Activities screen 6 eee eee eee eee eens 21 Slide out navigation Help screen 0 cece cece eee eee eens 22 Slide out navigation Sites screen 23 Slide out navigation Editing Site option 6 eee eee eee eee 23 Slide out navigation Content Explorer option 0 000 c cece ee eens 23 Slide out navigation Control Room sereen 0 eee eee eee eee eee 23 Slide out navigation Settings screen 25 Slide out navigation About screen 6 00 e eens 25 Content Manager Explorer options 0 cece eee eee eens
159. econd option and click OK Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 139 Versioning Select a rollback option c Create a new version that is a copy of version 3 no versions are deleted Delete all the versions created after version 3 Some important information may be lost Rollback Cancel Results You have rolled back to a previous version of an item Note If the item has an associated Workflow rolling back to the item may start a Workflow Process depending on the configuration of the Content Manager Deleting a version You can delete one or more versions from the Version History list but you cannot delete the last version or the current version of an item Before you begin To delete an item you must have rights for the item you want to delete and you must have delete permissions for the Folder or Structure Group in which the item is stored Procedure 1 Access the Version History List 2 Inthe Version History List select the version or versions you want to delete 3 Right click the version and in the context menu that opens select Delete Results You have deleted a version of an item 140 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Versioning Check in and check out Check out allows users to lock an item so that it cannot be edited by anyone other than the user who checked it out You can check out and check in an item implicitly or explicitly When you implicitly or
160. ect Multi part to send a multi part e mail A multi part e mail appears as HTML if the recipient has an e mail application that supports HTML otherwise it appears as plain text If you chose to send the test Mailing to All members of a Distribution List a Select a Distribution List from the list b Click OK c Click Test Note A warning message is displayed if the selected Distribution List contains more than 100 Contacts or none In Profiling you can test what the e mail looks like to a member of a specific Target Group Note By default the Profile an unpersonalized e mail option is selected in which case a generic all inclusive e mail message is sent Select the Profile the e mail with a selection of Target Groups option b Select one or more Target Groups from the list use the Shift key to select multiple adjacent Target Groups and the Ctrl key to select multiple non adjacent Target Groups 258 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail c Select Include the Target Group selection in the e mail subject if you want the subject of the e mail message to contain text specifying the Target Group or Target Groups for whom this e mail message is intended 8 Click Test 9 Review the sent e mail Results The Mailing is now tested and this is indicated by the icon which changes from EA toS If you chose to test the Mailing by sending it to specific e mail add
161. ected by BluePrinting 00 eee e eens 43 Blu ePrmnt example vote Ere hae eg RI EEE Danae wale 44 Localizing or unlocalizing items 0 0 Ie 44 Whereus d 4 ccver odin aed waa dase e EOE EOE seer TAE TEA 45 BluePrint Viewer scriverei TE REP Mesa RATE deint ine aE wp E oes da puit 46 A Components seeeerieseeo idest iesu dora eps tulis EO EEr EE EEE 49 Cr ating a Component i 4 sese renna a RE Rx ER ea eg te 50 Editing a Component a E a e EE EE n 51 5 Component field types scdisisrcscccdsebcaastcisosakiavatenaddaavetashanaenes 53 Fi ld GlardeferistoS uuo 2er d Ced de reae d dicere vd ded e a 55 Simple text fields prenesse raset Ue Gicias wands Gene bea EHE RU RU eden EDENES 56 Number fields 2 25 srRec iE RO REEERERRERRPUF RE VERESEG EEE ERE eve PIX PE TTEEE 56 Ru ap seth co yk ani Ne ahah bah Soke Renn Godan Gen aca he aaah al dea E 56 External nk elds 5 5 c pede edd ect reves bd er PE CH pO He eed d redde prid 57 Multimedia link fields and Component link fields oleis 58 Bs ooo e chia wered hase Meso ASS Reed ey en eebdaves ones Seekes 59 F rmatarsa fields fa nig craks erti reek shah EEA EAA eA E EA iw A E te 59 Format area field controls 61 Inserting hyperlinks in a format area 6 ene ees 66 Inserting an image in a format area 67 Selecting fonts in a format area 2 neb ese EEEE DEE a 68 Formatting tables in a Format Area 2 eect eens 69 Inserting a table in a format area 2 nee eee e
162. ed to child Keywords when created allowing you to define metadata note that you may select a different Metadata Schema Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 121 Metadata and Keywords Metadata Schema I MDO1 M Author Topic Note For more information on defining taxonomies see the implementer s documentation portal Results To define metadata fields using Keywords see Adding Keywords to fields on page 122 Adding Keywords to fields You use Keywords to classify your content Keywords define a classification scheme visualized as a taxonomy tree that provides a knowledge map of your data Applying these Keywords to Component fields or metadata fields allows you to define relationships between content Before you begin You can select the value for a field from a list of Keywords if the Schema field is associated with a Category For more information on defining Schemas and Taxonomies Categories and Keywords see the implementer s documentation portal About this task The allowed fields in a Component or the allowed Metadata fields in various Content Manager items are defined in a Schema When you create a Component for example you must first select a Schema after which the fields defined in the Schema are displayed for that Component If a Schema field is defined as a list field based on a Category you can choose one or more values from a list of Keywords A list field may be presented
163. ed to initiate translations and who has access permissions to the Publication which is a target or potential target of translated content can modify the Translation Job so long as it is in the Definition state It is therefore important to realize that the initiator of a Translation Job does not have sole ownership 180 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager Creating a Translation Job for SDL BeGlobal Select one or more items you want to send for translation and choose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu to add these to a new or existing Translation Job Before you begin To create a Translation Job you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication or Publications that is a target for the translated content Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select one or more translatable items in a configured Publication and choose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu Result The Translation Job dialog appears 3 Specify how to send the items to translation Select Create New Translation Job and click OK Select Add to existing Translation Job select one of the open Translation Jobs from the list and click OK Note The From To column indicates whether you are creating a Translation Job from a Source Publication From or from a Target Publication To 4 Select one or more translatable items in a configured Publication and ch
164. eed to authorize the Translation Job and the cost involved before it is sent for translation 3 Sending for Translation The Translation Job is being processed for transferral to the translation management system In the Sending for Translation stage the Translation Manager Service retrieves Translation Jobs ready for translation from the Translation Manager and does the following localizes and checks out the Content Manager items in the relevant Target Publications splits the Translation Job into one or more jobs depending on settings in the Translation Manager configuration file sends the jobs and source content to the translation management system when polled the translation management system polls the Translation Manager Service at configured intervals to check for translations waiting for transferral Sets the job status to In Translation unless an error occurs in one of the previous steps in which case the job status is set to Error sending and the process is stopped If errors are encountered while processing the Translation Job for transferral to the translation management system the status is set to Error sending You can view details of the errors in the Translation Job Error tab If you delete a Translation Job in Error sending state the state is set to Deleting while the Translation Job 1s being processed for deletion 4 In Translation The Translation Job is being processed in the translation management s
165. eed to select Translate item options in a Publication if you want to allow these properties to be sent for translation For Component Name you need to select an option in the Component Schema Multimedia Component and ECL translation restrictions The following restrictions apply to Multimedia Components Translation of Multimedia Component metadata is only supported for translation management systems that support ITS Only the name and metadata of a Multimedia Component is sent for translation not the binary content Only SDL Tridion metadata is sent for External Content Library ECL Multimedia Components You cannot add ECL Multimedia Components directly to a Translation Job you need to add them to a Page or a Bundle and send that for translation Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 173 Translation Manager Recursive content Recursive items are translatable Content Manager items that can contain nested items The following items can include nested items in a Translation Job Folders contain Components and nested Folders Structure Groups contain Pages and nested Structure Groups Pages contain Components Categories contain Keywords which can contain nested Keywords Bundles and Virtual Folders can contain all of the above The following image shows these items and nested items Fublicationa 4 encusy Articles a BB Building Blocks Nama Type BW Artcles Donsemss gift to hospital Componere B9 Def
166. efer to the version numbers shown when you submit a problem or question to SDL Customer Support The screen shows the version of the Content Manager Explorer user interface the version of the Experience Manager user interface the version of the underlying Content Manager system the update version indicating which product update is running SDL periodically releases product updates Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 25 Content Manager Explorer Content Manager Explorer options 26 The Content Manager Explorer options bar allows you to set your Content Manager Explorer user preferences access the User Manual online e mail a link to a Content Manager item add a Content Manager item to your favorites and create shortcuts to Content Manager items Setting your user preferences Use the Info Bar at top right to configure your personal preferences user interface language and regional settings locale Procedure 1 To change your user interface language click on your name or profile picture at the top right part of the screen and in the dialog that opens select your preferred language from the Language dropdown The change is applied when you click elsewhere on the screen 2 To change your regional settings such as how dates numbers and currencies are displayed click on your name or profile picture at the top right part of the screen and in the dialog that opens select your preferred language and country f
167. eferences and interests which you can then use to create Dynamic Distribution Lists and define Target Groups categories of users to match Component Presentations to these Target Groups 3 Mailings combine Contacts and Content You can also Personalize a Mailing by adding personal details to the e mail and tailoring the contents of an e mail message to specific categories of users Use Merge Fields in template code or other text fields to indicate where Outbound E mail should insert Contact specific information such as name and surname Use Target Groups to define categories of users mail recipients which you can then use to include or exclude certain parts of a Mailing Component Presentations on an E mail Page to Target Groups allows you to personalize the content of the Mailing to suit the Contact s profile different versions of the same Mailing are sent to different Contacts Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 195 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail 4 An E mail Campaign allows you to coordinate a Mailing campaign by grouping several Mailings together and testing and sending them in one go You can add Mailings from multiple Publications in an E mail Campaign An E mail Campaign allows you to Coordinate the sending of a single e mail across multiple Publications Coordinate the sending of a series of e mails consisting of for example a Start Mailing Scheduled Mailing Triggered Mailing and Reminder Mailing
168. efore the ing the words pizza car but not pasta operator but not the search terms after the operator 152 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Search Operator Function Example Searches for items that have the car IN title returns items containing search terms in the specified the word car in the title XML element IN field XML element You can search for an exact phrase simply by typing the phrase you are looking for enclosed in quotes For example if you want to search for items that contain the exact phrase press release enter press release This will not match the content We will initially release the product to the press but it will match More information in our latest press release Search wildcards You can use wildcards to define a wildcard string which can be used to locate related word matches The following table describes the wildcards you can use Character Function Example Searches for items that corp returns items containing cor contain the entered text porate corporation corporal and allowing for any number of corpulent characters to replace the wildcard Searches for items that an returns items containing ran contain the entered text pan can and ban allowing one character to replace the wildcard Special characters and reserved words The Content Manager views special characters as separators and not as part of a word When it performs
169. elderland gt Q Limburg Q North Holland 4 Q Overijssel Deventer Q Zutphen g Zwolle Q South Holland Q Utrecht gt g Spain Note Categories or Keywords are usually created in a parent Publication by an implementor and inherited down the BluePrint hierarchy In other words you do not normally create Categories and Keywords as these are created for you A possible exception is if you import a file with Contacts that you only want to use within a specific Publication and these Contacts use different Categories and Keywords from those of your regular Contacts because you obtained them from an external source Managing Mailings Mailings combine content the e mail with Contacts the recipients of a Mailing Managing Mailings involves performing the following tasks Create a Mailing Personalize a Mailing using Merge Fields and Target Groups Create an E mail Campaign Test a Mailing before sending it out Send a Mailing immediately or at a scheduled time Trigger a Mailing sending an e mail as a response to a specific event Clearing the e mail queue 250 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Managing Mailings Create Create Personalize Select Select Mailing Mailing Mailing Distribution Address Lists Books gt A Mergefialds gt i aA QM n Add to Test Send Clear E Mail Mailing Mailing Mailing Campaign Queue gt gt gt Kev To receive o
170. elect Unpublish content later and use the calendar to pick a date and time Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 131 Publishing 3 To see which items the Content Manager will unpublish click the expand button next to Show items to unpublish The dialog enlarges to reveal the items you selected as well as any items that depend on it 4 Ifyou want to configure advanced unpublishing settings click Advanced The Advanced tab appears For more information see Advanced Publishing options on page 130 5 Click OK to start the unpublishing process Results The content is unpublished Important After you click OK Content Manager will remember all your Unpublish dialog settings for the remainder of this session This means that next time you open the Unpublish dialog it shows all the settings as you configured them the previous time When you close your main Content Manager browser window all the Unpublish dialog settings are restored to their default values Viewing the publish queue The Publish Queue lists all publish transactions that users have scheduled for publishing actions publish or unpublish and publish transactions that have been successfully published and those that have failed You can filter the items shown in the Publishing Queue or view individual publish transactions Before you begin To view the publish queue you must have Publish rights for at least one Publication About this task
171. ely identify individual Contacts The procedure for changing and configuring contact identification fields and Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 215 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail adding Contact Extended Details executed by a Database Administrator is described in the implementation documentation Specifying default mapping In the ContactDetails section of the configuration file OutboundEmail xml you must specify extended detail fields for Contacts These fields reflect the extended details as defined in Audience Manager databases To provide default mapping specify the same column names in the file as those specified for the extended detail fields For more information about configuration see the SDL Tridion Installation Manual In addition to the extended detail fields Contacts also come with a fixed set of fields for each Contact which are assigned default values if not mapped You can ensure that the mapping works by default by creating columns with the names in the following table Field Possible values Default value SUBSCRIBE_STATUS_TD 1 Unsubscribed 2 Subscribed 3 Opted In 1 Html 2 Text 3 Multipart BOUNCE_STATUS_ID 1 No problems 2 Temporary problems 3 Persistent problems GROUP_KEYVALUE File formatting The following table describes how the data may be formatted in your Contact import f
172. em from the appropriate WebDAV folder to a local folder using Windows Explorer Edit the item locally then either save it locally and drag and drop it into the WebDAV folder or save it directly to the WebDAV folder using the Save As functionality of your application Viewing items To view an item without checking it out in Content Manager you must open the item in read only mode in an external application if the external application allows you to do so Renaming items If authorized you can rename any type of item displayed in the WebDAV server folder tree from an external application using WebDAV Deleting items If authorized you can delete any type of item displayed in the WebDAV server folder tree except Publications from an external application using WebDAV Cutting copying and pasting items If authorized you can use copy and paste to copy items between the Folders within a Publication but not across Publications In Windows Explorer use the context menu or the Edit menu to select the necessary copy and paste options Although copy paste always works cut paste raises an error Cannot read from source So to perform a cut paste that is to move an item perform a copy paste then delete the item in the old location This preserves the version history of your item Better yet you can avoid all complications by performing these kinds of operations in the Content Manager Explorer Checking items in and checking items o
173. ember 27 2013 7 15 24 AM Modfied Monday Septernber 30 2013 2 52 52 AM vernon 3 0 Approval Status Undefined Publish Status Not Published Lock Type Check out Locked by WF W2COS Administrator Locked Since Monday September 30 2013 3 07 51 AM 2 In the Content Manager Explorer enter the Content Manager URI in the Search for URI field displayed in the toolbar Search Building Blocks tcm 22 1027 v Modified Search 9 23 2013 9 05 AM 3 Click the magnifying glass button to search for the item Results If the URI refers to a container such as a Publication Folder Structure Group or Category the main view tree navigates to that container s node and the content area shows its contents Otherwise the Content Manager item opens in a new window Search operators You can use operators to expand or narrow your search The following table describes the search operators Operator OR NOT Function Example Searches for items containing tortellini AND guacamole returns both the search terms If no items containing both the words tortellini operator is used between and guacamole in any order and with any words AND is assumed words in between car OR park returns items containing Searches for items containing the words car or park either or both of the search terms Searches for items containing pizza NOT pasta returns items contain the search terms b
174. en you have selected a Mailing response status do one of the following Click Export Contacts in the toolbar to export all the recipients to whom the selected Mailing status applies for all Distribution Lists in the Mailing Select one Distribution List and click View Contacts to further refine the list of recipients who you want to export and to whom the selected Mailing status applies see step 4 4 When you select a Distribution List and click View Contacts the Distribution List details shows the Contacts in this Distribution List to whom the selected Mailing status applies a Define search criteria and click Search for more information see Searching Contacts on page 209 b Click the Export Contacts for more information see Exporting Contacts on page 226 Results The export file is saved to the location on your file system specified Outbound E mail creates columns and rows of data in the export file The columns have the same names as the corresponding Contact Details and each row in the export file stores data for a Contact Viewing Contact details and Mailing details You can go through the Mailing Status to see what a Mailing looked like to a specific Contact personalization Before you begin To view Mailing statistics you need Mailing Execution or Mailing Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder 274 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Out
175. ence Manager and Outbound E mail C Click Save d Add a Mailing to an E mail Campaign by clicking Add then navigate to and select a Mailing and click OK 3 Alternatively create a new E mail Campaign as follows a b d Select a Mailing and click the Add to E mail Campaign icon in the toolbar or choose Add to E mail Campaign in the context menu Select the option New E mail Campaign Enter a unique Name and optionally a Description Click OK to create an E mail Campaign and add the selected Mailing to it 4 When you select Add Mailings to E mail Campaign you can choose to create a new E mail Campaign as described above or add the Mailing to an existing E mail Campaign Select Existing E mail Campaigns Select an E mail Campaign from the list and click OK Open the E mail Campaign in the Shortcuts view select the E mail Campaigns node select the E mail Campaign in the list view and choose Open in the context menu 5 Inthe E mail Campaign General tab you can view the included Mailings and perform the following actions Move up and Move down arranges the list order of the Mailings displayed in the E mail Campaign usually you will want to display Mailings in a chronological order although the order in which e mails themselves are sent depends on the priority of each Distribution List in an individual Mailing Open opens selected Mailings Go to goes to the Folder location of the selected Mailin
176. enting the moment at which a User picked up the Activity Time Spent Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 109 Bundles If the Activity has a Finished state the amount of time that has passed from the moment the Activity was first assigned to the moment a User finished the Activity Finished on If the Activity has a Finished state a timestamp representing the moment at which a User finished the Activity State Only if the Activity failed or was suspended its state State Message Only if the Activity failed or was suspended the reason for this failure or suspension Previous Activity Message A message provided by the User who finished the previous Activity in this Workflow Process typically intended as instructions to the current Owner The Related Items area shows the list of items associated with the current Activity If you select an item you can do the following Preview Preview the item in a new dialog Open Open the item for editing in a new dialog Compare If you also select two Activities from the History of Activities list Compare shows you how the selected item changed between those two Activities This button is disabled if Content Manager is not configured to save snapshots of the item you selected 110 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 11 Workflow This section explains how to pick up start perform and finish Workflow Activities how to create a Task and how to check th
177. ents Page Templates Component Templates and Template Building Blocks from an external application that uses WebDAV Before you begin Depending on the type of item you want to open WebDAV imposes some additional restrictions Components After you have edited it the Component must remain valid against its SDL Tridion Schema If your Component contains Component links fields or Multimedia Component link fields these fields must contain the WebDAV URL of the target item Any mandatory data or metadata fields must have a default value set in the Schema Any Component you create must be based on an SDL Tridion Schema that is located in the Publication in which you intend to save the Component Multimedia Components The Publication in which you intend to create Multimedia Components must contain a Multimedia Schema that supports the binary type of the item you are creating You cannot edit the metadata of a Multimedia Component any mandatory metadata fields must have a default value set in the Schema About this task Note You cannot edit an item if another user has checked it out or if it is assigned to another user through Workflow Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 301 WebDAV Connector Procedure 1 Use your external application s Open functionality typically located in the File menu of your application to directly open it from the WebDAV folder location 2 Alternatively drag and drop the it
178. eparator Specifies how rows are separated carriage return Note The import automatically detects a line feed the row separator used carriage return line feed pair Importing Keywords Keywords are properties of a Contact defining Contact s preferences and interests A Contact may have multiple Keywords from one or more Categories You can import Keywords contained in a file and add them to Contacts Before you begin To import Keywords into Contacts you need Contact Management rights and Write permissions for the Address Book Category Management rights and Write permissions for the destination Category if creating Keywords To import Keywords into Contacts contained in the All Contacts node or in any Address Book in System Administration you need System Administrator rights You need to know the formatting used in the import file For more information see Creating the Keyword import file on page 221 About this task The import allows you to do specify one of the following scenarios 222 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Add new Keywords to a Category and add these Keywords to a Contact Add new Keywords to a Category and add these Keywords to a Contact overwriting the Contact s current Keywords Add existing Keywords to a Contact Add existing Keywords to a Contact overwriting the Contact s current Keywords The import file contains rows of data
179. es Row Yes Column Yes Cell Yes Border size The size of the table border To remove the table border set the size to 0 Table Yes Row No Column No Cell No Border style The style of the table border Table Yes Row No Column No Cell No Border color The color of the border Select Custom color to select a color other than the listed colors Table Yes Row No Column No Cell No Background color The background color of the table row column or cell Select Custom color to select a color other than the listed colors 72 Table Yes Row Yes Column Yes Cell Yes Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Component field types Style If the SDL Tridion system administrator has predefined styles for your system you can select a predefined style for the table row column or cell Table Yes Row No Column No a Cell No Body Header Footer This is a row setting that allows you to apply a body header or footer setting to a row in the table Table No a Row Yes a Column No Cell No Vertical alignment The vertical alignment of the contents of a column row or cell top middle bottom Table No Row Yes Column Yes Cell Yes Type of information Select the type of information contained in the selected cell s Header is for heading text Data is for content Table No Row No Column No Cell Yes ID If the Type of infor
180. es 69 Editing the formatting of an existing table 69 Adding content toa table 2 0 0 0 ccc cece cence cee eee ree 70 Table properties and formatting 0 cece eee I 70 Applying formatting to table cells rows or columns 0000 eee eee 74 Inserting and removing rows and columns froma table 00000 76 Merging and splitting cells in a table 0 e eee ees 76 6 Multimedia Components icauax suoi Ua EU rRA TELE Ea aa ucc TT Default Multimedia Types eios cie cis ber ed RR PESEE EERE E C A a s 78 Creating a Multimedia Component sssssesessessee eee i eens 79 Editing a Multimedia Component ss erri resres e n 80 Viewing the contents of a Multimedia Component 0 0 82 IV Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual L Pagos seoti e ne ccateuet accent E 83 Creating a Pape nemi pte eE E iby a d E E EE ER 83 Editing Page 4 hae nee aioe te o eek sr ptor E utor dd dre Eales ie 86 Previewing Page 2 2 tiei t Rep ERES C P EHE ERR ERR AREE RE 87 Publishing a Page orrir enera t a er PEE da Ra ERR re RR ERAT FEAR DESa Par 88 8 Folders asia cee aie caine NIE bUN PUO s PE cseneonacieve 89 Folder settings ole ber eR REPE RRPICERPOV Sae ee eA DEUM ER A Edda 89 Creating a Folder i hei bee Gch ERRORES E RAE EUR OREN ES RE Idee 90 Editing a Folder 22 e Dr pad Re Ped RAE RA UE qu 9 9 JSIUHCUFIe GlOUDS isere nines cede EEEE EEEE OSANG EN Ende 93 Structure Group settings
181. esults The content is published republished Important After you click OK Content Manager remembers all your Unpublish dialog settings for the remainder of your browser session when you close the main Content Manager browser window all the Unpublish dialog settings are restored to their default values The Content Manager does however remember the Target Types selected when you last published content and your Publish settings from your previous session Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 129 Publishing Advanced Publishing options The Advanced Publishing options provide you greater control over what and how content is published Publish Unpublish Scope Publish Unpublish Content Items default this is the default behavior Ignore failures while generating publishable content to publish content the Content Manager performs two steps It generates publishable content a process known as rendering It sends the publishable content to the various publish destinations When you publish multiple items in one go then by default the Content Manager considers the rendering of these items as one closed operation which fails if any of its parts fails For example if you publish a Structure Group containing ten Pages and one of those Pages fails to render nothing gets rendered This is not always what you want For example your Structure Group may contain a Page that you know contains a mistake but you may s
182. et Items in a Bundle may be subject to workflow but may at the same time not be in a Workflow Process yet Opening such an item checks it out to you and locks it in your name Saving it with or without closing it increases its minor version Closing it puts it in a reserved state that is it is still checked out but locked by no user Explicitly checking out an item that is subject to workflow but has not started its Workflow Process yet Items in a Bundle may be subject to workflow but may at the same time not be in a Workflow Process yet Explicitly checking out such an item locks it in your name Saving it with or without closing it increase its minor version Explicitly checking it back in puts it in a reserved state that is it is checked out but locked by no user Starting workflow on a single item by creating it or editing it after the previous Workflow Process has finished A user can start workflow on an item by creating or reediting the item if it is subject to a single item Workflow Process This action does not change the major or minor version of the item in any way but it does check the item out to the user who created or reedited it and locks it Starting workflow on an item that is part of a Bundle A user can start workflow on an item in a Bundle by putting the Bundle that contains it into workflow if the Bundle is subject to a Bundle Workflow Process This action does not change the major or minor version of the i
183. etadata to Component Templates Page Templates and Template Building Blocks Keywords Keywords A Category is a general classification and a Keyword is a value in a Category Keywords define a classification scheme a taxonomy tree that provide a knowledge map of your data You can apply Keywords to the following content Component fields Metadata fields Note that Publications cannot be classified and do not appear as Related Items The following image shows how Categories and Keywords are used to define Component fields and Metadata fields Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 119 Metadata and Keywords Define Component fields and Categories and m Metadata Fields Keywords Ie Source Werk View fate Eu Nomea Nea Component Catmge Schema B so on n Sport ries ond Keywords Adro Oaverter Favonbe Spoct Badmeton Rugby Cyng Fooien Rugby Terns Badminton Defining metadata You can add metadata to Components and Multimedia Components Publications Folders and Virtual Folders Structure Groups and Pages and Categories and Keywords Before you begin To allow users to add metadata to Components and Multimedia Components the Component Schema or Multimedia Schema must have metadata fields defined To allow users to add metadata to Publications Folders and Virtual Folders Structure Groups Pages and Keywords you must have defined a Metadata Schema Note
184. ete a status message is displayed at the bottom of the Import Keywords screen Click the log file link to view the import log files Click Close to exit the import dialog Results Depending on the options selected Keywords are added to Categories in the specified Publication and or to Contacts Each row in the import file is evaluated and resolved individually Keywords are not imported in the following circumstances if you did not select the option Create new Keywords ifa row in the import file does not specify a Keyword the field is empty Ifyou have mapped a column in the import file to a Publication and the Publication does not exist or you do not have access permissions for the Publication Ifyou have mapped a column in the import file to a Category and the Category does not exist or you do not have Category Management rights and write permissions for the Category Keywords are not added to Contacts in the following circumstances ifthe import file specifies Contacts that do not exist or are not in the selected Address Book if you did not select the option Create new Keywords and the Keyword does not exist if the Contact already contains the Keyword Adding or removing Keywords to or from Contacts can add or remove the Contact from Dynamic Distribution Lists whose definition is based on Keywords Exporting Contacts and Keywords When visitors of your Web site register themselves or change their Contact
185. etrieving a Translation Job it must be in the Error retrieving state and you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication that is a target for the translated content About this task When errors occur during the In Translation state while the Translation Jobs are being received by the Content Manager Translation Manager sets the state of the Translation Job to Error retrieving Retrieve errors can be global errors concerning the Translation Job on the Content Manager or the equivalent jobs on the translation management system or validation errors concerning individual Content Manager items The Translation Manager automatically tries to retrieve individual items that have failed every 24 hours or you can manually force the process using the Retry retrieving option Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select the Translation Jobs node in the Shortcuts navigation pane 3 Select a Translation Job from the list and choose Open from the context menu 4 Click the Error tab Details are displayed in the Error Details section 5 Fix the errors for example Translation Manager Job ID The translation management system Job ID Content Manager item ID 6 Inthe Translation Jobs node select a Translation Job in the Error retrieving state and choose Retry retrieving from the context menu Results You have forced the Translation Manager to retry retrieving each individual item tha
186. explicitly check out an item the item is locked and appears in your Checked out Items Only you can edit the item while it is checked out When you check in an item It then becomes available to other users again If you publish an item only the current related items Page Component Page Template Component Template are published That is if items are checked out only the last checked in item the Current item is published Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 141 Versioning Opening an item that is not subject to workflow If you open and modify an item the item is checked out to you and locked while you modify it Every time you save the item without closing it you increase its minor version number for example from 6 0 to 6 1 When you eventually close the item the system unlocks it and checks it back in increasing its major version number for example from 6 0 to 7 0 Explicitly checking out an item that is not subject to workflow If you explicitly check out an item the item is checked out to you and locked until you explicitly check it back in Every time you save the item whether you close the item or not you increase its minor version number for example from 6 0 to 6 1 When you eventually explicitly check the item back in the system unlocks it and its major version number increases for example from 6 0 to 7 0 Opening an item that is subject to workflow but has not started its Workflow Process y
187. ext menu Managing Distribution Lists A Distribution List is a list of Contacts that define the recipients of a Mailing When you create a Mailing you need to specify Distribution Lists and Address Books to receive a Mailing a Contact must be in a selected Distribution List and Address Book Managing Distribution Lists describes how to perform the following tasks Create Static Distribution Lists contains a fixed list of Contacts to send a mail to Create Dynamic Distribution Lists contains a dynamic list of Contacts to send a mail to The list changes dynamically when you modify the filters that define the Distribution List or when a Contact s characteristics interests or preferences change Note You can explore the response to a Mailing and turn a selection of Contacts into a Distribution List For more information see Viewing Distribution List statistics on page 271 234 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Managing Contacts Menege Deectiv ate Contacts Be ove Contacts n e i Scarch Managc Contacts Distribution Am a an NE Distribution List Distribution Lists Audience Manager and Outbound E mail E epot feet II CTE n Q d View Contact statisti o n A Distribution List contains a list of Contacts that define the recipients of a Mailing You can create Static or Dynamic Distribution Lists Static Distribution List A Static Distribution List c
188. f 1024x768 or higher 9 Close the dialog 10 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Getting started Content Manager Explorer troubleshooting reference This troubleshooting section describes how to fix the most common problems with the Content Manager Explorer Problem Accessing the GUI pops up an error with Object required in the Details area One of the following happens Right clicking pops up an error with Object does not support this property or method in the Details area Trying to open a dropdown list results in a series of JavaScript errors Diagnosis Your browser is using a pop up blocker such as the one included in the Google Toolbar Your browser settings are incorrect Action Disable pop up blocker s for the Content Manager Explorer Web site Configure your browser as instructed Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 11 Getting started 12 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 2 Content Manager Explorer The Content Manager Explorer is the interface to the Content Manager This section describes the main navigation areas within the Content Manager Explorer 5 Browser on page 7 Address bar Content Manager Explorer window Ribbon on page 14 5 Navigation pane on page 28 List view on page 29 mL og m od YS pecu Edit window on page 35 O caman recuperar C A bus 2006 ms dev t i O If um D Crisi D
189. f the User who implicitly or explicitly checked it out Checked out Items CONTENT MANAGEMENT Checked out Items Shortcuts Name 9 gt WW Favorites 4 Custom Pages SDL Tridion 2013 Checked out Items m P Leer Generated Content Checking out an item Anew Component New Template Building Block Mesdfgdgdgfgsggd MMNewkKWSchema You can check out a checked in item for your exclusive use Before you begin To check out an item you must have rights for the item and write permissions It is not possible to check out an item that is in Workflow that is already checked out or that is a shared item Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 143 Versioning Procedure 1 To check out an item access the Folder or Structure Group in which the item is stored 2 Select the item you want to check out and in the Home tab of the Ribbon click Check out Results The item is checked out Only the user to whom the item is checked out can edit the item While an item is checked out all items that use the item do not use the checked out version Instead the last checked in version is used If an item is checked out through Workflow the in workflow version can be published only if it meets minimum approval status When an item is checked out it is not possible to perform the following actions on the item Delete Cut amp paste Unlocalize the item if it is a local copy
190. flow Process which last assigned the Approval Status you see to the item If the Workflow tab shows a History of Activites area in the top half and an Activity Details area in the bottom half then the item is subject to workflow and currently in a Workflow Process You see the following 116 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Workflow History of Activities A list of the Activities of this Process If the item has already gone through and finished a Workflow Process in the past you see a dropdown from which you can select previous finished Workflow Processes The History of Activities area shows the following properties per Activity lt Icon gt If the icon shows a green checkmark the Activity has finished if not it has not finished yet Name The name of the Activity preceded by a number of indicate which step in the Process this is The number is useful to distinguish say a first review Activity from a second review Activity Owner The User currently performing the Activity If this is empty the item has been assigned but not picked up yet Assigned To The Group or User to whom this Activity is or was assigned Approval Status The Approval Status of the item after this Activity has finished Activity lt number gt lt name of Activity gt This area shows the properties of the currently selected Activity The area label is the word Activity followed by a number to indicate which step in the Pr
191. following image shows a context menu for a Component Building Blocks gt I Name u Type E Default Templates Folder AsoL Tridion 2013 SP1 Leaflet Component Asp Tridion Newsl nent 7 Open BR Open with WebDAV BluePrinting gt B Publishing gt e Send Item Link gt 5 History Fa Preview R Compare Copy Eb Gx amp Add to a Bundle fm Where Used New gt Classification gt Q Refresh The following image shows a context menu for a Folder Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer b Q 01_French b ad 02_England 4 S 02_France B3 Buildi gt B9 Root gt B catege EZ Go to Location gt SF User G BluePrinting gt b a 02_Germ Send Item Link gt o2Englan Start Location gt b O02France x gt 02Germai b ES 03 Belgial b Qo Belgial 2 gt 03 Dutch i gt 03 Dutch EP Add to a Bundle gt 03 Germa Properties P o 03 Germa Where Used gt BA local New gt gt BB localize a Classification gt gt BP2 Left n S c Refresh Working with multiple items displayed in the list view You can perform some actions on more than one item at a time Procedure 1 To perform an action on multiple items in the list view select the items you want to work with To select non sequential items press Ctrl and then click on each item individually 2 Do one of the following Click a Ribbon icon Rig
192. formatting see Creating the Contact import file on page 215 In Step 2 Select a file to import Click the Load from disk button b Inthe File Upload dialog navigate to the drive and folder that contains the file you want to import into the Address Book then select the file and click Open c Click OK to confirm the selection Important The import loads the first row of the import file defining the column names using the default formatting options If you change the data formatting options click the Redo mapping button to reload the file When you change the data formatting options click the Redo mapping button to reload the file using these options In Step 3 Define column mapping for each Contact Detail you have the following options in the Mapping field note that mandatory fields are marked by an asterisk select a field from the drop down list to map a column in the import file to a Contact Detail select set to a fixed value and enter a value in the Value field to ap ply this value to the Contacts Detail for all imported Contacts select skip this field to not import a field for this Contact Detail Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 219 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail fields marked in bold indicate the field or fields used to uniquely identify Contacts Ifone field is marked in bold the value assigned in the import file for each Contact must be unique If more than o
193. fresh icon at the top at any time to see the most up to date list 2 Apply any or all filters to change the ratings displayed The column headers of this table give you the following ways of filtering the results displayed below Type Select Component to see only comments submitted for Components and Page to see only comments submitted for Pages Date Last Rated and Date Last Commented Select a value to specify a time frame or no time frame within which the last rating or comment respectively must have been submitted Select Show all comments or All in the column header to see ratings or comments submitted at any time Select Today to see ratings or comments submitted since midnight today Select This week to see ratings or comments submitted since Monday of the current week Select This month to see ratings or comments submitted since the Ist of the current month Select Select a date or date range to specify a start date and an end date and see ratings or comments submitted between those two dates inclusive Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 283 User Generated Content Result The content area shows the filtered results The columns of the filtered results have the following meanings Name shows the name of the Component or Page that was rated Type shows the type of item for which a rating was submitted either a Page or a Component From Publication shows the root BluePrint Publication f
194. g Add allows you to add a Mailing to the E mail Campaign Remove tremoves the selected Mailing from the E mail Campaign 6 Inthe E mail Campaign Ribbon toolbar you can perform the following actions Option Description T a sends all Mailings in the E mail campaign see Send ing all Mailings in an E mail Campaign on page 261 sends the selected Mailing see Sending a Mailing on page 263 tests the selected Mailing Testing a Mailing on page 257 refreshes the last tested column and the statistics if you have performed a refresh of the statistics see Refresh ing statistics on page 275 260 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 8 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail The E mail Campaign General tab displays various columns for each Mailing Last tested indicates when the Mailing was last tested important because this Mailing is the one which is sent irrespective of whether the Mailing has since changed Start date and End date indicates for Triggered Mailings the timeframe when e mails are sent Other columns display statistics for the Mailings for more information see Viewing Mailing statistics on page 267 Click Save and Close Results Outbound E mail creates or updates an E mail Campaign and adds the selected Mailing to the E mail Campaign The E mail Campaign is created in the E mail Campaigns node where users with Mailing Execution rights can view edit test
195. g types of items Component Component Template Page Page Template Template Building Block Schema About version numbers When you create an item the Content Manager gives it a version number of 1 0 when you check that item in The Content Manager subsequently gives items a new version number every time you save A version number can consist of a major version number and a minor version number Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 135 Versioning major version if a user saves an item and the item is checked in the major version number increases by 1 minor version if a user saves an item that is checked out or is in Workflow the version number increases by 0 1 each time it is saved When a checked out item is checked in or when an item in Workflow completes a workflow process the version number increases to the next whole number For example if a checked out Component has a version number of 2 3 and the Component is checked in the version number increases to 3 0 If for example an item has a version number of 2 3 2 is the major version number and 3 is the minor version of the item Version history The Version History List lists all versions of a Component Component Template Page Template Page or Schema In the Version History List you can view a version compare two versions roll back to a previous version or delete a version Viewing the version history list You can view the ve
196. gs tab for a Contact refer to Ratings tab for a Contact on page 288 278 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual User Generated Content Viewing and filtering all comments and ratings in Content Manager View and filter all comments and ratings in Content Manager to check for new comments and ratings to identify comments in need of moderation and to identify overall trends and numbers with regard to commenting and rating Procedure 1 To examine all comments and ratings submitted for any content item anywhere in Content Manager access the Content Manager Explorer and in the Shortcuts area expand the User Generated Content node Result The following subnodes appear Latest Comments Top Rated Content Recently Rated Content 2 Now do one of the following To see comments ordered by date from newest to oldest select Latest Comments Refer to Viewing and filtering comments in the comments screen on page 280 to learn more about the comments screen that appears To see ratings for content ordered from highest to lowest rating select Top Rated Content Refer to Viewing and filtering ratings in the ratings screen on page 283 to learn more about the ratings screen that appears To see ratings for content ordered in reverse chronological order latest ratings at the top select Recently Rated Content Refer to Viewing and filtering ratings in the ratings screen on page 283 to learn more about the ratings
197. hat moderation status The status values are Published to Web site indicates that the comment is currently available for viewing on the published Web page Rejected by moderator indicates that a user has rejected the comment removing it from the published Web page Submitted needs moderation indicates that the comment has been submitted by a visitor and is pending moderation The comment is not yet available for viewing on the published Web page and may never be Modified by visitor needs moderation indicates that a visitor has 286 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual User Generated Content submitted this comment and it has been made available for viewing on the published Web page Now the same visitor who submitted the comment has made changes to it and resubmitted it and it is pending moderation The modified comment is not yet available for viewing on the published Web page and may never be Flagged needs moderation indicates that a visitor or a Content Manager user has flagged a comment for moderation that is currently available for viewing on the published Web page The comment is now subject to moderation the outcome of which may cause it to be removed from the published Web page Flagged deletion requested indicates that a visitor or a Content Manager user has flagged a comment for deletion that is currently available for viewing on the published Web page The comment is now subject to moderation th
198. hat the initiator of a Translation Job does not have sole ownership Creating a Translation Job for SDL WorldServer Select one or more items you want to send for translation and choose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu to add these to a new or existing Translation Job Before you begin To create a Translation Job you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication or Publications that is a target for the translated content Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select one or more translatable items in a configured Publication and choose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu Result The Translation Job dialog appears 3 Specify how to send the items to translation Select Create New Translation Job and click OK Select Add to existing Translation Job select one of the open Translation Jobs from the list and click OK Note The From To column indicates whether you are creating a Translation Job from a Source Publication From or from a Target Publication To 4 Select one or more translatable items in a configured Publication and choose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu 178 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager Result The Translation Job dialog appears Specify how to send the items to translation Select Create New Translation Job and click OK Select Add to existing Translati
199. have been classified with this Keyword or a child Keyword When you have located the Component s you want to add do the following In the list view select one or more Components b Select a Component Template If you select more than one Component the Component Template is applied to all of the selected Components c Click the Insert button A message appears at the bottom of the pane which confirms that you have added one or more Component Presentations to the Page d Repeat this step to add additional Components 86 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Pages e After you finish adding Component Presentations click Close to close the Component Presentations dialog f Click the Move up button or the Move down button to adjust the ordering of the Component Presentations on the Page 8 On the toolbar click Save and Close 9 Depending on the Structure Group that contains this Page you may now be prompted to add this Page to a Bundle so that it can enter workflow You can choose to skip this step but until you add it to a Bundle your changes will not be checked in 10 If this item must be added to a Bundle a dialog opens asking you if you would like to do so now You can choose Not Now to close the dialog but you see a warning informing you that your item is not in a Bundle and the same dialog will appear every time you save changes to the item Alternatively if you select Add a Bundle selection dialog appears
200. he expanded area fill in the following fields Text optional type the tooltip text that will appear when a visitor places their cursor over image Description URL optional type the URL of a Web page that describes this image Width optional enter the desired display width of the image Height optional enter the desired display height of the image Proportion optional if you do not want the image to be rendered using the width and height proportions uncheck this box before you modify the width and height of the image Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 67 Component field types 6 Click OK to close the Image dialog 7 By default images are shown with a placeholder in the format area You can view images in the format area using the Load Images button To view images in the format area a Place your cursor in the format area in which you want to view images b From the Format tab of the Ribbon select Load images Result Images are now displayed in this Format Area Selecting fonts in a format area You can specify how you want text to appear by selecting options in the Font dialog box Procedure 1 To select font properties do one of the following Select the text to which you want to apply text formatting place your cursor in the paragraph in which you would like to apply formatting 2 Inthe Font selection area you can select the following properties Font the font face
201. he list Click Close to close this dialog and OK to close the generic sites dialog The settings for the Local intranet zone reappear 8 Click Custom Level The Security Settings Local intranet Zone dialog opens 9 In the list of settings find the following settings and set each to the value Enabled ActiveX Run ActiveX controls and plug ins a Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting Downloads File downloads Miscellaneous Submit non encrypted form data 8 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 10 11 12 13 Getting started Scripting Active scripting Allow Programmatic clipboard access Click OK to apply these settings and close the dialog The Internet Options dialog reappears still showing the Security tab Select the Privacy tab and click Advanced The Advanced Privacy Settings dialog opens Select Override automatic cookie handling and then select Always allow session cookies Then click OK to close the Advanced Privacy Settings dialog The Internet Options dialog reappears still showing the Privacy tab Click OK to close the Internet Options dialog If you intend to use Mozilla Firefox as your browser do the following a While logged in as an end user launch Firefox and type about support in the address bar In the Application Basics area check the Profile Directory property and click Open Containing Folder next to it Result Windows Explorer
202. hecked in and becomes the current version of the item Other users can now open and edit the item All items that use this item now use the checked in version of the item BluePrinting in any Child Publications that use the shared item the shared version is the checked in version Version number the version number increases to the next whole number For example if the checked out version number was 1 8 the checked in version number is 2 0 Undoing check out You can perform undo check out to discard the changes you have made to an item that you have checked out The previous version of the item remains the current version Before you begin You can undo check out if you checked out the item It is not possible to undo check out for an item that is in Workflow About this task Important If you undo check out you will lose any changes that you made to the Component or Page after checking it out Procedure 1 To undo check out on an item access the Folder or Structure Group in which the item is stored 2 Select the item for which you want to undo the check out and in the Home tab of the Ribbon click Undo check out Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 145 Versioning Non checked in items A non checked in item is a new item that has been created but not yet checked in The status of a new item that has been created but not yet checked in is slightly different to that of an item that has been checked in w
203. hema Schema E Default Templates Folder B9Folder A Folder ok WSchema Schema ches Schema ant lt f aandom Component Component fasome Component Component Important Non checked in items apply to items that support versioning namely Schemas Components Component Templates Page Templates Pages and Template Building Blocks Non checked in items are not visible in WebDAV 146 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 15 SpellChecker SpellChecker functionality allows you to spell check the plain text fields and format area text fields of Components and of the metadata of any type of Content Manager item You can spell check content in the following languages American British and Canadian English Brazilian Portuguese Danish Dutch Finnish European French and Canadian French German Italian Norwegian Bokmal dialect Iberian Portuguese Spanish all regional dialects Swedish Spell checking items You can spell check the text fields of Components and of many other types of content items You cannot spell check values in date fields number fields link fields or list fields You also cannot spell check Folders Structure Groups Categories Keywords or Publications Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 147 SpellChecker Procedure Do one of the following To spell check the data text fields of a Component or the text fields of a Page Page Template Component Template Template B
204. hen you create an item and check it in the Content Manager gives it a version number of 1 0 Only then is the item fully accessible for linking publishing viewing and editing purposes Until then only the owner can view the content by opening or previewing the item For other users and the owner the non checked in item in workflow or otherwise is visible in the following lists The Items List the main dialog The Protocol Schemas The Where used List The Checked Out Items List The History List The Started List only for items in Workflow and only for the owner Each time you save the item a minor version number is applied for example 0 1 0 2 and so on The owner of an non checked in item can perform all the usual actions on the item except cut paste copy and publish Note also that you cannot publish newly created items in workflow from Building Blocks until they are checked in Other users can only view the non checked in items in the lists described above lists in the Content Manager Explorer that are used to link to other items do not show non checked in items because data cannot be rendered A non checked in item is shown as translucent in the Content Manager Explorer To illustrate this the following image shows three Components a Component that has been checked in a Component that has been checked out and a non checked in Component Building Blocks Name Type PA Defaut Multimedia Sc
205. hild Keyword and filtered based on the allowed Schema or Schemas configured for this field 3 Select a Component and click Insert The dialog closes and you have added a link to the Component you selected Results The Content Manager creates a Component link or a multimedia link 58 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Component field types List fields Components may contain drop down lists select boxes radio buttons check boxes and trees as list field types Depending upon the list field you may be able to select text numbers or date values The type of list determines whether the list is seen as a single value or multivalue field List type Result Drop down list You can select one item Select box You can select one or more items Radio buttons You can select one item Check boxes You can select one or more items Tree You can select one or more Keywords in a taxonomy tree Format area fields Format areas accept alpha numeric characters and also allow you to apply formatting to the field A format area fields may have the following characteristics The field may accept more than one value This may be used to distinguish between different paragraphs The field may be mandatory This is indicated with a The formatting options available for the field appear in the Format tab of the Ribbon of the Component dialog this tab is automatically displayed when you select the field In addition you m
206. ho have stated a preference for wearing jeans The following sections provide a detailed example of Contact filtering 202 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Administration A System Administrator adds Address Books in Administration Address Books contain Contacts for example Denmark Norway Sweden Dynamic Address Books contain a subset of filtered Contacts and can be based on a single Address Books or on All Contacts For example Nordic Dynamic Address Book filters All Contacts on the Keyword Nordic A Dynamic Address Book can also based on another Dynamic Address Books to further refine the filter For example Nordic subscribed Dynamic Address Book is based on Nordic and filters these Contacts on whether they are subscribed to receive e mails Administration E Administration Ap Access Management ex Workflow Management gt A Publishing Management Te Multimedia Types Pl Audience Management Al All Contacts Al Unassigned Contacts n Denmark Al Norway Al Sweden ga Nordic a Nordic subscribed Pag Synchronization Targets Publications A System Administrator adds Address Books to Publications and defines rights and permissions for users For example the Denmark Publication has Denmark and Nordic subscribed Address Books assigned to it Users with access to this Publication and Contact Management rights are allowed to read write and delete Contacts within the
207. hows and what you can do with it To view all ratings submitted by a specific Contact do the following In the Publications area select a Publication and navigate to Audience Manager gt Address Books Select an Address Book that contains the Contact you are looking for or All Contacts if you do not know which Address Book the Contact belongs to From the list of results double click the Contact to open it and in the dialog that opens select the Ratings tab The Ratings tab shows The average of all the ratings submitted by this Contact A Refresh button press this button at any time to see the most up to date list of ratings A table showing all ratings submitted by this Contact in reverse chronological order newest to oldest showing the following properties Name shows the name of the Component or Page that was rated Type shows the type of item for which a rating was submitted either a Page or a Component From Publication shows the root BluePrint Publication for the Page or Component Rating shows the average rating as a number of stars between 0 and 5 The actual range of rating values may not be 0 5 but the actual value is mapped to a 0 5 scale For example if the values are an integer value between 0 and 2 then the value 0 is represented by 0 stars the value 1 is 3 stars 2 5 rounded up and the value 2 is represented by 5 stars Date Rated shows the date at which the piece of content rece
208. ht click and select an option from the context menu Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 31 Content Manager Explorer 32 Moving an item You can perform Cut amp Paste actions to restructure your content You move items in the list view to a different Folder or Structure Group within the same Publication or for Keywords to a different location in the same Category Before you begin You require the rights that allow you to modify that object as well as the following permissions Delete permission for the containing Folder Structure Group or Category Write permission for the Folder Structure Group to which you want to paste the item You will not be able to cut and paste an item if The item is a local copy or a shared item The item is checked out in Workflow or published It is not possible to move items between different Publications or between Folders Structure Group and Categories or between one Category and another Category About this task To move items you cut and paste selected items If you move a Folder Structure Group or Keyword you also move all items that are contained within it Procedure 1 Navigate to the Publication and Folder or Structure Group that contains the item you want to move 2 From the list view select one or more items Click Cut on the Home tab of the Ribbon 4 From the navigation pane select the Folder Structure Group to which you want to move the item s
209. i en wikipedim org vwtki Orape title Ocape atyle text decorntien none color rgbi 6 69 173 backgrtosnjij image none beckground attecheest initial background srtgin initial background clip initial beckgrownd color initial beckgroend position initial initial beckground repeat initis initial gragec wm m hrefe hrspi en wikipedia org viki Varsery biology ticlee Varisecy b10lOgy clatse sw redirect stylee text 4ecorati n nose color rgb 6 49 179 bexkgrounmt tmege 3 ERR j H siisi a The following image shows the Preview tab FormatArea Source Preview Chardonnay is a green skinned grape variety used to make white wine Tt is believed to have originated m the Burgundy wine region of eastern France but 1s now grown wherever wine is produced from England to New Zealand Disable Styles 60 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Component field types Format area field controls The following table describes the formatting options that may be available when entering content in a format area field Note Not all of the options described in the table are available in all format areas Icon Description Cut copies content to your clipboard and removes the content from the Component To cut text Select the text you want to move a Click Cut Copies content to your clipboard To copy content
210. i aca nite arate art tl eiu e ORE E REA esas Ea s 114 Workflow Activity Details 2 0 III 115 Workflow tab of an item subject to workflow 0 cece eects 116 12 Metadata and Keywords 15 4315 1 REOR d eR x Ra eov kon aa 119 Detining metadata 2 osa vet erro e px ed ed d ua P ar e dei deut 120 Adding Keywords to fields 2 0 0 0 6 cece ccc ccc eee eee eee eeeeee 122 Viewing related content 2 0 0 0 cece ene EERE 125 13 tea RN ER UT E EERE 127 Publishing and republishing items from the Content Manager 128 Advanced Publishing options 0 e cece eect nett eee ree 130 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual V Unpublishing items from the Content Manager lees 131 Viewing the publish queue 0 e eee aie naie in a teens 132 Cancelling a publish transaction 0000 eee 134 14 VersioNINg oitasinnsdcibik LETS 135 Content Manager items that have versions 135 About version numbers 0 cece cece eee eee teen e 135 Version history jeiseeccda ceri dees he bad eeei Gade dele deena D LA bateau 136 Viewing the version history list 136 Viewing A Version 252024 btatenenrrd EERIGTRERNERER Loewe Mea oe Ma Pede Des 137 Comparing two Versions 6 0 ehh 137 Rolling back to a previous version 66 eee 139 Deleting a Version c epeneseeser ex Het Sdn ee news E E eg 140 Check in and check out 2 0 0 0 EE 141 Checking out an tem 1222 isa
211. ia Component navigate to the Publication and Folder in which you want to create the Multimedia Component 2 Inthe Create tab of the Ribbon click New Component gt New Multimedia Component A New Component window appears In the Name field type the name of the Component 4 Inthe Schema field select a Multimedia Schema A series of fields appear that you can use to select a multimedia item 5 Inthe Multimedia Type field select a multimedia type and do one of the following Upload a local or network file go to step 6 Reference an external resource go to step 7 6 To upload a local or network file a Inthe Resource Type field select Uploaded b Click the Load From Disk button Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 79 Multimedia Components c In the dialog that appears click the Browse button and select the file you want to upload and click OK d Go to step 8 7 To reference an external resource In the Resource Type field select External In the URL address field that appears type the URL address of the file you want to use c Goto step 8 8 Ifa Metadata tab appears select the metadata tab and fill in fields as required You must fill in all mandatory metadata fields before you can save the Multimedia Component 9 Click Save and Close 10 Depending on the Schema you selected you may now be prompted to add this Multimedia Component to a Bundle so that it can enter workflow You can choose
212. ication While the shared item is in a Bundle in workflow it is also not possible to change the BluePrint Publication hierarchy or the priorities of BluePrint Publications Bundles and workflow A Bundle may be subject to a Workflow Process Definition While a Bundle goes through workflow so do all of the items it contains These items can have completely separate Workflow Process Definitions associated with them A Bundle s Workflow Process can be started only when all of its items have completed their own Workflow Processes 1f applicable A Bundle may contain items that must be in a Bundle it may also contain items that do not need to be in a Bundle Any changes to the mandatory items in a Bundle cannot be checked in until the Bundle has started and finished its Workflow Process That means that even before the Bundle enters workflow changes to the mandatory items are not checked in To illustrate what this means imagine the following sequence of events Alice opens a mandatory item that is in a Bundle The Bundle is subject to workflow but has not entered workflow yet Alice modifies the item and saves and closes the item to commit her changes The changes are committed but not checked in Boris opens the same item or explicitly checks it out and makes a change but halfway through editing he changes his mind Boris selects Undo Checkout to discard his changes Content Manager discards all changes that were
213. ick the Special Character button m Select a character from the list and click OK b Anchor Creates an anchor to which you can link within the same format area To create an anchor Place your cursor in the location at which you would like to create an anchor Click the Insert Anchor button In the window that appears type the name of the anchor and click OK You can now create a hyperlink to this anchor using the Hyperlink button d Hyperlink Creates hyperlinks to Components HTTP pages e mail addresses anchors or other resources See Inserting hype rlinks in a format area on page 66 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 63 Component field types Description See Formatting tables in a Format Area on page 69 See Inserting an image in a format area on page 67 Horizontal line m Inserts a horizontal line To insert a horizontal line place your cursor in the position in which you would like to insert a horizontal line and click the Horizontal Line button M Load images By default when you open a Component that contains an image a placeholder is displayed Click the Load images button to view images Validate The validate button converts the content of the format area into XHTML and validates the content according to accessibility standards If the format area contains any errors warnings or accessibility messages the messages are shown i
214. ide out navigation Settings screen The slide out navigation Settings screen shows options to configure the slide out navigation Sites screen and to configure Experience Manager Sites Select Sites to configure the Sites screen in the slide out navigation You see a list of all Publications that are associated with at least one Publication Target 1 Select a Publication from the list to specify which Web sites corresponds to that Publication The Site properties settings appear 2 Under Site URL provide the Web address of the Web site that corresponds to this Publication Under Site Description give a description of the Web site 4 Select Apply Changes to add this site to the Sites screen in the slide out navigation Inline Editing Select Inline Editing to configure Experience Manager The General Borders Settings option opens your border settings on the right The Session Preview Settings option lets you disable the Session Preview feature on the right and set a maximum for binary files to upload to preview The Content Type Settings option lets you specify on which sets of Pages you want to allow which Content Types to be used The BluePrint Context Settings option lets you specify an alternative BluePrint structure Slide out navigation About screen The About screen in the slide out navigation shows you the version of SDL Tridion you are using the versions of the various user interfaces and a legal notice R
215. ight click any container such as a Folder a Structure Group or a Keyword either in the tree or in the content area and select Start Location gt Go to Start Location in the context menu that opens 2 To display the contents of any container in the tree such as a Folder a Structure Group or a Keyword after you log in right click that container in the tree or in the content area and in the context menu that opens select Start Location gt Use Current Location 3 Verify by selecting Start Location gt Go to Start Location The content area displays the contents of the container applying the view list view or icon view that was showing when you set the start location 4 To reset the start location to the system default right click any container and in the context menu that opens select Start Location gt Reset to Default Navigation pane 28 The navigation pane located on the left hand side of the screen is the area is where you navigate to the various areas of the application The lower half of the navigation pane shows you the Publications you have access to You can resize this area by grabbing it with your mouse You can open each Publication to see the items inside Use the area called Shortcuts at the top of the navigation pane for quick access to locations or items you visit most often such as Custom Pages You can hide or show your Shortcuts area by clicking the expand collapse button amp If the Web ad
216. il node expand the Folders and select a Distribution List The search filters appear 3 Define Standard filter options a E mail address fill in all or part the first characters of an e mail address Based on for Distribution Lists only you can filter Contacts based on filters defined in another Segment Address Book or Dynamic Address Book in addition to other filters you may define E mail type specify the Contact s preferred e mail format Select either HTML Text or Multi part 210 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Subscription status indicates the status of a Contact s subscription Opted in the Contact registered as a subscriber and confirmed the registration Subscribed the Contact registered as a subscriber but did not yet confirm the registration Unsubscribed the Contact would not like to receive e mail E mail error status indicates whether problems have been encountered sending e mails to the Contact No problems e mails sent to this Contact should arrive without incident Temporary problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered temporary problems for example the Contact s e mail Inbox was full Persistent problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered permanent problems for example the e mail address of the Contact does not exist Active Yes or No indicating Contacts who can or cannot receiv
217. iles 216 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Format option Description Supported Values Field separator Specifies how fields columns are comma separated semicolon colon Tab tab vertical bar String delimiter Specifies how fields that contain commas double quotes or line breaks are delimited double quotation marks v single quotation marks Decimal Specifies the symbol used to separator mark the boundary between the integral and the fractional parts of decimal comma a decimal numeral decimal point Group separator Specifies the symbol used before or after the thousand separator to ease the reading of large comma numbers period m apostrophe Space blank space Date format Specifies the date format Dates must be formatted according to the data formats supported by your Audience Manager database MS SQL date formats supported by the NET framework Oracle date formats supported by Oracle Row separator Specifies how rows are separated carriage return Note The import automatically detects the row separator used line feed carriage return line feed pair Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 217 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note The formatting used in the file needs to be communicated to all users who perform import as these
218. ils 5 Inthe Details tab fill in or modify the Contact s extended details Note Mandatory extended details fields are marked with an asterisk Extended details are configurable and implementation specific 6 In the Categories and Keywords tab add or remove a Contact s Keywords a b hwo 00 Click Add Browse to and select a Keyword Click Insert Repeat the procedure to add more Keywords Click Close when you have finished adding Keywords To remove a Keyword select it click the Remove button Note The list of Keywords displayed does not reflect Keyword hierarchy the Keywords are displayed in a flat list You can use multiple Keywords from several Categories and in different Publications A Contact can also have multiple Keywords from the same Category for example 1f a Contact is both a Business Contact and a Consumer Contact both Keywords apply Note If a Category and Keyword in the list are both marked DELETED xxx the Keyword has been deleted 7 Click Save and Close Results You have updated a Contact 208 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note Updating a Contact s details may result in changes to their membership of dy namic Distribution Lists Deactivating and deleting a Contact You can deactivate or delete a Contact Deactivation prevents a Contact from receiving Mailings but keeps the Co
219. imedia Components you must open them from an external application using WebDAV You can also open other items such as Schemas and Components using the Open with WebDAV button This results in an attempt to open the XML source of the item Note If you are experiencing problems opening a non binary item with WebDAV from Content Manager Explorer upgrade your Microsoft XML Parser MSXML version 3 0 to Service Pack 7 or higher You can install this Service Pack from the Microsoft Web site Accessing items from an external application using WebDAV In a WebDAV compliant application such as Windows Explorer you can navigate through Content Manager folders and create open and edit files Content Manager Explorer the Web interface for Content Manager shows Publications and Folders using specific icons A client application that uses the WebDAV Connector displays Publications and Folder as Windows folders File extensions for Content Manager items You can identify the type of Content Manager item by looking at the file extension An item of type has the file extension Component xml Multimedia Component of the associated binary files Schema xsd Component Template tctcmp 296 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual WebDAV Connector An item of type has the file extension Page Template tptcmp Template Building Block Compound tbbcmp Template Building Block NET tbbasm Assembly Templ
220. in Outbound E mail is defined using Keywords A Contact is a member of the Target Group if they have the Keyword specified by the Target Group Target Groups allows you to include or exclude parts of a Mailing to certain groups of Contacts depending on their Target Group membership For each Component Presentation on a Page an e mail fragment you can specify the Target Group it applies to Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Structure Group where your e mail Pages are located and open an E mail Page 3 Onthe Component Presentation tab click the Target Groups subtab A series of check boxes appears one for Everyone and one for each Target Group in the Publication 4 Select a Component Presentation clear the Everyone check box and select one or more Target Groups the mailing recipients who match the profile defined in these Target Groups will see this Component Presentation The following example shows Target Groups defined for Customers and Prospects allowing you to send different content in the Mailing to different mail recipients depending on whether they are customers or prospective customers zenera pma Fewaactat Sindies Wersfiew inis umts w the cater uf me sara jamsi come CT 248 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note If you select multiple Target Groups a visitor will see the Component Presentation if they a
221. in the list view and choose Add Contacts to Distribution List from the context menu Note For performance reasons the list view only displays 1000 Contacts If you are looking for specific Contacts you should enhance your search criteria If you are saving the results to a Distribution List note that all the Contacts who meet the search criteria will receive a mailing not just the 1000 displayed Results You have performed a search of Contacts in an Address Book or Distribution List and viewed the list of Contacts that match the search parameters you entered What to do next When you have performed a search you can do the following Click Export to export the filtered Contacts in the list view Click Save to create a Distribution List or Segment based on the filtered Contacts in the list view Click Reset to view all Contacts and restart a search Filter operators Contact extended detail fields have drop down lists that allow you to filter Contacts using operators depending on whether the fields are text strings or numeric or dates Operators for Strings fields You can use the following operators to search for extended detail fields whose values are strings Starts with searches for Contacts whose value for this field begins with the value specified is empty searches for Contacts who have no entry for this field is not searches for Contacts who do not have this value excludes Contacts with this value
222. ing Blocks Bundles m None of the items in the Bundle is currently in a Workflow Process Procedure 1 Access the Content Manager Explorer Web site 2 Navigate to the Publication and Folder that contains the Bundle on which you want to start Workflow 3 Select the Bundle in the tree on the left Result The Bundle tab appears in the Ribbon and is selected 4 Select Start Workflow Process in the Bundle tab The Start Workflow Process button shows an error if one or both of the following is true One or more of the items in the Bundle is itself still in workflow To fix this problem find out to whom the item is currently assigned and follow the item through to the end of its Process Instance One or more of the items in the Bundle cannot be subject to workflow Only Components Pages Component Templates Page Templates Template Building Blocks and Bundles can be subject to workflow To fix this problem remove all other types of items from the Bundle Result If no error appears SDL Tridion places all items in the Bundle in workflow and triggers the first Activity in the Workflow Process Definition associated with the Bundle Schema of this Bundle If this first Activity is an Automatic Activity SDL Tridion performs it and any other Automatic Activities that directly follow this one until it reaches a Manual Activity As soon as the first Manual Activity is reached that Activity appears in the Assignment List of a
223. ings and security settings for Folder permissions Folders have the following settings General settings Name you must make the name of the Folder unique within the Folder in which you create it In a BluePrint this naming constraint extends to any Parent or Child Publications in the BluePrint Linked Schema optional the default Schema for Components created in this Folder Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 89 Folders Linked Schema is mandatory optional Components created in this Folder can only use the Linked Schema Metadata Schema optional allows you to specify data in metadata fields that can contain values for the Folder If these fields are mandatory you must fill the fields in before you can save the Folder Folder permissions By default a new Folder inherits security settings from the Folder in which you create it Inherit security settings from Parent the Folder inherits security settings from the Folder in which you nest this Folder You can only change User and Group permissions or Exceptions if you clear this value If you select this setting the Content Manager removes any previous settings Users and Group permissions you can set Read Write Localize and Delete permissions for this Folder for each User or Group that has access to this Publication If you modify them the Folder will no longer inherit security settings from the Parent Folder Read the user
224. inting A BluePrint is a hierarchy of Publications in which Parent Publications share content with Child Publications BluePrinting enables you to reuse structure content and 2 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Getting started design between Publications The BluePrint Viewer provides a visualization of the Parent Child relationships for an item within a BluePrint T t Home View ridion Content M mu a5 EE Open Where Used Preview Compare History Localize Unlocalize Manage Edit BluePrintine Level 0 00Corporate SDL Tridion 2013 S 1 Level 1 02England 02Germany 02France m SDL Tridion 2013 S E SDL Tridion 2013 S 7 SDL Tridion 2013 S In this BluePrint you can see the SDL Tridion 2011 Launch Component is shared from the 00 Corporate Publication to its Child Publications The following image shows the 02 France Publication in the Content Manager Explorer You can see that in this Publication SDL Tridion 2011 Launch is a Local Copy which means the shared item has been localized and 1s now editable une TT x mh rx wa ere Wt uc y Fen B g ay amp e Te ceer P bores a qa 29 B oec s Quem FG tent ntn Dam Ehelewt tacercty Where Lass Pave Compare Hater Zener ey Tm DEPTT k lene TENT p news age view HE EUN Brees Drm D page ant D comer nene Cim pidon 2013 St tech Comyurert rZ SIAII 428 AM hie Ed Qo Teeter emite re reres W24
225. iority d Select Dynamic from the Type drop down list e Create a Dynamic Distribution List Based on a Segment Address Book or Dynamic Address Book Ifyou select a Segment the filters defined in the selected Segment are used in addition to other filters you may define and act on all Contacts within the Publication Ifyou select a Dynamic Address Book the filters defined in the selected Dynamic Address Book are used in addition to other filters you may define and act on Contacts within this Address Book Ifyou select a regular Address Book the filters you define act on Contacts within this Address Book Ifyou make no selection the filters act on all Contacts within the Publication 240 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note For information on how you create a chain of filters to narrow down an audience you are targeting refer to Contact filtering on page 201 In the Outbound E mail tab enter E mail address fill in all or part the first characters of an e mail address E mail type specify the Contact s preferred e mail format Select either HTML Text or Multi part Subscription status indicates the status of a Contact s subscription Opted in the Contact registered as a subscriber and confirmed the registration Subscribed the Contact registered as a subscriber but did not yet confirm the registration Unsubscribed the
226. iption Opted in the Contact registered as a subscriber and confirmed the registration Subscribed the Contact registered as a subscriber but did not yet confirm the registration Unsubscribed the Contact would not like to receive e mail Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 205 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail E mail error status indicates whether problems have been encountered sending e mails to the Contact No problems e mails sent to this Contact should arrive without incident Temporary problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered temporary problems for example the Contact s e mail Inbox was full Persistent problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered permanent problems for example the e mail address of the Contact does not exist Active clear this check box to prevent this Contact from receiving e mails 5 Inthe Details tab fill in or modify the Contact s extended details Note Mandatory extended details fields are marked with an asterisk Extended details are configurable and implementation specific 6 In the Categories and Keywords tab add or remove a Contact s Keywords a b hwo 00 Click Add Browse to and select a Keyword Click Insert Repeat the procedure to add more Keywords Click Close when you have finished adding Keywords To remove a Keyword select it click the Remove button Note The list of Keywords displayed d
227. irst press Ctrl F6 or d F6 to set keyboard focus to the Ribbon toolbar tab that is currently open You can now select other tabs using the Left and Right arrow keys on your keyboard To open a tab and show its controls select it and press Enter You now selected the first button in the Ribbon tab Again use the Left and Right arrows to navigate to the button you want to use and do one of the following Ifyou have selected a normal button press Enter to execute the command Ifyou have selected a button that always opens a dropdown menu press Enter or the Down arrow to open the dropdown menu Ifyou have selected a button that has a primary command plus a number of special commands in a dropdown menu press Enter to execute the primary command or the Down arrow to open the dropdown menu Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 37 Content Manager Explorer 38 Ifyou opened a dropdown menu use the Up and Down arrow keys to navigate through the menu options and Enter to select one Use the Escape button to go back up a level in the Ribbon from dropdown menu to a tab or from a specific tab to the list of tabs Content Manager navigation pane shortcut keys The following table describes the shortcut keys that you can use to navigate between items in the Content Manager Explorer navigation pane Key Up Down Left Right Home End Enter Page Up Page Down Backspace Ctrl X or db TX Ctrl
228. ished to Web site To reject the comment open the Status dropdown and select Rejected by moderator 4 Click Apply to apply your moderation Deleting a comment Delete a comment to completely remove it from the system Procedure 1 Ifyou have found the comment you want to delete on a comments screen refer to Viewing and filtering comments in the comments screen on page 280 for more information select the comment you want to delete and do one of the following Click Delete in the Home tab of the Ribbon toolbar Right click the comment and select Delete from the context menu that opens Press Delete on your keyboard You are prompted to confirm the deletion Click Yes to delete the comment 2 Alternatively 1f you know which Component or Page the comment was submitted to and where that Component or Page is located navigate to the Component or Page and open it then select the Comments tab Or if you know which Contact submitted the comment and which Publication and Address Book contains that Contact navigate to the Contact and open it then select the Comments tab Result You now see the Comments tab that contains the comment you want to delete 3 Ifthe Comments tab shows many comments use the search function of your browser to locate the one you want to delete 4 Above the comment you want to moderate click the Delete button m Result You are prompted to confirm the deletion 5 Click Yes to delete
229. ist or clipboard the item currently open in this dialog in your clipboard so that you can paste it in another application or document none Current elements Select an HTML element that encloses the current cursor position This control is especially useful to select tables Move the currently selected item s or content to the clipboard removing the item s or content from its current position Delete Delete the currently selected item in the content area pa Finish Activity Release the current item which you had previously started activity on so that it enters the next workflow state History Show all previous versions of the current item in a list Horizontal line Insert a horizontal line at the current cursor position Sp ili 53 v Hyperlink Insert or edit a link to a Component or to an external resource For more information refer to Inserting hyperlinks in a format area on page 66 Image Open a dialog to insert an image at the current cursor position For more information see Inserting an im age in a format area on page 67 Indent Indent text Italic Make text italic Mt itl Left align Left align text Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 17 Content Manager Explorer 18 Icon Label Description p Load images Display images in a Format Area they are not loaded Dm gu de by default in order to optimize performance Localize Create a local
230. istribution Lists created from statistics you can also define additional criteria For example to filter Contacts who have read an e mail and who have indicated an interest in Sports cars as defined in a Contact s Keywords Exporting Contacts from statistics You can export Contacts from statistics to a CSV file Before you begin To export Contacts from statistics you need Mailing Execution or Mailing Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder About this task You can export Contacts to whom a selected Mailing status applies and include all recipients in all Distribution Lists in the Mailing all recipients or a selection of recipients in a single Distribution List in the Mailing Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 273 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Procedure Is In the Publication gt Outbound E mail node navigate to the Folder where your Mailings are stored select a Mailing and click the Explore Mailing Status icon in the toolbar Result The Mailing opens on the Statistics tab 2 Select a Mailing response status for example Select Read confirmed to export recipients who have opened the e mail but not yet clicked the links Select Action taken to export recipients who have opened the e mail and clicked one or more of the links Select a specific link clicked in the Details tab to export recipients who have opened the e mail and clicked this link 3 Wh
231. ists root Folder Publication gt Audience Manager gt Segments root Folder 3 Select a Folder and click the New Folder icon on the toolbar A New Folder window opens 4 Inthe New Folder window enter A logical Name A Description used internally for other users of Outbound E mail to understand the Folder s purpose 5 Click Save and Close Results The Content Manager creates a Folder You can edit the Folder to modify its properties by selecting the Folder and choosing Properties from the context menu Creating Components An e mail message consists of one or more Components A Component represents a piece of e mail content Before you begin To create a Component you must have 244 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Component Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Folder Schemas available to you which define the structure of the Content About this task Components are based on Schemas which define the structure of the content When you create a Component you select a Schema that defines the type of Component that you want to create You create Components in Folders within a Publication Note For more information on Components and Component field types see the SDL Tridion User Manual Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Building Blocks Folder 3 Select a Folder in which you
232. it check box selecting prevents the e mail from being sent if the Contact has already received the configured maximum number of e mails within a designated period of time deselecting sends e mails regardless of whether the maximum permitted for a Contact has been reached Note The Use maximum E mails limit option is designed to minimize Contact irritation for example when people are receiving too much mail As a rule subscribers will want to receive e mails to newsletters they have subscribed to and are less interested in other marketing e mails For information on configuring the maximum e mails limit see the SDL Tridion Installation Guide After you have tested the Mailing you can select Triggered mailing Start Date specify a start date End Date specify an end date For more information see Triggering a Mailing on page 264 In the Distribution List tab select Distribution Lists from the Available Distribution Lists and click Add to add them to the Selected Distribution Lists Contacts in the Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 253 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail selected Distribution Lists are the target recipients of a Mailing if they are also a member of a selected Address Book You can see how many members a Distribution List has by examining the Total Contacts column The Refresh button will refresh the numbers displayed in the screen after you have refreshed statistics For more
233. items to the Translation Job send it for translation or delete it Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 185 Translation Manager Sending a Translation Job You can send a translation to the translation management system in the Translation Job dialog or you can send an existing Translation Job whose status is Definition directly from the Translation Jobs Queue Before you begin To send an existing a Translation Job you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication that is a target for the translated content Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Goto the Translation Jobs node in the Shortcuts area Result A list of Translation Jobs is displayed 3 In the Translation Jobs node select a Translation Job from the list and select Send to Translation in the Translation Management tab of the Ribbon toolbar Results You have sent the Translation Job to the translation management system for translation The Translation Job is now in the Ready for Translation state meaning it is waiting to be transferred to the translation management system What to do next You can track the progress of the Translation Job in the Translation Jobs Queue in the Content Manager or on the translation management system Resending a Translation Job on send error Errors can occur during the sending and retrieving of a Translation Job to or from the translation management system Afte
234. ived its latest rating Apply any or all filters to change the ratings displayed The column headers of this table give you the following ways of filtering the results displayed 288 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Type User Generated Content Select Component to see only comments submitted for Components and Page to see only comments submitted for Pages Date Last Rated and Date Last Commented Select a value to specify a time frame or no time frame within which the last rating or comment respectively must have been submitted Select Show all comments or All in the column header to see ratings or comments submitted at any time Select Today to see ratings or comments submitted since midnight today Select This week to see ratings or comments submitted since Monday of the current week Select This month to see ratings or comments submitted since the Ist of the current month Select Show comments created in the time between or Select a date or date range in the column header to specify a start date and an end date and see ratings or comments submitted between those two dates inclusive To see the full details of a rating double click its row The Component or Page that contains this rating opens in a new dialog with the Ratings tab selected In this tab you can see the exact value of the rating Refer to Ratings tab for a Component or Page on page 285 for details Moderating a comment Moderat
235. kflow the item will be too You can also select Close which has the same effect as clicking Not Now in the previous dialog Results You have created a Component Note For information about creating Pages and using Component on Pages see Pages on page 83 Editing a Component You can edit a Component to modify the content of the Component Before you begin To edit a Component you must have Component Management rights and Write permissions It is not possible to edit a Component if the following conditions apply The Component is shared from another Publication A different user already checked out the Component The Content Manager assigned the Component to a different user through a Workflow Process Procedure 1 2 Navigate to the Publication and Folder that contains the Component you want to edit To open the Component select the Component in the list view and click Open on the Home tab of the Ribbon Edit the fields in the Component as required See Component field types on page 53 for more information about the different field types Click Save and close in the Home tab of the Ribbon Depending on the Schema you selected you may now be prompted to add this Component to a Bundle You can choose to skip this step but if you do the Component remains checked out to you Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 51 Components 6 If this item must be added to a Bundle a dialog
236. l 6 Select the Component you want to add in one of the following ways In your Building Blocks Folder structure navigate to the location of the Component you want to add In your Categories and Keywords select a Keyword The List View displays Components that have been classified with this Keyword or a child Keyword When you have located the Component s you want to add do the following In the list view select one or more Components b Select a Component Template If you select more than one Component the Component Template is applied to all of the selected Components c Click the Insert button A message appears at the bottom of the pane which confirms that you have added one or more Component Presentations to the Page d Repeat this step to add additional Components e After you finish adding Component Presentations click Close to close the Component Presentations dialog f Click the Move up button or the Move down button to adjust the ordering of the Component Presentations on the Page 7 On the Target Group tab you can define which category of user the content is intended for by selecting Target Groups For more information see the following tasks a Creating Target Groups for Outbound E mail on page 255 b Personalizing an e mail Page on page 248 8 To preview the mailing for a specific Target Group or Target Groups click Preview on the Ribbon toolbar In the Preview tab clear the che
237. lation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication that is a target for the translated content About this task Any user who is authorized to initiate translations and who has access permissions to the Publication which is a target or potential target of translated content can add items to an existing Translation Job Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select one or more translatable items in a configured Publication and choose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu Result The Translation Job dialog appears In the Translation Job dialog select Add Items to existing Translation Job 4 Select a Translation Job from the displayed list and click OK Result The Translation Job dialog appears for the Translation Job you selected with the Content Manager items you selected added to the job 5 Click Save or Save and Close in the Ribbon toolbar to commit the changes the Translation Job remains in an editable state until you send it for translation What to do next If you have saved the Translation Job you can view modify and add items to the Translation Job send it for translation or delete it 184 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager Viewing a Translation Job You can view all existing Translation Jobs in the Translation Jobs queue You can modify Translation Jobs that have not yet been sent for translation whose status is Definition Befo
238. le field describe the contents of the link When published this text 1s rendered as a tooltip by most browsers Optional Target Target controls where the new document will be displayed when the user follows a link By default clicking on a link simply loads a new document in the same window where the link was Target allows you to specify the following options New window the link will open in a new window Same frame the link will open within the same frame as the link tag Parent frame the link will load in the immediate Parent of the frame Top frame the link will load in the top frame of the window Named the name of the target window If you select named you must also provide the name of the target window Inserting an image in a format area You can insert a Multimedia Component that is an image file into a format area About this task Procedure 1 To insert an image into a format area in the format area insert your cursor in the location in which you would like the image to appear 2 Click Image button in the Format tab of the Component Ribbon 3 In the dialog that opens click the Browse button Result A browse dialog opens 4 Navigate to the folder containing the image you wish to insert select it and click OK to return to the Image dialog Result The Image dialog shows the selected image 5 Inthe Image window dialog click Advanced to expand the dialog and show advanced options In t
239. leting or unpublishing items with comments or ratings If you delete a Component or Page that has associated comments or ratings those comments and ratings are also deleted Unpublishing a Component or Page does not affect comments or ratings They reappear if and when the item is republished 294 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 21 WebDAV Connector The WebDAV Connector enables you to access an instance of the Content Manager from a client machine and to navigate and use Publications and folders in the Content Manager as folders in a file system You can use WebDAV with Content Manager to view binary files contained inside Multimedia Components and you can use WebDAV in external applications that supports WebDAV to access Publications Folders and items contained in Folders such as Components Schemas Multimedia Components and Templates For example using WebDAV you can use Windows Explorer to access Content Manager Publications and their Folder You can add edit delete and move these items as if they were part of a normal Windows file system You can open them in external applications edit content and save the edited items back to the Content Manager You can also create new Multimedia Components by dragging and dropping content to a Folder on the Content Manager WebDAV server In addition you can use WebDAV from Content Manager Explorer the Web interface to the Content Manager to open binary files i
240. ll the members of the User Group associated with that Activity Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 107 Bundles Workflow tab of a Bundle If you open a Bundle in Content Manager Explorer the Workflow tab gives you information about the workflow properties of that Bundle If the Workflow tab shows only the text Approval Status followed by a value one of the following is the case Ifthe value is Undefined the item is either not subject to Workflow at all or it has never entered a Workflow Process Ifthe value is Unapproved the item has completed at least one Workflow Process which did not assign any Approval Status to the item Ifthe value is neither Undefined nor Unapproved the item has completed at least one Workflow Process which last assigned the Approval Status you see to the item If the Workflow tab shows a History of Activites area in the top half and an Activity Details area in the bottom half then the item is subject to workflow and currently in a Workflow Process You see the following 108 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Bundles History of Activities A list of the Activities of this Process If the item has already gone through and finished a Workflow Process in the past you see a dropdown from which you can select previous finished Workflow Processes The History of Activities area shows the following properties per Activity lt Icon gt If the icon shows a green checkmark
241. lorer Basic User Manual Possible extensions mdb pdf bmp txt xls png exe ppt swf mov qt gif rm ram ra rv jpg jpeg jpe rtf mp3 wav mpg doc Multimedia Components Creating a Multimedia Component You create a Multimedia Component by uploading a local or network file to the Content Manager or creating a reference to an external resource such as an image on your server Before you begin To create a Multimedia Component you must have Component Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Folder Note Non ASCII characters in the file name of a Multimedia Component may result in previewing and publishing issues Therefore ensure that the filename of the Multimedia file you want to upload or reference does not contain non ASCII characters About this task You can create a Multimedia Component that identifies a specific binary file You can then use the Multimedia Component directly on a Page or as a Component link within another Component For more information about this see Multimedia link fields and Component link fields on page 58 Important Certain settings of the Content Manager such as timeout setting and database size may cause problems when you try to upload very large binary files If you experience these problems you may want to consider creating a Multimedia Component that references a binary file that is on your network Procedure 1 To create a Multimed
242. m the Primary Parent Parent A Parent Publication shares items to one or more Publications called Child Publications A Parent Publication can also be a Child Publication m Child A Child Publication mirrors the Parent Publication A Child Publication can also contain local content that you can combine with shared content The BluePrint Viewer provides a visualization of the Parent Child relationships within a BluePrint and the BluePrint relationship between items Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 41 BluePrinting Home View Tridion Content Ez 2 e rea 5 e E A ab Q ep to PR VX Open Where Used Preview Compare History Localize Unlocalize Manage Edit BluePrinting Level 0 00 corporate e SDL Tridion Newsle 1 Level 1 E SDL Tridion Newsle SDL Tridion Newsle E SDL Tridion Newsle BluePrint Hierarchy for A SDL Tridion Newsletter July 2015 in o1_French Publication Key 01_French Item URI tcm 29 717 BluePrinting Status Shared Modified 9 24 2013 2 30 AM Approval Status Undefined Version 1 Publish Status Not Published Shared items local copies and local items Child Publications can contain a combination of shared items local copies and local items Shared items Shared items are items inherited from Parent Publications These items are read only items unless you create a local copy Local copies Local copies are shared items that have been localized Locali
243. mail fields extended detail fields or Keywords that you want to filter Contacts on You use the same filters to define Dynamic Address Books Dynamic Distribution Lists and Segments You can base a Dynamic Address Book Dynamic Distribution List or Segment on another Dynamic Address Book Dynamic Distribution List or Segment to create a chain of filters Each filter in a sequence further refines the filtered Contacts on which it is based Chaining filters allows you to create generic filters and use these to create more specific filters You can create a chain of filters as follows Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 201 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail You can base a Dynamic Address Book on another Dynamic Address Book You can base a Dynamic Distribution List on a Dynamic Address Book on another Dynamic Distribution List or on a Segment You can base a Segment on another Segment Each filter in a chain of filters is applied sequentially For example if you apply the following filters in a chain l inc oec conr 9 Filter A Subscription status Subscribed Filter B Nationality Italian Filter C Gender Women Filter D Age 18 30 Filter E Preferred Clothing Jeans Filter B 1s applied to the result set of Filter A Filter C to the result set of Filter B and so on down the chain Filter E will therefore filter a list of Contacts on Italian women aged between 18 and 30 who have subscribed to e mails and w
244. mation is Header you can add an ID attribute to a single selected cell Table No Row No Column No Cell Yes Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 73 Component field types Text The text contained in a single selected cell Table No Row No Column No Cell Yes Abbreviation If the Type of information is Header you can add an abbreviation attribute to a single selected cell Table No Row No Column No Cell Yes Scope If the Type of information is Header for one or more cells you can select whether the header is for a row or for a column Table No Row No Column No a Cell Yes Axis If the Type of information is Header for one or more cells you can categorize cell information Table No Row No Column No Cell Yes Applying formatting to table cells rows or columns When formatting a table in a format area you can format specific cells rows or columns In the Table Editor you can select or deselect one or more cells in the table preview area You can then apply the table formatting options that are available for the selected cells rows or columns About this task Select or deselect a single cell select multiple adjoining cells or select non adjoining 74 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Component field types cells as follows To select a single cell Click on the cell To select multiple adjoining cells Click on a cell
245. me the items in Content Manager Explorer to a name that contains only supported characters then access those items using WebDAV Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 303
246. ments and ratings submitted for any content item in that Publication For more information refer to Viewing and filtering all comments and ratings in a specific Publication on page 279 Comments and ratings for a specific Component Every Component has a Comments tab and a Ratings tab in which you can see detailed comments and ratings respectively For more information about the Comments tab refer to Comments tab for a Component or Page on page 285 For more information about the Ratings tab refer to Ratings tab for a Component or Page on page 285 Comments and ratings for a specific Page Every Page has a Comments tab and a Ratings tab in which you can see detailed comments and ratings respectively For more information about the Comments tab refer to Comments tab for a Component or Page on page 285 For more information about the Ratings tab refer to Ratings tab for a Component or Page on page 285 Comments and ratings from a specific Contact If your implementation of UGC identifies visitors as Audience Manager Contacts in SDL Tridion you can see the comments and ratings submitted by a Contact by opening that Contact from an Address Book in the Audience Manager node of a Publication and selecting the Comments or Ratings tab respectively For more information about the Comments tab for a Contact refer to Viewing and filtering comments for a Contact on page 286 For more information about the Ratin
247. ms that were last modified today in the last X days or in the last X months where X is a number you set Selected an author from the dropdown menu to search only for items created or modified by that author Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 155 Search Search Parameter Keyword Publish status BluePrinting Types Based on Schema Workflow State Show results Save search Description Select a keyword to limit your search to only items that use the Keyword that you specify To use this option you must first select a Publication Folder or Structure Group in which to search You cannot use this option if you have selected the entire Content Manager as a search location You can then browse to and select one or more Keywords in the taxonomy tree The result shows the items that use the Keyword or Keywords as metadata or as content in Components For more information about Categories and Keywords see the implementer s documentation portal Select either Published or Not published from the dropdown menu to limit your search to only items with that publish status If you select a publish status search will return only Components Component Templates and Pages The BluePrinting option limits search to search only in local or localized items selected via a dropdown menu You can also search for shared items if you have chosen to search within one Publication If you select Types you can select on
248. n a dialog that gives you one of two options l You can correct the errors manually You can allow the Content Manager to create valid markup Language Sets a language attribute for selected text Select the text for which you would like to set a language attribute and click the Language button In the Language pop up that appears select a language from the displayed list AB Abbreviation Defines the full or expanded form of a selected abbreviated expression or acronym A description is inserted as a tool tip To insert an abbreviated expression or acronym Select the text for which you would like to define an abbreviation or acronym Click the Abbreviation button In the popup that opens fill in the following fields Type select abbreviation or acronym Text type the text that you would like to appear in the format area Description type the description you would like to appear as a pop up E Spell check This options will spell check the entire Component The following controls are not icons 64 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Component field types Font face selection Gsm Ej eed BIUSXX AG See Selecting fonts in a format area on page 68 Font size selection Gems ep atau BIUSXX X AG See Selecting fonts in a format area on page 68 Current elements Current Elements Italic lt em gt Section Type Table Body lt tbody gt Style Table Row lt
249. n e mail a Contect must be o member of selected Distributor List and a member of a selected Address Book Note You organize Segments into Folders For more information refer to Creating Folders for Mailings Distribution Lists and Segments on page 244 Creating a Mailing A Mailing combines Contacts the recipient or target audience of a Mailing and Content the e mail itself Before you begin To create a Mailing you need Mailing Management rights and Write permissions for the Folder You must have created at least one Distribution List You must have created an E mail Page You must have created Folders to organize your Mailing About this task Creating a Mailing involves Filling in general Mailing settings Specifying an E mail Page content and design Specifying Distribution Lists containing the target audience of your Mailing Con tacts Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 251 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Specifying the Address Books to which the Contacts in your Distribution Lists must belong Previewing and saving the Mailing Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E mail node 3 Select the Folder in which your Mailings are stored and click the New Mailing icon in the toolbar Result The New Mailing window appears 4 Inthe top section of General tab fill in the following a Mailing title enter a
250. n for the Target Type s you selected Important Selecting this option does not mean that failure to publish to one Publication Target has any effect on any other Publication Target Similarly selecting this option does not mean that failure to publish to one Target Type has any effect on any other Target Type If possible publish the in workflow version of an item one or more of the items that you are publishing may be in workflow If an item is in workflow it may have reached a point where it has become publishable to one or more of the Publication Targets to which you are publishing But by default this in workflow version will not be published Rather the last major version of the item will be published By selecting this option you override this default behavior and the in workflow version will be published to a Publication Target if it has become publishable to that Publication Target Unpublishing items from the Content Manager You need to unpublish content to take content offline Visitors will no longer be able to view the unpublished content Procedure I Select one or more items in the navigation pane or list view and select Unpublish in the Home tab of the Ribbon toolbar The Unpublish dialog appears showing the Unpublish settings tab Do one of the following If you want to unpublish the content now leave the setting set to Unpublish content now If you want the content to be unpublished later s
251. n or Structure Group in which they reside or by Publishing the Pages themselves About this task A Publication the Content Manager publishes all Pages in publishable Structure Groups m A Structure Group the Content Manager publishes all nested Pages in publishable Structure Groups Pages the Content Manager publishes the Page Procedure 1 Select one or more items in the navigation pane or list view and select Publish in the Home tab of the Ribbon Result The Publish dialog appears showing the Publish settings tab 2 Select the Target Types to which you want to publish content to In Publish Settings select when you want the publishing to start 4 Click Publish to start the publishing process What to do next For more information see Publishing and republishing items from the Content Manager on page 128 88 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 8 Folders In a Publication you use Folders to organize content building blocks such as Schemas Components Component Templates Page Templates Folders and Virtual Folders You can find Folders in the Building Blocks of a Publication CONTENT MANAGEMENT Building Blocks Shortcuts vj Name x Publications BB Default Templates BSFolder A a COMENS PROPRIE PA Default Multimedia Schema a JustaPub gt BS Root i categories and Keywords P User Generated Content Folder settings Folders have general sett
252. n this topic Bundle contents You can add any type of content item in a Publication to a Bundle including other Bundles Bundles can contain any number of items and an item can be in any number of Bundles Bundle creation You can create a Bundle and then add items to it or you can create a content item and create a Bundle for it on the fly When created a Bundle is stored in a default Folder location unless you choose a different location Bundles and search You cannot search inside a Bundle s contents You can however successfully search for a Bundle itself Bundles and BluePrinting Bundles can be localized in a child Publication but only their title and metadata can then be changed You cannot add items to the localized Bundle You can put items shared from a parent Publication in a Bundle When a Bundle containing a shared item is put in workflow in the current Publication the following rules apply The user who starts workflow must have at least read permissions on every item in the Publication from which the shared item originates The user does not need Publication Management rights to the Publication The shared item cannot enter workflow in any other Publication until it finishes workflow in the current Publication Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 99 Bundles While the shared item is in workflow it cannot be localized or unlocalized neither in any parent nor in any child of the current Publ
253. n you send content for translation to the translation management system When you send a Content Manager item for translation the Content Manager localizes and checks out the item in the Target Publication before sending it to the translation management system When the translation management system sends the translated item back the item is localized if not done so already and replaced by the translation The item is then checked in and is now a local copy or localized version of a shared item Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 167 Translation Manager Translation process A successful Translation Job process flow is Definition gt Ready for Translation gt Sending for Translation gt In Translation gt Completed In between these stages the state of a Translation Job can be Error sending Error retrieving Cancelled or Deleting You can see the current stage of a Translation Job the job status in the Translation Job Queue The following diagram provides an overview of the translation process Translation Manager Translation System Definition Ready for Sending for user creates Translation Translation In Translation Translation Job Translatable items Process Text Fields External Link Fields Get source Format Area Fields Metadata fields EE eme Item rties D irdan EA Localize Eq T E target items Check out target items Create N AR Transiation Jobs
254. nal Components created in this Folder can only use the Linked Schema Metadata Schema optional allows you to specify data in metadata fields that can contain values for the Folder If these fields are mandatory you must fill the fields in before you can save the Folder 4 Click Save and close in the Home tab of the Ribbon Results The Content Manager creates a Folder What to do next To modify security settings for a Folder you must first save and close the Folder Then you can edit the Folder in order to modify security settings Editing a Folder You can edit a Folder to modify the properties of the Folder Before you begin To edit a Folder you must have Folder Management rights Ifyou want to modify Folder permissions you must also have Permission Management rights and write permissions for the containing Folder If this Folder is a shared item you must localize the Folder before you can edit the Folder Procedure 1 To edit a Folder navigate to the Folder you want to edit 2 Right click the Folder in the tree view or list view and in the context menu that opens select Properties Result A dialog opens for the Folder 3 On the General tab edit the following fields as required Name you must make the name of the Folder unique within the Folder in which you create it In a BluePrint this naming constraint extends to any Parent or Child Publications in the BluePrint Linked Schema opti
255. nd Outbound E mail Ng p CONTENT siam e abr Mt Comiorth Tega ew BE Neer Coraci mems LIU sE cinse ow d TA Crectad cot iras Are Correa tet am nw O cem remm QD che armar LLL LI I n Bem mH D p s Orra htm lEt eee a nm tee ates p ft nee LIT 3805 TTTTRRI NATIONAL BEIT TRACT aese bet Cerem tigerat DOO lett Orern er steer macy amrih over Cc freee engt Rice ted coe bes vse tei fotu cam tel Tote ted wan bet D om ern te m Local Address Book 4 hautat aig OARSIM RE UA TRAET wie bel 0 pa Aaka uy LPT Bayo Ana fae hte tet B we Direc het l New Address Bock me Do iiem t QM Aci Rite Mieren New Dynamic Address mins uter CON bal oer tet EF RS Address Book Bora io wah bassis ate Coe Eu tel e pyecrtreiancn fibt ii ht TAicigiscYaidLiDale be Tule sete rer tee beat Sanat SPST Coe occ tented quia tex wib meeng hainas nioena s wuai T s sas tei E sev tesi 2 AM PEO CAC rented M ame vuta tss bei ae rae a levy Above voteq an d we b i Clasa amaa tissanias zarati DAMME DAAE peregre Audience Manager items The Audience Manager node e contains the following items Address Book An Address Book contains a list of Contacts If the Publication contains two or more Address Books an All Contacts node is added which contains all Contacts in the Publication Address Books are added to a Publication by a Tridion System Administra
256. nd the Outbound E mail Folder in which you have defined Distribution Lists 4 Select a Dynamic Distribution List and choose Create Static Copy from the context menu Results Outbound E mail creates a Static Distribution List from the Dynamic Distribution List The static copy has the same name as the Dynamic Distribution List appended with the creation date and time The Static 242 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Distribution List contains the Contacts that were part of the Dynamic Distribution List at the moment it was created What to do next To rename the Static Distribution List Select the Static Distribution List and choose Properties from the context menu In the Name field change the name to your liking and click Save and Close Managing e mail content Managing e mail content involves creating and personalizing the content of an e mail used in an Outbound E mail Mailing Creating E mails involves performing the following tasks Create Components an e mail message consists of one or more Components each representing a piece of e mail content Create E mail Pages an E mail Page represents an e mail message and specifies the Components that are part of the e mail message and how these Components and the Page as a whole should be displayed Personalize an e mail Page when you create an E mail page you can specify which Target Group s each Component Present
257. ne field is marked as bold the combined value of the fields must be unique For example Contacts come with a default set of extended detail fields The fields IDENTIFICATION KEY and IMPORT SOURCE are used to uniquely identify Contacts In this default situation you could therefore map the IDENTIFICATION KEY to a column in the CSV file and set IMPORT SOURCE to a fixed value such as TRIDION to identify where the Contacts come from For System Administrators only when you import Contacts into the All Contacts Address Book you need to specify a value for the GROUP KEYVALUE field in one of the following ways map the GROUP KEYVALUE to a column in the import CSV file the values for each column row must be a Key value of an existing Address Book map the GROUP KEYVALUE to a set to a fixed value map the Value must be a Key value of an existing Address Book 8 Click the Preview button A preview of the data that will be imported is displayed for the first ten Contacts existing data 1s not displayed 9 Click the Import button 10 When the import is complete a status message is displayed at the bottom of the Import Contacts screen Click the log file link to view the import log files Click Close to exit the import dialog Results Contacts are created and or updated in the specified Address Books Each row in the import file is evaluated and resolved individually
258. ng Block then repeatedly perform the procedure for removing an item from one Bundle 2 Alternatively if the item you want to remove is one these types navigate to the Folder or Structure Group that contains the item and double click it in list view Result The item opens in an item dialog showing a Bundles tab 3 Select the Bundles tab Result You see a list of one or more Bundles that this item currently belongs to 4 Select a Bundle from which you want to remove this item and select Remove from Bundle Result The item is removed from the Bundle and the Bundle disappears from the list If the Bundle is in workflow the item is taken out of workflow in its current state It retains its current Approval Status 5 Repeat the previous step as needed to remove it from other Bundles 6 Ifthe selected item is required to be part of a Bundle and you removed it from its only Bundle you must add it to at least one Bundle again and complete that Bundle s Workflow Process if any before you can check in any changes to the item 7 Close the item dialog 104 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Bundles Removing one or more items from a Bundle Remove one or more items from a Bundle in the context sensitive Bundle tab that appears when you select a Bundle Before you begin If a Bundle is subject to a Workflow Process you can only remove items from it if all of the following are true The Bundle is currently n
259. ng filters in the same way as you define a Contacts search Before you begin To create a Dynamic Distribution List you need Distribution List Management rights and Write permissions for the destination Outbound E mail Folder Category Management rights and Read permissions needed to define filters based on Categories and Keywords About this task You use Outbound E mail fields Contact details and Keywords as filters You can modify the filters defining the Dynamic Distribution List in which case the Contacts it contains will change accordingly to match the changed filters Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 239 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E mail node 3 Select a Folder in which your Dynamic Distribution Lists are stored To create a new Distribution List do one of the following Click the New Distribution List icon in the toolbar Choose New gt Distribution List in the context menu To modify a Distribution List select the Dynamic Distribution List and choose Properties in the context menu 4 In the General tab Enter a unique Name b Enter a Description optional c Enter a number in the Priority field to assign an importance value when a Mailing is sent to several Distribution Lists the Mailing is sent first to Contacts in Distribution Lists with higher priority where 1 is the lowest pr
260. ns 302 Checking items in and checking items out 0 0000 e eee eee eee ee 302 Troubleshooting Opening an item containing non alphanumeric characters 303 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual IX X Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 1 Getting started The Content Manager enables you to create manage and organize Web site content easily and efficiently Getting started explains the fundamental concepts involved in using the Content Manager Explorer such as Publications Web site building blocks Publication rights and permissions various other features and functionality and how to configure your browser You can create content using the Content Manager Explorer a browser based interface that you can use to access create edit and publish content Multiple authors editors and designers can contribute thereby allowing you to collaborate and align your content objectives You can maintain Web content throughout its entire life cycle from adding new content to publishing the content to your Web site All versions of content are saved thereby allowing you to view and track changes Note You can also interact with the Content Manager through WebDAV an industry standard interaction model that lets you browse through your Content Manager folders and work with items from any WebDAV compliant interaction such as Windows Explorer Basic Content Manager concepts For content authors the m
261. ns of a Component Component Template Page Template Page or Schema For more information see Version history on page 136 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 47 BluePrinting Localize allows you to create a local copy of a shared item Unlocalize allows you to unlocalize the local copy of an item in a Child Publication and use the shared item from the Parent Publication Important Unlocalizing an item deletes the localized version entirely from the system 3 In the View tab of the BluePrint Viewer you can Zoom in and Zoom Out of the diagram and perform the following actions Show Parents select an item Publication and click Show Parents to highlight the selected Publication s Parents the Publications that are not Parents of the selected Publication are dimmed out Show Children select an item Publication and click Show Children to highlight the selected Publication s Children the Publications that are not Children of the selected Publication are dimmed out Show Used in click Show Used in to view the items the item is Used in Show Inheritance Path select an item and click Show Inheritance Path to highlight where the item shares its content from 4 Inthe BluePrint hierarchy diagram displayed in the BluePrint Viewer the following visual indicators are used A solid blue background indicates the Publication from which BluePrint Viewer was invoked A blue border indicates
262. nside Multimedia Components Note If you are a Template implementer and you intend to create Dreamweaver Templates you also use WebDAV to access the Content Manager from Adobe Dreamweaver on your client machine Refer to the installation topics in the online documentation portal to learn how to set up your client machine and to the templating topics in the portal to learn how to work with Content Manager items from Dreamweaver Viewing binary files in Multimedia Components using WebDAV Explains how WebDAV lets you view the contents of binary files contained in Multimedia Components Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 295 WebDAV Connector From Content Manager Explorer the Web interface to the Content Manager you can use WebDAV to open the binary files contained in Multimedia Components To do this select the Multimedia Component and in the Home tab of the Ribbon select Open gt Open with WebDAV Content Manager Explorer downloads the binary file to a temporary folder and the default application associated with this type of binary content opens the file For example on a client machine that associates JPEG files with Adobe Photoshop selecting Open with WebDAV launches Adobe Photoshop and opens the file Note Any changes you make to the file in an external application are not saved back to Content Manager The file you are editing is a copy of the file on your client machine To edit binary files in Mult
263. nt and combining these items into Mailings in the Content Manager user interface 194 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Creating and sending e mails Creating and sending e mails in Outbound E mail involves managing Contacts creating Content and combining these into a Mailing 1 Contacts are the people you send mailings to You add Contacts to Address Books An Address Book represents a market segment or interest group You target the intended audience of a mailing by creating Distribution Lists that contain a subset selection of your Contacts 2 Content involves the creation and classification of e mail content You create an e mail as follows Create Components each Component defines a part of an e mail an e mail fragment Create a Page a Page combines content Components with layout Page and Component Templates Specify Target Groups when you add a Component to the Page you can also specify which Target Group s the content applies to You classify content using Categories and Keywords You create Categories and Keywords to Classify Content the primary purpose of Categories and Keywords in Content Manager is to classify and tag content Components Classifying your content helps you find related content Classify Contacts the secondary purpose of Categories and Keywords which is most relevant to Outbound E mail is to specify Contact pr
264. ntact in an Address Book so that you still have access to the Contact s profile and Mailing response history Removal permanently deletes the Contact from an Address Book and the system Before you begin To deactivate or delete a Contact you need Contact Management rights and Write permissions for the Address Book Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 To deactivate a Contact Select an Address Book b In the list view select a Contact and choose Open from the context menu c Inthe General tab clear the Active check box to prevent this Contact from receiving e mails d Click Save and Close 4 To delete a Contact Select an Address Book b In the list view select one or more Contacts and choose Delete from the context menu or click the Delete button in the toolbar c When prompted to confirm deletion click Yes to delete the Contact Results The Contact is deactivated or removed When you remove a Contact the Mailing statistics are unaffected although you cannot view statistical information for that particular Contact Searching Contacts You can perform a search of Contacts in an Address Book or Distribution List to retrieve a list of Contacts that meet a certain criteria Search functionality allows you to check and modify a customer s contact details check a Contact s Mailing history and their response to a Mailing and target mailings
265. ntent into these predefined fields and thereby ensure that all press releases have consistent structure and content types This section describes how to create and use Components in the Content Manager Explorer Multimedia content is saved in multimedia Components For information about multimedia Components see Multimedia Components on page 77 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 49 Components Creating a Component You create a Component by selecting a Schema that defines the type of Component that you want to create You can then fill in the fields for the Component as defined by the Schema 50 Before you begin To create a Component you must have Component Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Folder About this task For example your organization may have a Schema called Press Release upon which all press release content is based You create Components in Folders within a Publication Procedure l 2 Navigate to the Publication and Folder in which you want to create the Component On the Home tab or the Create tab of the Ribbon click New Component A New Component window appears On the General tab modify the following fields Name fill in the name of the Component Schema select the Schema on which this Component will be based If your SDL Tridion system administrator defined a mandatory Schema for the Folder in which you create a Component then you see no Schema field
266. nter a Workflow Process whenever a user creates such a Page in the Workflow tab select a value for Associated Page Process Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Structure Groups 6 Ifyou want to specify that all Pages in this Structure Group must be part of a Bundle in the Workflow tab select When a user creates or modifies a Page in this Structure Group the Page must be in a Bundle By selecting a value for Preferred Workflow Process for this Bundle you can make Bundles with that Workflow Process more prominent for the user 7 Click the Save and close button on the Home tab of the Ribbon Results The Content Manager creates a Structure Group You can create Pages and other Structure Groups within this Structure Group If you set the Structure Group to Publishable the Content Manager publishes Pages in this Structure Group to the Structure Group Directory specified Editing a Structure Group You can edit a Structure Group to change its general settings permissions or Workflow association Before you begin To edit a Structure Group you must have Structure Group Management rights and write permissions for the containing Structure Group To edit a Workflow association you must also have Workflow Management rights To edit Structure Group permissions you must also have Permission Management rights You cannot edit a shared Structure Group Procedure 1 To edit a Structure Group navigate to the Structure Group
267. ntrols may be available in your user interface Icon Label Description AB Abbreviation Insert a piece of text and its abbreviation at the current cursor location or provide an abbreviation for the selected text LS Add item to my Add a bookmark pointing to the currently selected favorites item in the list or the current item open in this dialog d Anchor Insert edit or remove an anchor at the current cursor position For more information refer to Format area fields on page 59 Blueprint Show the Blueprint hierarchy of which the current Hierarchy Publication is a part and the status of the currently selected item in it shared localized or local item B Bold Make text bold Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Icon Label Description Bullet list Make a bullet list Center Center text Q Character Insert a special character at the current cursor position Tal Check in Check in your changes to create a new version of the current item Check out Check out the current item for editing Check spelling Check the spelling of text in the current dialog Classify Add a Keyword association to one or more Content Manager item s Compare Compare two versions of an item i EY Ql lt a Copy Copy the currently selected item s or content to the clipboard without removing Y Copy item link to Put a link to the currently selected item in the l
268. o view the number counts you need to use the Refresh statistics functionality About this task Statistics are displayed in several places in the Content Manager Explorer for Outbound E mail to indicate the number of Contacts contained in Distribution Lists and Address Books and to display various statistics concerning a Mailing When you refresh the number counts the statistics are updated and cached for fast retrieval The number counts you see in the Content Manager Explorer therefore date from the last time the counts were refreshed as indicated by the Calculated column in the List View Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 275 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Note Performing a Refresh statistics is not needed to see the latest Mailing Status Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to m the Publication gt Outbound E mail node and select the Folder in which your Mailings or Distribution Lists are stored the Publication gt Audience Manager gt Address Books node 3 Select a Mailing Distribution List or Address Book and click Refresh statistics icon in the toolbar or choose Refresh statistics from the context menu Result A progress window informs you of the status of the update Results The statistics for the selected Outbound E mail items are updated For Distribution Lists and Address Books the Total Contacts are recalculated a For Mailings the Delivered Faile
269. ocess this is followed by the Activity name The number is useful to distinguish say a first review Activity from a second review Activity You see the following Activity Details Name The name of this Activity Description A description of what this Activity entails Task Name If this Activity is applied to a type of item the name of that item if this Activity is a Task the name of the Task Process Definition The name of the Workflow Process Definition that this Activity belongs to Approval Status The Approval Status determines whether or not the item s associated with this item can be published to a specific Target Type Assigned to The Group or User to which this Activity was assigned Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 117 Workflow Performer If the Activity has a Started or Finished state the name of the User who is currently performing if Started or has most recently performed if Finished the Activity Assigned on A timestamp representing the moment at which the Activity was assigned immediately after the previous Activity finished Started on If the Activity has a Started or Finished state a timestamp representing the moment at which a User picked up the Activity Finished on If the Activity has a Finished state a timestamp representing the moment at which a User finished the Activity Previous Activity Message A message provided by the User who finished the previous Activity
270. odified 9 23 2013 9 05 AM 9 23 2013 9 06 AM 9 23 2013 9 05 AM mimi 8 3 40 AA In the Advanced search that is displayed you see the most common advanced search options You can click Show more search options in this area to see the full range of advanced search options This section describes all of the options in the fully expanded Advanced search area When using Advanced search you can still use all of the operators described in Search operators wildcards 5 on page 152 in the input box All wildcards function as described in Search on page 153 Search Parameter Search term Search for item names only Search in item descriptions only Search in Include subfolders Date modified Author Description Your search input which may include operators and wildcards and which may be a Content Manager URI Refer to Search input on page 151 for details Limits search to search in the internal names of items only You cannot use wildcards Limits search to search in the description fields of items only You cannot use wildcards Specify the node in which to search Click Browse to open a navigation dialog to pick a specific node in which to search When checked this option also searches in all subnodes of the node in which you search Check this box to limit your search to only items that were last modified in a certain date time range There are predefined options for searching in ite
271. oes not reflect Keyword hierarchy the Keywords are displayed in a flat list You can use multiple Keywords from several Categories and in different Publications A Contact can also have multiple Keywords from the same Category for example 1f a Contact is both a Business Contact and a Consumer Contact both Keywords apply Note If a Category and Keyword in the list are both marked DELETED xxx the Keyword has been deleted 7 Click Save and Close Results You have created a Contact 206 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Updating a Contact You can edit an existing Contact for example if you want to correct a mistake you find in an individual Contact s information or simply update the details Before you begin To create or update Contacts you need Contact Management rights and Write permissions for the Address Book Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 Select the Contact in an Address Book or Distribution List and choose Open from the context menu Result The Contact window appears Note Use the Contact search functionality in an Address Book or Distribution List to locate a Contact 4 Inthe General tab fill in or modify the Mailing details E mail address the person s e mail address E mail type the Contact s preferred e mail format HTML
272. of the field Use the Add button to add an addition value to the field Use the Delete button to delete a value from the field Multivalue Format Area d Fi Des uiua s Nunc gravide a teius a mterdum Vresmus et nisi dignissum equam nunc id interdum lectus l suns a consectetur 4 vek Maecenas egestas aR i fero vestbulum yenenata Cras facies posuere lorem ul olia Praesent at vires mapana Sed moncus orci leo eu auctor lorem consectetur at Sed ew dolor non dism euismod malesuada Etam massa risus accumsan quis turos eget rhoncus condimentum m Nulam lacus orci solictudin nec nunc eget dapibus accumsan jasto Sed non quam accumsan malesuada ieo aget feugiat arcu Nac sodales lectus mi nec eleifend m congue sit amet Cursbtur lobortis vei nis eo adipscing Phasellus sc Mimmo memes iom meom lalienbtnnico mo mono Drame aoro n can ma rho dh ii Desgn Source Preview Curabdur ut ume nec urna hendrert hendrert vel eget eros Duis nuoc lectus suscipt sagtis interdum eu volutpat nec eM Cras non faucibus fale Hem digoasim iguia Quis pulvinar faciles eros lectus elementum veit id dapibus risus teius nec eros Donec quis mauris m tellus molis ullamcorper in a sapen Mulla facis Nam pretium fringte luctus Cras ut lobortis mi eget vanus nisi Aliquam erat volylpat integer at varies munc i maths csi Curabitur tempor odio xi nula rhoncus id molis torior scelensque Alguam congue diam sed viverra
273. older that contains the Multimedia Component you want to edit 2 Select the Multimedia Component and click Open on the Home tab of the Ribbon Content Manager Explorer displays the properties of the Multimedia Component in a dialog 3 As required edit the following fields on the General tab Name The name of the Multimedia Component must be unique within the Folder in which you create it In a BluePrint this naming constraint extends to any Parent or Child Publications in the BluePrint Note Non ASCII characters in the file name of a Multimedia Component may result in previewing and publishing issues Therefore ensure that the filename of the Multimedia file you want to upload or reference does not contain non ASCII characters Schema You must base the Component on a Multimedia Schema If the Folder in which you create the Component has a mandatory linked Schema the Content Manager selects the Schema automatically and the Component must use it Multimedia type The type of binary file that you will store in this Multimedia Component Resource type You can either Upload the binary file or you can supply an External URL 4 Ifthe Metadata tab appears you may see metadata fields which you can modify if you wish If any mandatory metadata fields exist you must fill in these fields before you can save the Multimedia Component 5 Click Save and Close 6 Depending on the Schema you selected you m
274. ompact View or Expanded View select a stage from the list The Details window displays items that are currently in that stage of translation In the Details window select an item and click Open to view the item 190 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 19 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Audience Manager enables marketing departments to gather information about audiences such as interests and characteristics Outbound E mail is for marketing departments that need to implement and manage e mail communication campaigns Audience Manager Audience Manager enables marketing departments to gather information about audiences such as interests preferences and characteristics and use this information to target audiences Audience Manager consists of Contacts and Segments A Contact contains details of an actual person or organization Contacts are stored in Address Books a A Segment defines Contact preferences interests and characteristics that represent a target audience of known Contacts accessing content on your Web sites The following diagram provides an overview of Audience Manager Audience Manager user interface The Audience Manager node in a Publication contains Content Manager items specific to Audience Manager The node is accessible to users who have Audience Manager rights as defined by a Tridion system administrator Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 191 Audience Manager a
275. on Job select one of the open Translation Jobs from the list and click OK Note The From To column indicates whether you are creating a Translation Job from a Source Publication From or from a Target Publication To In the General tab enter values in the Translation Job Details section Enter a Name The Configuration path displays the Publication Folder Structure Group Category that is configured for translation Select a Required Date set a due date for when the translation should be returned from the translation management system if you do not specify a value the default value on the translation management system is used Select a Include already translated items by default Translation Manager does not send items included in a Translation Job to translation if the item has not changed since it was last sent You can override this behavior by selecting the Include already translated items check box for example if you were not satisfied with the translation In Translation Targets section Ifyou initiated a job from a Target Publication you can specify the Project Type if the field is read only the Project Type has been configured for you Ifyou initiated a job from a Source Publication you can select the Languages you want to translate to and specify the Project Type to use In the Added Items tab you can see each item in the Translation Job For items that contain subitems such as Folders an
276. on a cell you want to split in a table into Click the Split into columns icon columns Splitting a cell In the table preview area click on a cell you want to split in a table into Click the Split into rows icon rows 76 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 6 Multimedia Components Multimedia Components store multimedia information such as images and common file formats such as Microsoft Word documents The following image shows a Multimedia Component General Bundles Workflow Comments Ratings Info Name Vermeer Schema FB oe sukt Multimedia Sthams m Component Content Multimedia Type Jpeg image aga Resource Type Uploaded VERMEER A LADY WRITING DETALI 1 NGW JPG A Multimedia Schema defines the type of binary and other information metadata associated with the binary Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 77 Default Multimedia Types Multimedia Components By default Content Manager provides a number of Multimedia Types from which you can create Multimedia Components Note A SDL Tridion system administrator can add additional Multimedia Types to the Content Manager Title Access Database PDF Document Bitmap Image Plain Text Excel Sheet Png Image Executable PowerPoint Presentation Flash File QuickTime Movie Gif Image Real Player Jpeg Image Rich Text MP3 Music Sound File Mpeg Video Word Document Content Manager Exp
277. on on the SDL TMS You can set priority levels High Normal LOW Select a Required Date set a due date for when the translation should be returned from the SDL TMS if you do not specify a value the default value on the SDL TMS is used 176 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 5 6 Translation Manager Select a Business Unit if configured you can specify the Business Unit billed for the translation Select a Include already translated items by default Translation Manager does not send items included in a Translation Job to translation if the item has not changed since it was last sent You can override this behavior by selecting the Include already translated items check box for example if you were not satisfied with the translation In Translation Targets section If you initiated a job from a Target Publication you can specify the Workflow to use if the field is read only the Workflow has been configured for you Ifyou initiated a job from a Source Publication you can select the Languages you want to translate to and specify the Workflow to use In the Added Items tab you can see each item in the Translation Job For items that contain subitems such as Folders and Pages that contain Components and Keywords that contain nested Keyword you can specify the following options Select Translate Item check box to add this Content Manager item to the Translation Job Select Translate
278. onal the default Schema for Components created in this Folder Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 91 Folders Mandatory appears only if Linked Schema is set Components created in this Folder can only use the Linked Schema Metadata Schema optional allows you to specify data in metadata fields that can contain values for the Folder If these fields are mandatory you must fill the fields in before you can save the Folder Note If Component Templates and Page Templates interact with the metadata of the Folder you may need to modify the Templates If you want to modify Folder permissions select the Security tab and grant or deny users Read Write Localize or Delete permissions as necessary Results Inherit security settings from Parent the Folder inherits security settings from the Folder in which you nest this Folder You can only change User and Group permissions or Exceptions if you clear this value If you select this setting the Content Manager removes any previous settings Users and Group permissions you can set Read Write Localize and Delete permissions for this Folder for each User or Group that has access to this Publication If you modify them the Folder will no longer inherit security settings from the Parent Folder Read the user or group can view items in the Folder m Write the user or group can create or edit the items for which they have rights Delete th
279. ons as a user preference Ribbon tabs The tabs in the toolbar Ribbon contain controls grouped into functional areas The Home tab displays controls for editing managing and publishing items Home Create Organize Workflow Administration Tools Tridion Content Management Administ M WP Send to My Favorites bish M Send by E mail X cu n B Properties boe B3 ES m a F3 25 Bee e T Delete Ru Open BluePrint Hierarchy Where Used Previe Compare History Publishing I Paste Add to a Bundle C 0Ui Queue Clipboard Manage Edit Publish Send ftem Link The Create tab displays controls for creating new Content Manager items The following controls are active on a Folder Create Organize Workflow Admirstration Tools fa G Es e G New Component Template A Gi New Page Template X New New New New Virtual Folder New New Target Component Bundle Foider Schema E New Temolate Building Block Group nitent raamzetiona fers Teenpistes Tnroehng The following controls are active on a Structure Groups 14 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Home Create Or 6B New Page New Structure Group Content Organizational tems The following controls are active on a Category Home e New Keyword Taxonomy The Organize tab displays controls for managing BluePrinting and taxonomies and controls for viewing details about items Orgarvze Workflow Administration i
280. ontact Detail such as a telephone number or the organization to which the Contact belongs You can enter Merge Fields wherever text may appear but in most cases you will use Merge Fields in the following places Jn the E mail Subject From and E mail Sender Address fields of a Mailing na Component field n Component Templates or Page Templates 254 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail To insert a Merge Field you wrap the name of a Contact Detail in angled brackets and asterisks as follows QGlewEexeiBreueuLL 5 where ContactDetail is the name of a Contact Extended Detail field For example 1f your Contact s extended details consists of the fields described in the table below you can insert the following Merge Fields in a Mailing to create a Mailing personalized to each individual who receives the Mailing Salutation Prefix Surname The result would be for example personalized text inserted in the e mail such as Dear Mr Moody or Dear Mrs Popova Contact Extended Description Detail Name BRUN A phrase preceding the name in a letter heading for example Dear Preti The title of a person such as Ms Dr or Mr Hane The Contact s first name such as Penelope or Federico sig enel The Contact s surname such as Horowitz or Smithers EmailAddress The Contact s e mail address Company The organization to which the Contact belongs
281. ontained in the Distribution List s you specified in the Mailing At the moment the Mailing is sent or scheduled to be sent the list of Contacts is fixed A triggered Mailing allows you to set up a mailing to send e mails in response to a specific event The event results in a Contact being added to the Distribution List specified in the triggered Mailing and this acts as the trigger to send a Mailing While a triggered Mailing is active Outbound E mail regularly checks the Distribution Lists specified in the triggered Mailing for members who have not yet received the Mailing and sends the e mail message to these members Outbound E mail therefore sends e mails as and when Contacts are added to the Distribution List A triggered Mailing can remain active indefinitely or you can schedule the Mailing to send e mails during a specified period The following are examples of situations when you would use triggered Mailings 264 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Contact registration a typical example of a triggered Mailing is a welcome e mail When a Contact registers on your Web site they receive a welcome e mail confirming their registration Clicking a link if a registered user receives a regular Mailing listing a new line of products with links to the various product pages clicking one of these links triggers the sending out of a special e mail for that product offering a discount Thes
282. ontains a fixed list of Contacts to send a mail to A Static Distribution List only changes if you explicitly add or remove Contacts You can add Contacts to Static Distribution Lists manually or from the results of a Contacts search The advantage of a Static Distribution List is that it has a high level of detail containing very specific Contacts The disadvantages are that the amount of effort needed to create the list tends to be greater than Dynamic Distribution Lists as you have to manually add Contacts to the list and the maintenance effort needed to keep the list up to date is high is as changes are not automated Static Distribution Lists are recommended for small lists that rarely change Dynamic Distribution List A Dynamic Distribution List contains a dynamic list of Contacts to send a mail to The Contacts in a Dynamic Distribution List are derived from the Contacts in an Address Book that meet the criteria defined by the Dynamic Distribution List filter The Contacts included in the list therefore change dynamically as and when you modify the filters or a Contact s details or Keywords change You can base a Dynamic Distribution List on a Segment Address Book or Dynamic Address Book and on Dynamic Distribution Lists through search to create a chain of filters in which case each filter in the chain further refines the selection For more information refer to Contact filtering on page 201 Content Manager Explorer Basic User
283. oose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu Result The Translation Job dialog appears 5 Specify how to send the items to translation Select Create New Translation Job and click OK Select Add to existing Translation Job select one of the open Translation Jobs from the list and click OK Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 181 Translation Manager Note The From To column indicates whether you are creating a Translation Job from a Source Publication From or from a Target Publication To 6 Inthe General tab enter values in the Translation Job Details section Enter a Name Configuration path displays the Publication Folder Structure Group Category that is configured for translation Select a Include already translated items by default Translation Manager does not send items included in a Translation Job to translation if the item has not changed since it was last sent You can override this behavior by selecting the Include already translated items check box for example if you were not satisfied with the translation 7 In the Translation Targets section select the default quality level to apply to Translation Jobs for each language Note The quality level values available are derived from SDL BeGlobal 8 Select an item and click the Open button to open the Content Manager item you want to send to translation 9 Select an item and click the Remove button to remove th
284. or group can view items in the Folder Write the user or group can create or edit the items for which they have rights Delete the user or group can delete items for which they have rights Localize the user or group can create a local copy of a shared BluePrint items for which they have rights Exceptions exceptions override other permission settings and deny specified user or group read write localize and or delete permissions Creating a Folder Create a Folder in the Building Blocks of a Publication to organize Schemas Components Component Templates Page Templates Template Building Blocks Folders and Virtual Folders Before you begin To create a Folder you must have Folder Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Folder Procedure l To create a Folder navigate to the Building Blocks of a Publication and the location in which you want to add the Folder In the Create tab of the Ribbon click New Folder Result A New Folder window opens 90 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Folders 3 On the General tab fill in the following fields Name you must make the name of the Folder unique within the Folder in which you create it In a BluePrint this naming constraint extends to any Parent or Child Publications in the BluePrint Linked Schema optional the default Schema for Components created in this Folder Linked Schema is mandatory optio
285. or the Page or Component Average Rating shows the average rating rounded to the nearest integer value represented as a number of stars between 0 and 5 stars Note that the actual range of values may be different and has been mapped to a 0 5 scale For example if the range of values a visitor can submit is a percentage that is a value between 0 and 100 the stars represent the following value ranges Number of stars Rating value range 0 0 9 99 I 10 29 99 2 30 49 99 3 50 69 99 4 70 89 99 5 90 100 Date Last Rated shows the date at which the piece of content received its latest rating Date Last Commented shows the date at which the piece of content received its latest comment 3 To see the full details of a rating do one of the following Double click the rating s row Select the rating s row and click Open in the Home tab of the Ribbon toolbar Right click the rating s row and select Open from the context menu that opens Result The Component or Page that contains this rating opens in a new dialog with the Ratings tab selected In this tab you can see the exact value of the rating Refer to Ratings tab for a Component or Page on page 285 for details 284 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual User Generated Content Comments tab for a Component or Page The Comments tab of a Component or Page shows all comments submitted for the item Note that not all comments shown here may be displayed on
286. ost important building blocks for creating Web content are Components and Pages and the most important concept is BluePrinting which manages content sharing and localizing between Web site Publications Components Components define text or multimedia content In the Content Manager Explorer Components are displayed as forms with fields that you can fill in n Experience Manager Components are displayed within a Page Components are based on Schemas that define the kinds of fields you can specify Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 1 Getting started se aed ES as E Er e z T v n MM gp Os bes gt ge Wet aremt roeregerem v wb ae m on r ke haad m fe X Pages Pages define Web content When you have created Components you need to add them to Pages and publish these Pages to a Web site For each Component you add to a Page you need to select a Component Template to define what the Component should look like on the published Web page The combination of a Component and Component Template on a Page is referred to as a Component Presentation When you create a Page you also need to define what the Page should look like You do this by selecting a Page Template that defines the overall layout of the Page and its look amp feel P Moro E EA E m rA GT Boe s e 00 A i lm ia G e Seve sd Cone Lee we Beeren Wrernsset mew Compare ane aes f ree rena Y BluePr
287. ot in a Workflow state that prohibits the removing of items from it None of the items you intend to remove are currently being worked on by a User that is not you Procedure 1 From the tree on the left navigate to the Folder that contains the Bundle from which you want to remove items 2 Open the Bundle in the tree or in the list view Result The Bundle shows its contents in the list view on the right and a Bundle tab appears in the Ribbon toolbar 3 Select the item or items you want to remove in the list and select Remove from Bundle in the Bundle tab Result The selected items are removed from the Bundle If the Bundle is in workflow the items are taken out of workflow in its current state It retains its current Approval Status 4 Ifany of the selected items are required to be part of a Bundle and are now no longer in a Bundle you must add them to at least one Bundle again and complete that Bundle s Workflow Process before you can check in any changes to those items Publishing or unpublishing a Bundle You can publish or unpublish a Bundle This causes all publishable items in the Bundle to be published or unpublished Non publishable items in the Bundle are ignored Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 105 Bundles Viewing the properties of a Bundle View the properties of a Bundle in a popup dialog You can also start workflow on this Bundle from this popup dialog Procedure 1 From the tree on th
288. ou publish a Structure Group the Content Manager publishes all publishable nested Structure Groups and Pages When you publish a Publication all items in the Publication that can be published are published When you publish a Bundle all items in the Bundle are published Procedure 1 Select one or more items in the navigation pane or list view and do one of the following Click Publish in the Home tab of the Ribbon Right click the selected items and select Publishing gt Publish from the context menu The Publish dialog appears showing the Publish settings tab 2 Select the Target Types to which you want to publish content to If you have Target Types for your staging site and for your live site it makes sense to publish to one but not to both once content is good enough to go live it no longer needs to be published to staging 128 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 3 T 8 Publishing In Publish Settings select when you want the publishing to start You can improve the performance of your system by scheduling non essential publishing to occur at a later date say at night or during weekends To place your content online as soon as possible select Publish content now To start the publishing process later select Publish content later and click the calendar button to pick a date and time To distinguish between the preparation for publishing and the actual placing of content online select
289. out navigation Sites screen Select Sites in the slide out navigation to see the Sites screen which shows a list of SDL Tridion managed Web sites you can visit Select one of the items on the screen to go to the corresponding Web address displayed opens in a new tab Slide out navigation Editing Site option Select Editing Site in the slide out navigation to return to the Web page you were editing in Experience Manager before switching to Content Manager Explorer This option only appears 1f you arrive at Content Manager Explorer from an editable Web site Slide out navigation Content Explorer option Select Content Explorer in the slide out navigation to return to Content Manager Explorer Slide out navigation Control Room screen The slide out navigation Control Room screen displays information related to User Generated Content UGC and to Online Marketing Explorer For more information about the latter refer to the Online Marketing Explorer User Manual If you select to see information for UGC you can filter the results displayed in the Control Room screen by clicking Show filter options on the right This lets you apply the following filters Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 23 Content Manager Explorer Filter by Publication Select the Publication or Publications for which you want to see results By default results for the Publication s you selected last time are displayed or if you never did results for all P
290. paigns Campaigns Note This manual describes the Content Manager items that are directly concerned with Outbound E mail For more information on Content Manager functionality see the SDL Tridion documentation Outbound E mail rights and permissions Rights determine the type of items for example Mailings or Distribution Lists you may work with and Permissions determine what actions you can perform on the items for which you have rights for example whether you may view create or delete Mailings or Distribution Lists Your system administrator assigns you with specific rights for each Publication that you work in To work with Distribution Lists you need Distribution List Management rights and Read Write Delete permissions set on the parent Folder To work with Mailings you need Mailing Management or Mailing Execution rights and Read Write Delete permissions set on the parent Folder Co work with Folders in the Outbound E mail node you need Outbound E mail Folder Management rights and Read Write Delete permissions set on the parent Folder Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 199 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Legal notice Please note that use of the Outbound E mail may require compliance with national European and or international data protection laws and privacy laws It is the responsibility of the processor of the data to ensure compliance with any applicable law If you intend to perform any o
291. perations on personal data whether electronically or manually these rules may apply to you We advise you to investigate this issue thoroughly before using Outbound E mail in a live environment Managing Contacts A Contact contains the details of a person or organization You can use Contacts for targeting and personalization In Outbound E mail you create Distribution Lists containing the Contacts you want to target in a Mailing campaign You manage Contacts in an Address Book Managing Contacts Manage Deactivate Export Import Contacts Remove Contacts Keywords Contacts Y I i P 5 n C N a JE a Search Manage View Contact Contacts Distribution statistics Ba BN owl lm Distribution List Address Books An Address Book contains a list of Contacts The following types of Address Books are created by system administrators and made available to users in Publications 200 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail An Address Book contains a list of Contacts segmented according to ownership where the owner is typically an organizational unit that manages communication with these Contacts For example you may have Address Books for Sweden Denmark and Norway Contacts A Dynamic Address Book contains a list of Contacts segmented according to Contact interest characteristic or preference For example you may have a Dynamic Address Book that fil
292. perties or attributes of a Contact that define a Contact s preferences and interests such as a preferred brand of car or hobbies A Contact may have multiple Keywords from one or more Categories You create Target Groups in a Folder in the Building Blocks of a Publication Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Building Blocks Folder 3 Select a Folder in which you want to create the Target Group and Click the New Target Group icon in the toolbar Result The New Target Group window opens 4 Inthe General tab enter a unique Name and a Description for the Target Group 5 In the Definition tab a Select Tracking Keys b Select a Keyword from the list of Keywords o Select as the comparison Operator Enter 1 in the Tracking value number text box e Select Include include Contacts with these Keywords or Exclude exclude Contacts with these Keyword and include all others f Click Add The Keyword appears in the Target Group Definition 256 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Important The definition and implementation of Tracking Keys in Outbound E mail differs from the regular implementation in SDL Tridion In Outbound E mail you must use the construction Keyword 1 Outbound E mail then considers a Contact to be a member of a Target Group if he or she has all the Keywords you selected Include none of
293. plication that uses WebDAV Before you begin Depending on the type of item you want to create WebDAV imposes some additional restrictions Schemas You cannot create Embeddable Schemas Multimedia Schemas Parameter Schemas or Metadata Schemas using WebDAV Components Components are subject to the following restrictions Ifyou Component contains Component links fields or Multimedia Component link fields these fields must contain the WebDAV URL of the target item Any Component you create must be based on an SDL Tridion Schema that is located in the Publication in which you intend to save the Component Multimedia Components The Publication in which you intend to create Multimedia Components must contain a Multimedia Schema that supports the binary type of the item you are creating 300 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual WebDAV Connector Procedure 1 Use your external application s Save As functionality typically located in the File menu of your application to directly save it to the WebDAV folder location 2 Alternatively save the item locally then drag and drop the item into the appropriate WebDAV folder using Windows Explorer 3 Save the file using the correct file extension for more information see File extensions for Content Manager items on page 296 Editing items If authorized you can edit Schemas Multimedia Schemas Metadata Schemas Embeddable Schemas Components Multimedia Compon
294. ptions Editing the formatting of an existing table You can reformat an existing table in the format area of a Component Procedure 1 To format an existing table in the format area of a Component do one of the following Click on the border of the table you want to format In Firefox this operation may not work Select the table element from the Current Elements dropdown 2 Onthe Format tab of the Component Ribbon click Table Result The Table Editor opens Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 69 Component field types 3 Format the table row column and cell options See Table properties and formatting on page 70 for more information about these options 4 Click OK to update the table formatting Adding content to a table After you have added a table you can add content to the table in the format area and can format the content using the formatting options available in the Component toolbar To move between cells in the table use the arrow keys on your keyboard up down left right You can also enter text into cells using the Cell tab of the Table Editor Table properties and formatting You can format an entire table using table formatting options When you create or edit a table the Table Editor displays table editing options Title The text that is shown as a tooltip when the mouse hovers over the table Table Yes Row No Column No Cell No Caption The caption displ
295. py and paste a Segment you need Segmentation Management rights and Read permissions for the parent Folder and Write permissions on the destination Folder the paste location Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 Select one or more Segments in a Folder and choose Cut or Copy from the context menu 4 Select a Folder in the Audience Manager node and choose Paste from the context menu Editing Segments in Child Publications Although Segments are BluePrinted you cannot localize Segments in Child Publications About this task When you create Segments in a Parent Publication the Segment is shared to all Child Publications in the BluePrint hierarchy following standard SDL Tridion functionality You cannot however localize Segments in Child Publications you cannot create a local copy When you open a Segment in a Child Publication you are prompted to make the following choice Edit the parent item Open the shared item in read only mode Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 233 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Deleting Segments You can delete a Segment provided you have Segmentation Management rights and Delete permissions for the parent Folder Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 Select one or more Segments in a Folder and choose Delete or Copy from the cont
296. r Manual Component field types External link fields An external link field allows you to create a link to an external URL an e mail address or another URL addressable type such as FTP About this task External link fields may have the following characteristics The field may accept more than one value The field may be mandatory this is indicated with a Procedure 1 Click the Add button to the left of the link field A Hyperlink window opens 2 Inthe Type field select one of the following options Select http to create a hyperlink to a Web page Select mailto to create a link to an e mail address Select Other to create a link to another type of internet resource such as an HTTPS FTP or other resource 3 In the URL field do one of the following If you are creating a link to a Web page paste or type the URL of the page you want to link to If you are creating a link to an e mail address type the e mail address that you want the visitor to send mail to after the mailto prefix If you are creating a link to another type of internet resource type the address of the internet resource that you want to link to 4 Click OK 5 Ifthe field specifies more than one link you can use the area to the left of the link field to further format the links for this field Drag and drop hold your mouse down over a value and drag to move the value to another position Add button insert another link
297. r different renderings of the comments Procedure 1 Access Content Manager and navigate to the Component or Page for which you want to enforce comment moderation 2 Open the Component or Page and select the Comments tab Select the option Sort comments on page by in order 4 Doone ofthe following To display comments on the Web page in reverse chronological order newest comments at the top select date in the first dropdown and descending in the second dropdown To display comments on the Web page in chronological order oldest comments at the top select date in the first dropdown and ascending in the second dropdown Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 293 User Generated Content To display comments on the Web page sorted by the user name of the visitor who submitted the comment in alphabetical order A Z select user name in the first dropdown and ascending in the second dropdown To display comments on the Web page sorted by the user name of the visitor who submitted the comment in reverse alphabetical order Z A select user name in the first dropdown and descending in the second dropdown As you change these settings note that the appearance of comments in this Comments tab itself changes accordingly However your changes will also be applied to the published Web page 5 Click Save and Close to commit your change 6 Republish the Component or Page to apply the change you made De
298. r fixing the errors you can resend the Translation Job to the translation management system Before you begin To resend a Translation Job you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication that is a target for the translated content You can resend Translation Jobs that are in the Error Sending state About this task When errors occur during the Sending for Translation state while the Translation Job is being processed for transferral to the translation management system Translation Manager sets the state of the Translation Job to Error sending 186 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager When errors occur Translation Manager does not send any of the items in the Translation Job except when connection error occur in which case Retry sending only sends items the items that were waiting to be sent when the connection was lost Retry sending does not take versions into account For example if you send version 1 of a Component for translation and sending fails if in the meantime someone has created version 2 of the Component and you Retry sending version 1 will be sent for translation and not version 2 Note If you want to send the latest versions of a Component create a new Translation Job Alternatively copy and paste a completed Translation Job containing items that you want to send again for translation because newer versions exist edit the Job 1f ne
299. r more information refer to Search Folders on page 159 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Icon Label Description Numbered list Create a numbered list Open Open the currently selected item in the content area If the item is a Multimedia Component this will show the item s properties rather than its binary content Bw Open approval Show the various approval statuses 1 status list eme mo ET M Open the currently selected item as a WebDAV item If the item is a Multimedia Component this will open the binary item in the software application associated with it Note that any changes you make in the external application will not be reflected in SDL Tridion If the item is not a Multimedia Component the XML of the item is displayed R Save and close Save the current item and then close the dialog a Save and new Save the current item close the dialog and open a new empty dialog to create a new item of the same type Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard in the current list or at the current cursor position Preview the currently selected item B Show the properties of the current item e Publishing queue See the status of items that were submitted for publishing e Publish Submit the current item to be published to one or more destinations E Reclassify Replace a Keyword association in one or more Content Manager items s C Redo the last undone edit
300. r retrieving state Attempts to retrieve items previously failed if you choose Retry retrieving If unsuccessful it reverts to the Error retrieving state and retries fails items every 24 hours Resets its list of failed items and will try to retrieve all of them again if you restart the Translation Manager service If you delete a Translation Job in Retry retrieving state the state is set to Deleting while the Translation Job is being processed for deletion If the Translation Job is canceled on the translation management system the state is set to Canceled and the checked out items undone 5 Completed The items in the original Translation Job have been returned from the translation management system and checked in 170 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager Translation information In the Component Info tab you can see whether the current version of the Component has been translated or if the item has been modified since it was last sent for translation which version of the item was last translated Depending on whether the Component was a source or target for a translation the tab also displays a link to the Component that was the source for the translation or links to items that were the target for a translation You can also see which Publication the source or target content is located If the content is currently in translation the tab displays a link to the Translation Job f Multilingu
301. re a members of any of the selected Target Groups 5 Repeat the process each Component Presentation for which you want to set Target Groups 6 On the Preview tab preview the E mail Page for each Target Group For more information see Creating and previewing an e mail Page on page 245 7 Click Save and Close Results You have defined the Target Groups for content in an E mail Page What to do next To test and send a Mailing see Managing Mailings on page 250 Classifying Content and Contacts You use Categories and Keywords to classify content and Contacts A Category is a general classification and a Keyword is a value in a Category You can use these Keywords to Classify Content the primary purpose of Categories and Keywords in Content Manager is to classify and tag content Components Classifying your content helps you find related content Classify Contacts the secondary purpose of Categories and Keywords is to specify Contact preferences and interests which you can then use to define Dynamic Distribution Lists Segments Target Groups The following image shows an example of a taxonomy Categories and Keywords Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 249 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail 4 Publication B3 Building Blocks ES RootStructureGroup 4 5 Categories and Keywords gt B Contact Keywords 4 Countries Q France gt g Germany gt Q Italy 4 Q Netherlands g G
302. re you begin To view and modify a Translation Job you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication that is a target for the translated content The Translation Jobs displayed in the Translation Jobs queue is filtered depending on the access permissions of the user Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select the Translation Jobs node in the Shortcuts area A list of Translation Jobs is displayed in the list view 3 Filter and sort the list based on the values in any one of the columns Name specifies the name assigned to the Translation Job Date time specifies when the Translation Job was created To From specifies whether the job was initiated from a Source or Target Publication To the job was initiated from a Target Publication From the job was initiated from a Source Publication multiple targets possible Language specifies the language of the Publication where the job was initiated Publication specifies the name of the Publication where the translation was initiated Status specifies the current status of the translation Completed specifies the percentage completion 4 Selecta Translation Job from the list and choose Open from the context menu Result The Translation Job dialog appears 5 Modify properties and settings in the Translation Job dialog What to do next If you have saved the Translation Job you can view modify and add
303. rently performing if Started or has most recently performed if Finished the Activity Started on If the Activity has a Started or Finished state a timestamp representing the moment at which a User picked up the Activity Previous Activity Message A message provided by the User who finished the previous Activity in this Workflow Process typically intended as instructions to the current Owner The Related Items area shows the list of items associated with the current Activity Click the Open button at the right of an item to open the item in a dialog Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 115 Workflow Workflow tab of an item subject to workflow If you open an item that is subject to workflow in Content Manager Explorer the Workflow tab of the item dialog gives you information about the workflow properties of the item The following types of items have a Workflow tab Components Pages Component Templates Page Templates Template Building Blocks Bundles If the Workflow tab shows only the text Approval Status followed by a value one of the following is the case If the value is Undefined the item is either not subject to Workflow at all or it has never entered a Workflow Process If the value is Unapproved the item has completed at least one Workflow Process which did not assign any Approval Status to the item If the value is neither Undefined nor Unapproved the item has completed at least one Work
304. ress Outbound E mail sends a test e mail for each format chosen to the address using the chosen profile Target Groups If you chose to test the Mailing by sending it to a Distribution List Outbound E mail sends a personalized test e mail to each Contact in the list in a format specified in each Contacts details Creating an E mail Campaign An E mail Campaign allows you to coordinate a Mailing campaign by grouping several Mailings together and testing and sending them in one go You can add Mailings from multiple Publications in an E mail Campaign Before you begin To create or edit an E mail Campaign you need Mailing Execution rights You must have created Mailings to add to the E mail Campaign see Creating a Mailing on page 251 About this task An E mail Campaign allows you to Coordinate the sending of a single e mail across multiple Publications Coordinate the sending of a series of e mails consisting of for example a Start Mailing Scheduled Mailing Triggered Mailing and Reminder Mailing You can create an E mail Campaign directly or you can create one when you add a Mailing to an E mail Campaign Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Create or open E mail Campaigns in the Shortcuts view a Select the E mail Campaigns node and choose New gt E mail Campaign in the context menu b Enter a unique Name and optionally a Description Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 259 Audi
305. rite Delete permissions set on the parent Address Book To work with Segments you need Segmentation Management rights and Read Write Delete permissions set on the parent Folder To work with Folders in the Audience Manager node you need Outbound E mail Folder Management rights and Read Write Delete permissions set on the parent Folder Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 193 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Outbound E mail Outbound E mail is for marketing departments that need to implement and manage e mail communication campaigns It enables marketing departments to deliver personalized e mails to specific audiences and track the effectiveness of their communication Outbound E mail users need to perform the following tasks to manage e mail communication campaigns 1 Creating and managing Contacts 2 Creating and classifying Content 3 Combining Contacts and Content into Mailings and optionally combine Mailings into E mail Campaigns The following diagram provides an overview of user tasks for Outbound E mail Contacts Add Manage Contacts Distribution Lists pe i j Inz D fr Mailing Channel 6 Create Mailing Personalize Mailing i MargeFields Content B oo Target c Create Content Classify Content Groups 4L E mail Page Categories amp Koywords Component Presentations BHA This chapter provides an overview of managing Contacts creating Conte
306. rom one or more of the destinations to which it was published ky Validate Validate the HTML in the current Format Area field a Where Used Show which dependencies this item has in relation to other items which items use it which items it uses and so on Note 1 for more information refer to the implementer s documentation portal Breadcrumb trail The breadcrumb trail shows the path to your current location in the navigation tree on the left Manager Explorer on the left You can click on any of the node names in the breadcrumb trail to jump to the corresponding node in the tree and load the contents of that node in the content area 20 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Info Bar The Info Bar at the top right of your screen displays your name notifications and Workflow items The notification area of the Info Bar the flag icon with the number next to it gives you access to all informational messages warnings and errors that have occurred Click this area to see the notifications in a balloon popup You can toggle between Show All and Show Pending Only Slide out navigation Select the slide out button at top left to access the slide out navigation groups and items Slide out navigation Home screen In the slide out navigation select Home at the top to see a personalized welcome screen This screen contains a quick search interface quick links to help topics to get you s
307. rom the Regional Settings dropdown The change is applied when you click elsewhere on the screen 3 To change your profile picture do the following Click on your name or profile picture at the top right part of the screen b In the dialog that opens click Edit under the profile picture c In the Profile picture screen that slides into view select Upload profile picture to open a file selection dialog d Navigate to a folder on a local or network drive that contains a picture of yourself you would like to use and select it The picture is uploaded and appears with a rectangle over it e Ifneeded move and resize the rectangle that appears in order to select which part of the image you want to show Then click Apply Note that you can revert to the original picture at any time by selecting Reset profile picture Results Your preferences are updated and affect both Content Manager Explorer and Experience Manager Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Viewing the User Manual online To view the User Manual for Content Manager Explorer online access the slide out navigation on the left select Help and click Topics for Authors and Editors Content Manager Explorer in the screen that appears E mailing a link to a Content Manager item You can e mail a link to any item in the Content Manager Procedure 1 Inthe main screen select an item for which you want to send a link or open the
308. rom your application File menu Before you begin You may experience problems browsing for and opening items with a name that contains special characters These problems are due to variations in the way that different windows 298 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual WebDAV Connector platforms and applications handle these characters When naming Publications Folders or items that will be accessed from a client application using WebDAV ensure that the following reserved characters are not part of the name e amp mona 8a 3 db a Note Microsoft Knowledge Base article 826437 found on the Microsoft support Web siteathttp support microsoft com kb 826437 en us describes a manual fix for this problem for the characters and amp About this task Filenames of path names may cause errors when you open an item from or save an item to the Content Manager If this happens use the drag and drop feature to save the item to and open the item from you client machine Edit the item on your machine and then drag and drop the file back to the Content Manager using Windows Explorer The following task describes accessing Content Manager items through Windows Explorer and from Altova XML Spy Procedure 1 Access items from Windows Explorer from the Windows start menu start Windows Explorer 2 In the navigation tree on the left select My Network Places and in this node select the WebDAV folder At thi
309. rrent Publication to render the differences As a result Component content that is not rendered by this template will not be compared Results You have compared two versions of a Content Manager item Rolling back to a previous version Rollback allows you to create a new version based on a previous version which then becomes the current version or select a previous version as the current version and delete all versions created after it Before you begin To rollback to a previous version of an item you must have rights for the item you want to rollback for example Component Management rights and write permissions for the containing Folder or Structure Group It is not possible to rollback if the following conditions apply the item is a shared item the item is checked out the item is in Workflow only one version of the item exists About this task Note If you select a previous version as the current item all subsequent versions are deleted and irretrievable Procedure 1 Access the Version History List 2 Inthe Version History List select the version to which you want to rollback 3 Right click the version and in the context menu that opens select Versioning gt Rollback 4 Inthe pop up that appears select one of the following choices To create a new version based on the selected item select the first option and click OK To delete all versions after the selected version select the s
310. rs and Editors Web site editing opens help topics specific to the Experience Manager user interface These topics are intended for users who use this GUI to create and edit content Topics for Administrators and Implementers opens the help topics in the documentation portal These topics are intended for people who want to install implement and extend product functionality These topics are hosted on an online SDL LiveContent Reach Web site so you need an active internet connection You also need a username and password to log on to the site SDL Customer Support can supply you with these credentials Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Community The following resources provide you with ways to connect with other implementers of the product as well as with the people who create SDL Tridion a SDL Tridion World is a community Web site for implementers of SDL Tridion and its add on products This is an online Web site so you need an active internet connection You also need a username and password to log on to the site SDL Customer Support can supply you with these credentials a SDL Tridion Ideas lets you submit ideas to improve or expand our product and vote on other people s ideas a SDL Tridion Product Updates gives you access to the latest patches to your current release Education Select SDL Tridion Training to see when trainings are held and how you can sign up for trainings Slide
311. rsion history list of an item to view the list and to perform actions on versions of items Before you begin To view the version history list you must have Read permissions to the Folder or Structure Group that contains the item Procedure 1 To view the Version History list navigate to the location of the item for which you want to view the Version History list 2 Inthe list view select the item and click History in the Home tab of the Ribbon Result The Version History list appears Results You can perform the following tasks from the Version History List Viewing version Comparing two versions Rolling back to a previous version Deleting a version 136 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Versioning Viewing a version You can view an item from the Version History list in read only mode Procedure 1 Access the Version History List 2 From the Version History list do one of the following m Double click on an item Right click on an item and select Open from the context menu Results The item opens in read only mode Comparing two versions You can compare two versions of an item to view the changes made Before you begin To compare versions of an item you must have rights to view the item and read permissions About this task You can compare two different versions of the following types of items Components Multimedia Components Component Templates Pages Page Template
312. s Inthe Publications area select a Publication and navigate to User Generated Content gt Comments Result A number of filter options appears in the top of the content area and the bottom of the content area shows all comments submitted today Click the Refresh icon at the top at any time to see the most up to date list Each filter option has an equivalent filter control in the column header 2 Apply any or all filters to change the comments displayed in the bottom half The filters available to you are 280 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual User Generated Content Moderation status Clear any of the status values to not see items with that moderation status in the results check a status value to see items with that moderation status The status values are Published to Web site indicates that the comment is currently available for viewing on the published Web page Rejected by moderator indicates that a user has rejected the comment removing it from the published Web page Submitted needs moderation indicates that the comment has been submitted by a visitor and is pending moderation The comment is not yet available for viewing on the published Web page and may never be Modified by visitor needs moderation indicates that a visitor has submitted this comment and it has been made available for viewing on the published Web page Now the same visitor who submitted the comment has made changes to it and res
313. s Component Presentations combine a Component content with a Component Template design These Component Presentations are defined on a Page Page Templates Page Templates determine which Component Presentations a Page displays and determines the overall layout of the Page Also a Page Template often determines the branding the look and feel of the Page Pages Pages combine a Page Template and one or more Component Presentations Depending upon your role in your organization you may participate in creating or using any of these building blocks Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 5 Getting started Publication rights and permissions A right determines the type of building block that a Content Manager user can work with Permissions determine if you can view create delete or localize the building blocks for which you have rights Your system administrator assigns you with specific rights for each Publication that you work in and Permission settings for each Folder or Structure Group in that Publication For example if you have Component Management rights and Read and Write permissions set on a Folder you can create and edit Components but you cannot delete or localize them Additional features and functionality Additional features and functionality important to the management of content are BluePrinting Versioning Check in and check out items Search and Workflow BluePrinting A BluePrint is a relation
314. s Schemas Template Building Blocks When you compare versions a Compare pane appears that highlights the differences between the two versions New text appears in Blue Deleted text appears in Green Strikethrough Red underlined text is a changed Component or Multimedia Link You can compare any two versions Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 137 Versioning Procedure 1 Access the Version History List 2 Inthe Version History List select two items To select non concurrent items select one item press the Ctrl key on your keyboard and select a second item 3 Click the Compare icon from the toolbar or right click and select Compare from the context menu Ez AR d GO Ca E asp qus Name Version User New Component 1 0 Tridion C TestComponent 2 0 Tridion C TestComponent Current 3 0 E Send Item Link gt Bh Compare 2 Rollback jj Delete Q Refresh 4 Click the Compare Versions button The Comparison pane displays a comparison of the two versions m TestComponent 2 0 i m tb et z m m 2 Difference and e TestComponent 3 0 Current Rebuild Component TestComponent Using Schema fa fa Component Fields NewField The quick brown fox jempsjumped over the lazy dog Close 138 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Versioning Note When you compare two versions of a Component the Content Manager uses the default Component Template for the cu
315. s When you publish these items the Content Manager publishes the following items One or more Pages Oneor more dynamic Component Presentations Published Pages combine the Page Template and Component Presentations A Page Template determines where how and which Component Presentations are rendered and also often includes navigation and branding features A Component Presentation combines a Component or Multimedia Component with a Component Template The Multimedia Component contains the content while the Component Template determines how and which content from the Component is rendered Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 127 Publishing Note Scripting in the Component Template and Page Template determines the design and content that the Content Manager publishes You can publish Pages if users created them within publishable Structure Groups Dynamic Component Presentations differ from embedded Component Presentations in that the Content Manager publishes them to a Content Repository rather than embedding them on a Page To use dynamic Component Templates you must use Dynamic Content Delivery See the implementer s documentation portal for information about configuring publishing settings and Dynamic Content Delivery Publishing and republishing items from the Content Manager You can publish republish and unpublish Pages Components Structure Groups Bundles and Publications About this task When y
316. s point Content Manager may prompt you for a valid user name password and domain Provide valid credentials if this happens Result Windows Explorer displays a list of Windows folders representing Publications in Content Manager The following image shows one Publication opened to reveal its Building Blocks folder 3 Navigate through the folder tree as you would any Windows file system and open a file you want to view or edit 4 Access items from Altova XML Spy from the Windows start menu start Altova XML Spy Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 299 WebDAV Connector 5 Select File gt Open from the menu bar and navigate to the WebDAV folder At this point Content Manager may prompt you for a valid user name password and domain Provide valid credentials if this happens Result The Open dialog displays a list of Windows folders representing Publications in Content Manager 6 Navigate through the folder tree as would any Windows file system and open a file you want to view or edit By default XML Spy only displays files of a type that it can handle Of the standard SDL Tridion item types these are XML files Components XSD files SDL Tridion Schemas XSL XSLT files XSLT stylesheet Template Building Blocks Creating new items If authorized you can create Schemas Components Multimedia Components PageTemplates Component Templates Template Building Blocks and Folders from an external ap
317. s the Content Manager Explorer using the following browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 0 Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 0 Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 0 The latest version of Mozilla Firefox The latest version of Google Chrome Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 7 Getting started Safari 7 0 for the Mac Safari 6 1 for the Mac Safari 6 0 for the Mac Configuring your Web browser for Content Manager Explorer This section explains how to configure your Web browser for use with Content Manager Explorer About this task Note Depending on rights configured not all users of the client system may be able to perform these tasks Procedure 1 To configure the browser on your client machine start Internet Explorer even if you do not intend to use Internet Explorer as your browser 2 In Internet Explorer if you do not see the menu bar press your left Alt key on the keyboard to display it 3 Select View gt Encoding gt Unicode from the menu This sets the browser encoding to Unicode 4 Select Tools gt Internet Options from the menu The Internet Options dialog opens 5 Access the Security tab select the Local intranet zone and click Sites The Local intranet dialog with generic site settings opens 6 Select Advanced to open a Local intranet dialog listing sites associated with this zone 7 Enter the URL of your Content Manager Explorer Web site and click Add The site is added to t
318. screen that appears Viewing and filtering all comments and ratings in a specific Publication View and filter all comments and ratings in a Publication to check for new comments and ratings to identify comments in need of moderation and to identify overall trends and numbers with regard to commenting and rating Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 279 User Generated Content Procedure 1 To examine all comments and ratings submitted for any content item in a specific Publication access the Content Manager Explorer and in the Publications area select a Publication and expand the User Generated Content node Result The following subnodes appear Comments Rated Content 2 Now do one of the following To see comments submitted for content in this Publication select Comments Refer to Viewing and filtering comments in the comments screen on page 280 to learn more about the comments screen that appears To see ratings submitted for content in this Publication select Rated Content Refer to Viewing and filtering ratings in the ratings screen on page 283 to learn more about the ratings screen that appears Viewing and filtering comments in the comments screen This topic explains what the comments screen looks like and what you can do to filter its contents Procedure 1 To see a comments screen do one of the following In the Shortcuts area navigate to User Generated Content gt Latest Comment
319. ship between Publications whereby Publications share structure content and design from and with other Publications You can view the BluePrint for an item in the BluePrint Viewer on page 46 Versioning The Content Manager creates a new version or an item every time you save changes As a result you can track and compare versions of items using the Version History List which lists all the versions of a selected item including the current version Note For more information using versions of items see Versioning on page 135 Check in and check out items You can check out an item that you are currently working on This gives you exclusive use of the current version and essentially blocks editing to all other users The Content Manager automatically checks out an item when you open it for edit However you can also explicitly check out and then check it in when you have completed work on the item After you have completed work on the item you can check the item back in for use by other users Note For more information about checking in and checking out an item see Check in and check out on page 141 6 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Getting started Search Using the Search View you can search for specific items specifying search parameters on a general or advanced level Note For more information about searching for items in the Content Manager see Search on page 149 Bundles A
320. slation memory Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 175 Translation Manager Creating a Translation Job for SDL TMS Select one or more items you want to send for translation and choose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu to add these to a new or existing Translation Job Before you begin To create a Translation Job you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication or Publications that is a target for the translated content Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Select one or more translatable items in a configured Publication and choose BluePrinting gt Translate from the context menu Result The Translation Job dialog appears 3 Specify how to send the items to translation Select Create New Translation Job and click OK Select Add to existing Translation Job select one of the open Translation Jobs from the list and click OK Note The From To column indicates whether you are creating a Translation Job from a Source Publication From or from a Target Publication To 4 In the General tab enter values in the Translation Job Details section Enter a Name The Configuration path displays the Publication Folder Structure Group Category that is configured for translation Seta Priority Translation Jobs with higher priorities are sent sooner to the SDL TMS than those with lower priorities and also have precedence for translati
321. solve this problem you must narrow the search request Searching in Bundles and Search Folders If you perform a search in a location that contains Bundles or Search Folders search ignores the items in those Bundles or Search Folders unless the actual items themselves are also present in the search location Search input Content Manager Explorer search lets you search for items which appear in the title description or content fields of an item A search item can be a single word like cheeseburger or a set of strings enclosed in double quotes like hot dog To expand or narrow your search you can use multiple search items operators and wildcards in your search input Search based on a URI Every SDL Tridion item has a unique resource identifier URD Procedure 1 Find out what the URI for any SDL Tridion item Place your cursor over an item in the Content Manager Explorer to see a tool tip that shows the SDL Tridion URI of that item Hog re nre nea nne Pe nua MAKWSchema Schema MANewKWSchema Schema F Random Compon T Compor s E C Ca ome componen Random Component tcm 22 1027 C TestComponent Compor Open the item in its own dialog and access the Info tab of the item to see its URI Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 151 Search Ganerw Source Bundiag Workflow Comments Ratings inf A Random Component Type Component JustAPub Building Blocks Crested Fridey Sept
322. stem Administration Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 To export Contacts to a CSV file do one of the following a To export all members of a specific Distribution List or Address Book select the Distribution List or Address Book and either select Export Contacts from the context menu or click the Export Contacts icon in the toolbar b To export a filtered selection of members of a specific Distribution List or Address Book perform a Contacts search and click the Export Contacts button For more information see Searching Contacts on page 209 c To export a selection of members of a specific Distribution List or Address Book then multi select Contacts you want to export and either select Export Contacts from the context menu or click the Export Contacts icon in the toolbar 4 Inthe File Download dialog click Save 5 Inthe standard Windows Save File dialog that appears select a location on your file system enter a name for the file and click Save 226 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Results The export file is saved to the location on your file system specified Columns and rows of data are created in the export file The columns have the same names as the corresponding Contact Details user defined and the following hardcoded columns SUBSCRIBE STATUS ID EMAIL TY
323. su bis 165 Translations and BluePrinting sersrswessiirei trinii yaoi ENNER En ESERSE 165 Translation process iced eb eotie E EE E E O RE ned 168 Translation information esie eie dame EE GC CER EEE Ra Ra ia 171 Translatable content eer err Rete Rer ewer RO E RE de xEEPE EE RES 171 Recursive content educere seo ent e e eR RI E ee AERA hex ehe 174 Translation Jobs 14 conseto ERE REERPRERRIDEN SER RT ER e db qppmepg 175 VI Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Creating a Translation Job for SDL TMS 0 cece eee ees 176 Creating a Translation Job for SDL WorldServer 0 c cece eee eee ees 178 Creating a Translation Job for SDL BeGlobal 0 0 cece eee eee 181 Authorizing SDL BeGlobal Translation Jobs 1 0 eee eee ee 183 Adding items to a Translation Job 184 Viewing a Translation Job 1 cent eee E a e 185 Sending a Translation Job 6 eee n 186 Resending a Translation Job on send error 0600s 186 Retrieving a Translation Job on retrieve error 0 eee eee ee 188 Deleting a Translation Job 2 0 0 6 n nett e eens 189 Monitoring translation progress 2 6 eee eect eee eee eee e ees 189 19 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail 191 Audience Manager 2 2 4 244 4 er A Eua A ePRIGEPRU REP A URP Pa ERR Rh e RS 191 Audience Manager user interface 2 2 2 eect een ees 191 Audience Manager rights and permissions
324. t has previously failed in a Translation Job The state of the Translation Manager is set to In Translation If it fails to receive one or more items again it sets the Translation Job to the Error sending state In this state the Translation Manager will try to retrieve the failed items every 24 hours It will also continue to try to receive items that have not failed that is items that have not yet been sent back from translation 188 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Translation Manager What to do next You can track the progress of the Translation Job in the Translation Progress tab of the Translation Job Deleting a Translation Job You can delete Translation Jobs whose status is Definition Canceled Error sending or Error retrieving directly in the Translation Jobs Queue Before you begin To delete a Translation Job you must have Translation Management rights and one other Content Manager right to a Publication that is a target for the translated content About this task Any user who is authorized to initiate translations and who has access permissions to the Publication which is a target or potential target of translated content can delete an existing Translation Job Procedure 1 Open Content Manager Explorer 2 Go to the Translation Jobs node in the Shortcuts area Result A list of Translation Jobs is displayed 3 Right click a Translation Job in the list and from the context menu that opens
325. t structure Component Presentation Component Component 4 Template tes The Content Manager allows you to create content and layout items separately and then to combine these items to create publishable Pages As a result teams in your organization can accomplish what they do best For example authors can create content designers Component look amp teet beha vio Content k amp Teel beninner Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual l Web site one l eo Grae mz ez Page rae um D aE E GEN H Template p Web content age Getting started can design the look and feel of Pages and editors can determine what content is published where Depending upon your role in your organization you may participate in creating or using any of these building blocks Schemas Schemas define the structure of content and determine the type of content that authors can create For example a Schema called Press Release could define the following fields Headline Date a Summary Body Components Components based on this Schema share the structure defined by the Schema Components are text or multimedia content based on Schemas In the Content Manager Explorer Components are often displayed as forms that content authors can fill in Component Templates Component Templates display the contents of a Component using scripting and HTML formatting Component Presentation
326. tarted For example Your Activity is the creation of an article on the Web site You have created the text for the article but in this specific case you need a photo or graphic to go with the text In this case you would want to reassign the Activity to someone in the Graphics department so you would assign it to that Group You started an Activity but you realize you will be too busy to finish it within the time allotted For that reason you would like to assign it to another User in your Group In addition you sometimes must reassign an Activity you started because you have no access to one or more of its related items For example you may have the right to edit the contents and image of a product description but not to edit the price In this case you must reassign the item to another User or Group 112 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Workflow Procedure 1 Access the Content Manager Explorer Web site 2 Click the Workflow area in the top right part of the screen and in the Things to do dialog that opens select Started Result You see Activities that you started 3 Select an Activity Result A detail screen for this Activity appears 4 Reassign the Activity in one of the following ways a To reassign the Activity to a Group select Assign to a Group select a Group from the dropdown list and click Reassign Result The Activity disappears from your list and appears in the Assigned list of all mem
327. tarted and your personal favorites Search To search the texts of items in the Content Manager enter your search term at top right and click the search button Alternatively to search user documentation enter your search term under Search for select Documentation from the dropdown and click Search Favorites In the main content area you see a list of Content Manager items you have selected as your personal favorites in Content Manager Explorer Select Open under an item in the list to go directly to that item or Go to Location to go to the location that contains the item as displayed To add an item to this list go to the list view in Content Manager Explorer select the item you want to add and in the Ribbon Home tab select Send to My Favorites Quick Links At top right below the search area you see the heading Quick Links Go here to select basic help topics to get you started Slide out navigation Activities screen Select Activities in the slide out navigation to see the Workflow Activities screen which shows you Workflow Activities assigned to your Group started by you and finished by you From this screen you can also start and finish Activities you see Assigned Activities Click Assigned Activities to see Activities assigned to the Group or Groups you belong to or to you personally Click any item in the list to see details about the Activity such as the Content Manager items associated with this Activity
328. tatistics you need Contact Management rights and Read permissions for the Address Book To enable the preview of a sent e mail you need to have selected the Archive personalized e mail check box in your Mailing About this task Note You can also view Contact statistics through Mailing statistics for which you need Mailing Execution or Mailing Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 213 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Procedure 1 2 3 Open the Content Manager Explorer Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node Select the Contact in an Address Book or Distribution List and choose Open from the context menu Result The Contact window appears Note Use the Contact search functionality in an Address Book or Distribution List to locate a Contact Select the E mails tab to view the Mailing sent to the Contact and the status of the Mailings Mailing the name of the Mailing the Contact received Last status update the date when the Contact statistics were last updated Status whether the e mail was Delivered Read Failed or Action ta ken one or more links in the e mail were clicked Select a Mailing and click E mail Details to see what the actual e mail of a Mailing looked like for this Contact The personalized e mail is displayed in a new window Click Close to close the window Creating a Local
329. te new Keywords or just add them to Contacts Optionally a Category column the values of which map to an existing Category Optionally a Publication column the values of which map to an existing Publication Configure logging for import in the OutboundEmail xml configuration file see the SDL Tridion Installation Manual Contact identification Contacts come with a default set of extended detail fields in which the combination DENTIFICATION KEY and IMPORT SOURCE are used to uniquely identify individual Contacts The procedure for changing and configuring contact identification fields and adding Contact Extended Details executed by a Database Administrator is described in the implementation documentation File formatting The following table describes how the data may be formatted in your Keyword import files Note The formatting used in the file needs to be communicated to all users who perform import as these details need to be specified when you import Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 221 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Format option Description Supported Values Field separator Specifies how fields columns are i comma separated semicolon colon Tab tab vertical bar String delimiter Specifies how fields that contain commas double double quotes or line breaks are quotation delimited marks v single quotation marks Row s
330. te to the Folder than contains the Bundle to which you want to add items 2 Open the Bundle in the tree or in the list view and in the Bundle tab that appears in the Ribbon toolbar select Add Items to Bundle Result A dialog opens showing a tree structure for the current Publication 3 Navigate to a location containing one or more items that you want to add to the Bundle select the item s and click Add 4 Repeat the previous step until you have added all items to the Bundle that you wanted to add and then click Close Result SDL Tridion adds the selected item s to the Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is currently in workflow the selected item s are assigned to the User Group associated with the current Activity Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 103 Bundles Removing an item from multiple Bundles Remove an item from multiple Bundles in the Bundles tab of the item dialog it the item has such a tab or from the Bundles themselves Before you begin If a Bundle is subject to a Workflow Process you can only remove the item from it if all of the following are true The Bundle is currently not in a Workflow state that prohibits the removing of Items from it The items you intend to remove is not currently being worked on by a User that is not you Procedure 1 Ifthe item you want to remove is not one of the following Component Page Page Template Component Template Template Buildi
331. tem in any way nor does it change its checked out status or lock status Starting a Workflow Activity If a user starts an Activity all items associated with that Activity are checked out to that user if the user has read access to all of those items The user can now modify the item s and finish the Activity Alternatively if the user does not have read access to all of the items that user cannot modify any of the items nor finish the Activity but can only reassign the Activity Finishing a Workflow Activity If a user finishes an Activity all items associated with that Activity increase their minor version and remain checked out but they now become locked by no user The 142 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual items are in a reserved state Finishing a Workflow Process Versioning If an item exits workflow that is finishes its Workflow Process it is checked in as a new major version Any locks on it are released While an item is checked out the item icon is displayed with a small image of a lock over it CONTENT MANAGEMENT Building Blocks Shortcuts Name Publications b O 444 b Qa local b eo B localized gt ep2 Left b Qo G b Child Pub A gt child Pub amp b Child Pub c gt child Pub D Default Templates BSFolder A Default Multimedia Schema Baxwschema ewKWSchema w Component It also appears in the Checked out items list o
332. ters Contacts based on the region Nordic In a Publication you can also create Local Address Books A Local Address Book is a temporary Address Book which users can create and which contains a collection of Contacts imported from an external data source A Local Address Book is intended for a one time marketing action and are not designed to be used to manage Contacts Contacts A Contact contains the details of a person or organization When you open a Contact you can see Mailing details in the General tab Extended Details in the Details tab characteristics in the Keywords tab and Mailings sent to the Contact in the E mails tab A Contact contains the following information about a person or an organization General amailing information such as a Contacts s e mail address the format the e mail should be sent in the subscription status e mail error status and whether the Contact is active of not Details specific information about a Contact such as name surname phone number and so on Keywords properties or attributes of a Contact that define a Contact s preferences and interests such as a preferred brand of car or hobbies A Contact may have multiple Keywords from one or more Categories E mails the Mailings sent to the Contact and the status of the Mailings Contact filtering In Audience Manager and Outbound E mail you can segment and target audiences Con tacts using filters A filter defines Outbound E
333. text menu to open the BluePrint Viewer Select the item in one of the Publications in the BluePrint hierarchy and click Where used The Where used dialog opens 3 To view where an item is used click the Used In tab The tab displays a list of items that use the item you selected To edit an item in the list select the item and click Open To view the location of an item in the list select the item and click Go To Location 4 To view a list of items this item uses click the Uses tab To edit an item in the list select the item and click Open To view the location of an item select the item and click Go To Location 5 To view Published to information for a Page Component Component Template or Page Template click the Published to tab 6 Click Close to exit Where used BluePrint Viewer The BluePrint Viewer provides a visualization of the Parent Child relationships within a BluePrint and the BluePrint relationship between items About this task The BluePrint Viewer consists of The Home tab in which you can perform actions on a selected item in the BluePrint hierarchy diagram these actions are also available in context menus The View tab in which you can change the view of BluePrint relationships The BluePrint hierarchy diagram displayed in the BluePrint Viewer and the information displayed in it 46 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual BluePrinting Home View Tridion Content E
334. the Dynamic Distribution List Classic Car Fair Test the Mailing Select the Triggered Mailing check box and specify a start date Set up a Subscription Page on your Web site for customers to subscribe to Classic Car Fair Mailing When the customer subscribes the Contact s Keywords are updated resulting in the Contact being added to the Distribution List used in the triggered Mailing Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 265 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E mail node 3 Select the Outbound E mail Folder in which your Mailings are stored In the list view select a tested Mailing you want to set up as a triggered Mailing and choose Open from the context menu Note A tested Mailing is indicated with a green check mark on the Mailing icon 4 To turn the Mailing into a Triggered Mailing at the bottom of the General tab select theTriggered Mailing check box 5 Specify the Start date and optionally an end date to send the e mail during a specified period or indefinitely Click the Calendar button next to Start date to select the date and time on which you want the trigger to be activated mandatory Ifyou want the trigger to expire at some point in time click the Calendar button next to End date and select the date and time on which you want Outbound E mail to stop sending e mails To leave the trigger activate
335. the changes enter another Content Manager Folder and then return to the Search Folder Cut if you cut an item from a Search Folder you can move the item from its original position however if the item still falls within the search criteria it will still appear in the Search Folder Delete if you delete an item from a Search Folder you also delete it from the Content Manager 162 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Search Folders Important It is not possible to create items in or paste items into a Search Folder Search Folders and Content Manager functionality This concept describes Search Folders in relation to BluePrinting Search and Content Manager security BluePrinting In a BluePrint Search Folders are shared to Child Publications You can localize a Search Folder in a Child Publication to edit the name and the metadata Note If a shared or local copy of a Search Folder uses a Workflow Process as Search criteria it will not yield results in a Child Publication since Process Definitions are not BluePrinted The items displayed in a shared or localized Search Folder include local items local copies and shared items within that Publication Search Search Folders do not support indexing of their contents since the contents exist by reference only As a result an end user cannot search for an item within a Search Folder Search Folders are indexed so it is possible to search for a S
336. the comment Results The comment is deleted and no longer appears in Content Manager Explorer nor on the published Web page 290 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual User Generated Content Enforcing comment moderation for a Component or Page Enforce comment moderation to prevent unfiltered commenting Procedure 1 Access Content Manager and navigate to the Component or Page for which you want to enforce comment moderation 2 Open the Component or Page and select the Comments tab 3 Clear the option Show unmoderated comments on this component or Show unmoderated comments on this page at the top 4 Click Save and Close to commit your change Results Comments on this Component or Page will now only appear after a moderator has approved them Refer to Moderating a comment on page 289 for more information Hiding all comments for a Component or Page on the published Web page To no longer make any comments for a Component or Page appear on the published Web page clear the option Show comments on this Component or Show comments on this Page If you do this you very probably also want to disallow commenting About this task Procedure l Access Content Manager and navigate to the Component or Page for which you want to hide comments Open the Component or Page and select the Comments tab Clear the option Show comments on this Component or Show comments on this Page at the top Note If you do
337. the current item the context item selected in the BluePrint Information about the item from which the BluePrint Viewer was invoked the context item and the currently selected context item is displayed at the bottom of the viewer The name of shared items are displayed in italics Publications which do not contain a copy of the selected item are dimmed Ifan item has been localized in a Child Publication the line to the Parent Publication is dotted 5 Click Close to exit the BluePrint Viewer 48 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 4 Components You define all content in the Content Manager in Components To ensure that content is consistent the Content Manager bases all content on Schemas Schemas define fields and field types for specific types of content For example you may need to create a press release Your SDL Tridion system administrator created a Schema that defines what types of content the press release can contain This example Schema may contain the following fields Title a text field in which you type text Summary a text field in which you type text Date a date selection field Body a text field in which you can type and format text Company Information a Component Link field in which you select an existing Component that contains company information Logo a multimedia link field in which you can link to an existing multimedia Component that contains an image You enter co
338. till want to publish all the other Pages in the Structure Group regardless without having to publish them one by one Another example is the failure to publish a Component because one of the Pages on which the Component appears fails to render In this scenario you also do not want the failure of one Page to render to stand in the way of your publishing of your Component To change this behavior of the Content Manager select the option Ignore failures while generating publishable content then select the maximum number of render failures you want to tolerate in the Limit number of failures to option or clear that option to allow an infinite number of render failures Publish Unpublish Structure Group Information select to publish unpublish the Structure Group hierarchy to the Content Delivery side where it is stored as a taxonomy Advanced Publish Unpublish Settings Override Publish Unpublish Priorities the Target Types you select on the left of the Publish dialog represent one or more Publication Targets Each Publication Target has a publish priority low normal or high The publish priority determines how quickly an item is entered in the Publish Queue Use High priority for publish or unpublish actions that are so urgent that they need to bypass the normal publishing queue Use Low priority if you want to use the available publishing time of your servers without getting in the way of normal work To change the publish priority of
339. time at which you want Outbound E mail to start sending e mails When you select this option Outbound E mail fixes the list of Contacts in the Mailings though Contact details and personalized fields are resolved at the moment of sending therefore any changes will be reflected in the sent e mail 5 Specify Advanced settings Number of e mails to send enter the number of Contacts you want to send the Mailing to The window displays the number of Contacts who have not yet received this Mailing Only send e mail to Contacts with all required Merge Field data select this check box if you want the e mail to be sent only if all Merge Fields can be resolved For example if you specify a Merge Field First Name and the Contact has not provided a first name the e mail will not be sent to this Contact when you select this check box Send in batches specify when you want Contacts to receive E mails for example you can send Mailings at a specific time such as 02 00 AM and send them in batches of 10 000 e mails per day Batch size set a batch size in relation to the number of e mails in the Mailing If you are not sure about what batch size to use consult your system administrator to see how many e mails your mail server can process at any one time Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 263 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Important Setting a batch size that is too small in relation to the overall number of e mails degr
340. ting one of the following from the drop down menu New Static Distribution List New Dynamic Distribution List b In Step 2 Enter title and description c In Step 3 Select a Folder where you want to save the Distribution List then click OK to save the Distribution List Results Outbound E mail creates or updates a Static Distribution List and adds the Contacts in the Search results to the list Outbound E mail creates a Dynamic Distribution List The list contains Contacts in a Static Distribution List or Address Book which meet the specified criteria The list of Contacts is updated automatically to match the filter for example when A Contact is added to the Address Book or Static Distribution List whose personal details mailing details or Keywords meet the search criteria A Contact s extended details mailing details or Keyword in the Address Book or Static Distribution List are modified so that these no longer meet the search criteria m You change the definition of the Dynamic Distribution List by modifying the filters Note By default a new Distribution List is assigned a priority value of 1 when a Mailing is sent e mails are sent to Contacts in order of Distribution List priority the higher the value the higher the priority Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 237 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Adding Contacts to a Static Distribution List You can add Contacts to a
341. tion Lists you want to send the mailing to You must also specify the Address Books to which the Contacts in your Distribution Lists must belong a Contact must therefore be in a selected Distribution List and Address Book to receive a Mailing Creating a Contact You can manually add a Contact to an Address Book in the context of one on one customer contact Before you begin To create or update Contacts you need Contact Management rights and Write permissions for the Address Book Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication gt Audience Manager node 3 Select an Address Book and click the New Contact icon in the toolbar Result The Contact window appears 4 Inthe General tab fill in or modify the Mailing details E mail address the person s e mail address E mail type the Contact s preferred e mail format HTML using HTML you can format the text of your e mail and include images and clickable links However not all of your Contacts may be able to see the HTML format e mail This is the default value Text using plain text you can be sure that the recipient of the e mail can read the message but you lose the ability to format your e mail message Multi part HTML and plain text combined in a multi part e mail message The e mail client ofthe recipient determines which format the recipient will see Subscription status indicates the status of a Contact s subscr
342. to skip this step but until you add it to a Bundle your changes will not be checked in 11 If this item must be added to a Bundle a dialog opens asking you if you would like to do so now You can choose Not Now to close the dialog but you see a warning informing you that your item is not in a Bundle and the same dialog will appear every time you save changes to the item Alternatively if you select Add a Bundle selection dialog appears 12 In the tree structure on the left navigate to a Publication and Folder that contains a Bundle to which you want to add the item and add it to that Bundle by selecting the Bundle and clicking Add This adds the item to the selected Bundle and closes the dialog If the Bundle is already in workflow the item will be too You can also select Close which has the same effect as clicking Not Now in the previous dialog Results You have created a Multimedia Component Editing a Multimedia Component 80 You can edit a Multimedia Component to modify the name of the Component to change the multimedia type or to modify any associated metadata Before you begin To edit a Multimedia Component you must have Component Management rights and write permissions for the containing Folder Ina BluePrint the Multimedia Component must be a local item or a local copy Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Multimedia Components Procedure 1 To edit a Multimedia Component navigate to the F
343. to choose a Keyword ListFieldRadio C salt c pepper d Check boxes select a box or boxes if multiple values are allowed from the list ListFieldCheckBoxes C bamboo v pine v lotus e Tree click the Browse button to add a Keyword TreeList Q La Guardia p In the Keyword picker window that opens Select a Keyword and click Insert to add the Keyword to the field Repeat the procedure to add more Keywords if multiple values are allowed Click Close to close the window Use the area to the left to perform the following actions Drag and drop a field to move the selected Keyword to a new position Click Remove to remove the selected Keyword Results The Keyword value or values are added to the field 124 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Metadata and Keywords Viewing related content You can select a Keyword to see in which Content Manager items it is being used The Classified Items List View displays the Components Pages and other Content Manager items that have been tagged with the selected Keyword or Keyword branch allowing you to see related content Procedure 1 Open a Publication 2 Expand the Categories and Keywords node and select a Category or Keyword in the navigation pane or list view Under the list view a list of related content for the selected Keyword and selected filters appears The list is dynamically updated when you select different Ke
344. to each other Results You have examined the Mailing response of a Mailing to see how the Mailing results are distributed 270 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Viewing Distribution List statistics To learn more about who responded to your Mailing and in what way you can select a type of Mailing result and then examine the members of each Distribution List within that Mailing result Before you begin To view Mailing statistics you need Mailing Execution or Mailing Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder About this task You can also create a new Distribution List or update an existing one with the Contacts in the Mailing result For example if you are examining all the members of a Distribution List who read your Mailing it can be worthwhile to isolate them as a responsive audience or to save the Contacts to an export CSV file Procedure 1 In the Publication gt Outbound E mail node navigate to the Folder where your Mailings are stored select a Mailing and click the Explore Mailing Status icon in the toolbar Result The Mailing opens on the Statistics tab 2 To see the statistics for Distribution List members Select a response type in the Status overview or Actions taken b Select a Distribution List and click Show Contacts c Outbound E mail opens a window for the selected Distribution List detailing the members of the Distribution
345. to have a basic understanding of your translation BluePrint how authorization affects the scope of a translation and how the Content Manager handles localization This section provides some background information on how translating is set up in the Content Manager Translation BluePrint Before you start initiating translations it is a good idea to have a sound understanding of the Translation BluePrint used by your organization A BluePrint is a hierarchy of Publications which defines how content is shared and reused The Translation BluePrint models your localization and translation strategy the structure defined by your BluePrint drives translations and dictates the translation flow It defines which from source languages to which target languages you can translate to and which Publications contain content in a source language Source Publications and which Publications can receive translated content Target Publications The BluePrint Viewer on page 46 provides a visualization of the Parent Child relationships within a BluePrint and the BluePrint relationship between items Select Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 165 Translation Manager an item in the Content Manager Explorer and choose BluePrinting gt BluePrint Hierarchy in the context menu to view the BluePrint The following image shows a BluePrint displayed in the Tree View of the Content Manager Explorer and in the BluePrint Viewer CONTENT MANAGEMENT
346. to your Started list and you see its details screen with a Finish Activity button No other member of your Group can work on this Activity The number in your Workflow area goes up by 1 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 111 Workflow Performing a Workflow Activity you have picked up View Workflow Activities you have picked up at the top right hand part of the screen and perform the Activity Procedure 1 Access the Content Manager Explorer Web site 2 Click the Workflow area in the top right part of the screen and in the Things to do dialog that opens select Started Result You see Activities that you started 3 Select an Activity Result A detail screen for this Activity appears 4 Perform an Activity in one of the following ways a Ifthe Activity is a Task that is if it has no items associated with it study the title and description of the Task and perform it b Ifthe Activity has one or more items associated with it select each item in turn to open it in a form based dialog Examine and if need be edit the item and save and close it Repeat until you have dealt with all items Result You are now done with your Activity and you can finish it Reassigning a Workflow Activity you have picked up After you have started an Activity you can and sometimes must reassign it to another User or Group About this task In certain situations you may find yourself wanting to reassign an Activity you s
347. tor A Contact contains a customer s personal details and Mailing history Folders in the Audience Manager node are used to organize Segments A Segment is a logical grouping of people that represent a target audience 192 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Audience Management ribbon toolbar In the Content Manager Explorer select Audience Management The tab shows tasks you can perform in the Audience Manager node in a Publication Tasks are enabled or disabled depending on your current context Auhenoe Management Search and List View Select an Address Book in the navigation pane to view its Contacts Define search criteria and click Search to filter the list in which case the list view displays the Contacts is the list who meet the criteria You can save a filtered list as a Distribution List or export the Contacts Alt Contacts Togale view E titer Cortes Espor Seve Reasi Zaart Audience Manager rights and permissions Rights determine the type of items for example Contacts or Segments you may work with and Permissions determine what actions you can perform on the items for which you have rights for example whether you may view create or delete Contacts or Segments Your system administrator assigns you with specific rights for each Publication that you work in To work with Contacts you need Contact Management rights and Read W
348. tus of a Contact s subscription Opted in the Contact registered as a subscriber and confirmed the registration Subscribed the Contact registered as a subscriber but did not yet confirm the registration Unsubscribed the Contact would not like to receive e mail 230 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Audience Manager and Outbound E mail E mail error status indicates whether problems have been encountered sending e mails to the Contact No problems e mails sent to this Contact should arrive without incident Temporary problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered temporary problems for example the Contact s e mail Inbox was full Persistent problems e mails sent to this Contact have encountered permanent problems for example the e mail address of the Contact does not exist Active Yes or No indicating Contacts who can or cannot receive e mails 6 In the Details tab you can specify Contact extended details to filter on filter operators Note Extended details are configurable and implementation specific 7 In the Categories and Keywords tab you can specify Keyword criteria to filter Contacts on their assigned Keywords a Click Add b Browse to and select a Keyword c Click Insert d Repeat the procedure to add more Keywords e Click Close when you have finished adding Keywords f Toremove a Keyword select it click the Remove button Note The
349. u can then send for translation to the translation management system A Translation Job in the Content Manager may be split into several Translation Jobs on the translation management system depending on the configuration of the Translation Manager and whether you are translating from multiple source or target languages When a job has been translated on the translation management system and been processed through workflow it is sent back to the Content Manager Server where the item is copied over and checked in As the original job on the Translation Manager may have been split into several jobs in the translation management system the Translation Job is not set to completed until all these jobs have been translated returned and checked in The translation management system is the owner of the translated content therefore if you modify a localized item in the Content Manager which has been translated by the translation management system these changes will be lost if the item you changed is sent to translation again because the translation management system works on the basis of a translation memory and it has no memory of these changes The content will be translated according to its memory and the translation items it sends back will overwrite the ones in the Content Manager Therefore if you want to update the content of a translated item implement a review stage in the workflow or manually update the translation units stored within the tran
350. ublications are displayed Filter by Date Range Select Today This Week or This Month to show results only for those periods Alternatively select Set Date Range and use the two Select Date buttons to select the start and end times of your date range to specify the period for which you want to see results The results displayed are Interactive content breakdown This area shows the percentage of commented or rated Pages or Components the total number of comments submitted in the period you specified and the number of unique visitors who left them the total number of ratings submitted in the period you specified and their average score the percentage of users that are active on your Web site User Engagement over Time Shows trends in commenting rating and both for the period you specified Comments awaiting moderation A list of comments in need of moderation Content with the most comments The top 10 Pages and Components ranked by the number of comments they received most comments at the top Highest rated content The first 10 Pages and Components ranked by the ratings they received highest rating at the top Lowest rated content The first 10 Pages and Components ranked by the ratings they received lowest rating at the top You can use the Show All Comments and Show All Ratings buttons to see all comments or ratings submitted 24 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Sl
351. ubmitted it and it is pending moderation The modified comment is not yet available for viewing on the published Web page and may never be Flagged needs moderation indicates that a visitor or a Content Manager user has flagged a comment for moderation that is currently available for viewing on the published Web page The comment is now subject to moderation the outcome of which may cause it to be removed from the published Web page Flagged deletion requested indicates that a visitor or a Content Manager user has flagged a comment for deletion that is currently available for viewing on the published Web page The comment is now subject to moderation the outcome of which may cause it to be removed from the published Web page Created by User Select a specific user that is Web site visitor to see only comments submitted by that user Last modified by Moderator Select a specific Content Manager user to see only comments that were last modified by that moderator Associated Item Type Select Component to see only comments submitted for Components and Page to see only comments submitted for Pages Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 281 User Generated Content Date Created Select a value to specify a time frame or no time frame within which comments must have been submitted Select All to see comments submitted at any time Select Today to see comments submitted since midnight today Select This week
352. uilding Block Bundle or Virtual Folder open the item and select its General tab To spell check the metadata text fields of a Component open it and select its Metadata tab Click the Check Spelling button on the Home Ribbon toolbar The SpellChecker pop up opens If errors are found the word is highlighted in the item dialog and SpellChecker offers one or more suggested alternate spellings If there are no errors the popup displays a message indicating that the spell check is complete If necessary you can change the default language of the spell check using the Language option Note If you change the default language during a spell check SpellChecker rechecks the spelling using the selected language including any previously checked words SpellChecker also remembers the selected language for the duration of the browser session For example if you spell check a Component and check the spelling of the Component in German then open another Component and spell check it the spell check language will initially also be German If you close your browser the language will be reset to the default spell check language For each detected error you can use one of the following options Ignore ignore the detected error and continue checking Ignore all ignore the detected error every time it appears in a text field in this item Change use the default suggestion in the Change To field select the suggestion that applies to
353. up or Category that contains the item s you want to delete 2 From the list view select the item s you want to delete Note For information about selecting multiple items see Working with multiple items displayed in the list view on page 31 3 Click the Delete icon on the Home tab of the Ribbon Note If you selected a Keyword your are prompted whether to delete just the Keyword or the Keyword Branch all its child Keywords If you just delete the Keyword the child Keywords are moved up one level in the tree structure Results The Content Manager deletes the item or items You cannot retrieve items after you delete them If your select multiple items for deletion the Content Manager only deletes the items that meet the prerequisites Refreshing the list view The contents of the list view are normally up to date However if you do not see an item you would expect to find click the Refresh button in the bar above the list to manually refresh the list Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Content Manager Explorer Edit window When you open or create an item an edit window opens The edit window displays the fields you use to edit or create an item Home Organze Workflow Format a 5 amp A 6 ag Save Save and Ciose Save and BluePrin Hierarchy Where Used Preview Compare History New Manage General Source Bundles Workflow Comments Ratings Info Name SDL Tridion 2013
354. us Orah Oci qa font D Oe bainet ES RS W BADR fee Omm beera Phim m bet wee omm imm oa oe 7 irera B Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 13 Content Manager Explorer Content Manager Explorer Ribbon The Content Manager Explorer displays buttons and controls in a Ribbon The Ribbon is a tabbed toolbar that contains controls for all the operations you can perform More frequently used operations have vise buttons i main screen has a Ribbon and individual dialogs can also have a Ribbon 5 um The Ribbon may not display all available controls or may disable certain controls What the Ribbon looks like for you exactly depends on the following Your security settings The currently selected item The currently displayed item Note also that the same control may appear in multiple tabs of the Ribbon When you create a new item or edit an item the window in which you work also displays a Ribbon with its own tabs and controls Here is an example of a Ribbon specific to a ot opo eR m UINU a MEME PDUUUEEE dialog manea an EE To save screen space you can collapse the ribbon to a simple icons nly toolbar by clicking the collapse expand button on the left hand side BEG RMRS A Click the collapse expand button again to return the toolbar to its Ribbon appearance Content Manager Explorer remembers the collapsed or expanded state of your Ribbon toolbars across sessi
355. ust have Page Management rights and write permissions for the containing Structure Group About this task When you create a Page you specify the building blocks that the Page uses Component Presentations which are the combination of Components and Component Templates A Page Template Optionally a metadata Schema and metadata values Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 83 Pages Procedure 1 To create a Page navigate to the Publication and Structure Group in which you want to create the Page 2 Inthe Create tab of the Ribbon click New Page Result A New Page window appears 3 On the General tab fill in the following fields Name the name of the Page must be unique within the Structure Group in which you create it Content Manager Explorer displays this name in the list view File name you must make the file name unique within the Structure Group in which you create it This is the name of the Page as it will appear on the Web site Page Template the Page Template that the Content Manager will use to render the Page If you click the Inherit From Parent option the Page uses the default Page Template specified for the Publication Metadata Schema optional you can select a metadata schema to create metadata values for the Page You must fill in any mandatory metadata fields before you can save the Page 4 Select the Component Presentation tab 5 In this tab click Insert The following
356. ut When you open a Content Manager item from an external application using WebDAV the item is checked out automatically unless you explicitly choose and are able to open them in read only mode If you external application lets you open an item in read only mode it often does so in the Open dialog _ When you save a Content Manager item back to the Content Manager using WebDAV the item is checked in automatically 302 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual WebDAV Connector Troubleshooting Opening an item containing non alphanumeric characters This troubleshooting section explains how to open items in WebDAV that have certain non alphanumeric characters in the filename Problem description You cannot browse to or open items using WebDAV if the name of the item contains one of the following characters ses Ree eee Diagnosis This problem is inherent to the way in which different Windows platforms and applications handle these characters Solution There are several solutions to this problem Ifthe characters that cause problems are among the following amp then you can fix this problem manually as described in Microsoft Knowledge Base article 826437 find this article on the Microsoft support Web site at the URLhttp support microsoft com kb 826437 en us Ifthe characters that cause problems are other you can do the following Use the Content Manager Explorer to interact with these items Rena
357. uted and what links were clicked in the e mail You can also see result percentages per Distribution List Distribution List statistics details show you which Contacts in a specific Distribution List shared the same Mailing result For example you can see which members of the Male Adolescents Distribution List opened their Mailing You can turn such a selection into a new Distribution List or export the Contacts to CSV file Contact details show you which Mailings were sent to a specific Contact and what action they took Mailing details show you what a Mailing looked like to a specific Contact that Is you see the specific e mail message that arrived in this one Contact s e mail inbox Number counts indicating the number of Contacts contained in Distribution Lists and Address Books are not calculated automatically To view and update the number counts you need to use the Refresh statistics functionality Mailing statistics When a Mailing is sent a snapshot is taken of the Mailing that provides you with statistics of the Distribution Lists in the Mailing and Contacts in the Distribution Lists who are the recipients of the Mailing A snapshot is taken of all Mailings regardless of whether they are sent manually scheduled or triggered Mailing statistics show all Distribution Lists and Contacts in the Distribution Lists that were part of the Mailing when it was queued The Distribution Lists are shown in order of their priority
358. want to create the Component and click the New Component icon in the toolbar 4 On the General tab fill in the following fields Name the name of the Component Schema the Schema on which this Component will be based if your SDL Tridion system administrator defined a mandatory Schema for the Folder in which you create a Component the Content Manager a selects a Schema for you After you have selected a Schema a series of fields appears Fill in all mandatory fields and optional fields as necessary Mandatory fields have a red beside them 5 A Component may also use Metadata fields If so a Metadata tab appears Select the Metadata tab if applicable and fill in the mandatory fields and if applicable the optional fields 6 Click Save and Close Results You have created a Component Creating and previewing an e mail Page An E mail Page in Outbound E mail represents an e mail message Before you begin To create a Page you must have Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 245 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Page Management rights and Write permissions for the containing Structure Group Page Templates and Component Templates available to you that define the visualization of Components and Pages About this task Creating an E mail Page involves the following tasks specifying how the Page as a whole should be displayed specifying which Components are part of the e mail message
359. ws and columns from a table Icon Action Description H Insert a row above a Click on a cell Click the Insert row above icon The selected cell Content Manager inserts a row above the selected cell ZH Insert a row below a Click on a cell Click the Insert row below icon selected cell The Content Manager inserts a row below the selected cell Ezg Insert a column to the left Click on a cell Click the Insert column to the left of a selected cell icon The Content Manager inserts a column to the left of the selected cell Be Insert a column to the Click on a cell Click the Insert column to the right right of a selected cell icon The Content Manager inserts a column to the right of the selected cell ER Remove a row Click on a cell in the row you want to remove Click the Remove row icon The Content Manager removes the row and the contents of the row ER Remove a column Click on a cell in the column you want to remove Click the Remove column icon The Content Manager removes the column and the contents of the column Merging and splitting cells in a table The following table describes how to merge and split cells in a table lcon Action Description ES Merging cells in In the table preview area click on a cell you want to merge a table with another cell Press the Shift key and select the area of cells you want to merge Click the Merge cells icon E Splitting a cell In the table preview area click
360. xample if a Contact is both a Business Contact and a Consumer Contact both Keywords apply d Lr E ETED Note If a Category and Keyword in the list are both marked the Keyword has been deleted 8 Click Save and Close Results Outbound E mail creates a Dynamic Distribution List based on the specified filter criteria The Dynamic Distribution List contains Contacts who meet the search criteria specified By default a new Distribution List is assigned a priority value of 1 when a Mailing is sent e mails are sent to Contacts in order of Distribution List priority the higher the value the higher the priority m Outbound E mail updates the Dynamic Distribution List The Dynamic Distribution List contains Contacts who meet the revised search criteria Creating a snapshot of a Dynamic Distribution List A Dynamic Distribution List changes constantly as Contact details change and Contacts are added and removed from the Address Book To make a record of what Contacts were members of a Dynamic Distribution List at a specific moment in time you can create a static copy of a Dynamic Distribution List Before you begin To create or update a Distribution List you need Distribution List Management rights and Write permissions for the destination Outbound E mail Folder Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer 2 Navigate to the Publication Outbound E mail node 3 Expa
361. xample which percentage of Contacts opened the e mail or not and whether they took action on the e mail for example by clicking links Before you begin To view Mailing statistics you need Mailing Execution or Mailing Management rights and Read permissions for the Outbound E mail Folder Procedure 1 Open the Content Manager Explorer Navigate to the Publication gt Outbound E mail node 2 3 Select the Folder in which your Mailings are stored 4 In the list view select the Mailing for which you want to examine statistics and click the Explore Mailing Status icon in the toolbar The Mailing opens on the Statistics tab 5 The Statistics tab displays the following information Pie chart graphically displays the status distribution of a Mailing hovering over the pie chart shows you the status details in a tooltip Blue indicates Delivered Green indicates Read m Yellow indicates Action taken Red indicates Failed Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 269 Audience Manager and Outbound E mail Status view the response to the Mailing in percentages The Amount column shows for how many Contacts in the Mailing the status applies A Mailing can have the following statuses Delivered unconfirmed shows how many of the total number of e mails have been sent but not yet opened by their recipients Read confirmed shows how many of the e mails that were delivered were opened by its recipients
362. ystem using the specified translation workflow During this stage the Translation Manager Service polls the translation management system at configured intervals to check for translations that have been processed through workflow You can derive information about the state of the job in the translation management system from the workflow Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 169 Translation Manager status You can see workflow stages in the Translation Progress tab of a Translation Job Between the In Translation and Completed stages the Translation Manager Service retrieves completed translations from the translation management system and does the following copies over the translated items one by one as they are completed to the relevant Target Publications checks in the checked out items sets the job status to Completed when all items in the Translation Job have been translated and updated in the Content Manager or to Error retrieving if an error occurred In the Error retrieving state Translation Manager continues to attempt to receive items that have not yet been sent back from translation If errors are related to specific items for example the returned XML is not valid as opposed to be a generic error for the job for example unable to connect to the server the Translation Manager does the following Attempts to retrieve items previously failed every 24 hours ago If unsuccessful it reverts to the Erro
363. ywords 3 Specify the following search criteria for related content Include sub Keywords select the check box to retrieve items that contain the selected Keyword and or child Keywords in its branch unselect to retrieve items that contain only the selected Keyword Item types choose one of the following from the drop down list Components tretrieves Components containing the Keyword Components and Pages tetrieves Components and Pages contain ing the Keyword All Tetrieves all Content Manager items that contain the Keyword Click the Refresh button after changing the filters to refresh to displayed results What to do next You can perform most of the standard Content Manager actions on the Components and Pages displayed in the result set Open and edit the item Preview the item Go to the item s location Publish Un Publish Localize Un Localize Classify Reclassify Unclassify Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual 125 Metadata and Keywords 126 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual Chapter 13 Publishing You publish Content Manager items to make content available on a Web site You need to republish items when you update content or unpublish content when you want to take it offline You can publish the following Content Manager items Publications Structure Groups Pages Components Multimedia Components Categories and Keywords Component Templates Page Template
364. zing is the process of creating a local copy of a shared item which can then be modified locally Local items Local items are items that have been created in the Child Publication 42 Content Manager Explorer Basic User Manual BluePrinting Items affected by BluePrinting Performing actions on a BluePrint item may affect other Publications in the BluePrint due the relationship between BluePrint Publications Items shared in a BluePrint The following Content Manager items are shared from Parent Publications to Child Publications Folders and Structure Groups that define how content is organized Schemas Components and Pages that define content Component Templates Page Templates and Template Building Blocks that define the look and feel and behavior of content Target Groups that define types of users for personalization Process Definitions that define Workflow Categories and Keywords used for classification and metadata Search Folders that contain search results Actions affecting items in a BluePrint The following table describes the general rules that apply when performing certain actions on an item in a BluePrint Action create edit cut paste copy paste delete localize unlocalize publish unpublish General rule An item created in a Publication is a local item If the Publication is a Parent Publication this item is shared to any Child Publications You can create a loc

Content Manager Explorer options

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents